FCC ID: UIPSQ757M160 Digital Transceiver

160 | Managing the Radio QoS QoS > Summary This page provides a summary of the QoS Settings. See QoS > Traffic Priority and QoS > Traffic Classification for configuration options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO QoS > Traffic Priority Managing the Radio | 161 TRAFFIC PRIORITY Default Management Data Priority The Default Management Data Priority controls the priority of the Ethernet management traffic relative to Ethernet customer traffic. It can be set to Very High, High, Medium and Low. The default setting is Medium. This priority is also used for traffic if the remote serial port is not available for the radio hardware data port option e.g. if the base station is 2E2S and a remote radio is 4E0S. SERIAL PRIORITY This parameter controls the per port priority of the serial customer traffic relative to the Ethernet customer traffic. If equal priority is required to Ethernet traffic, this setting must be the same as the Ethernet Data Priority setting. The serial data priority can be set to Very High, High, Medium and Low. The default setting is Low. A queuing system is used to prioritize traffic from the serial and Ethernet interfaces for over the air transmission. A weighting may be given to each data type and this is used to schedule the next transmission over the air e.g. if there are pending data packets in multiple buffers but serial data has a higher weighting it will be transmitted first. The serial buffer is 20 serial packets (1 packet can be up to 512 bytes). There are four priority queues in the Aprisa SR: Very High, High, Medium and Low. Data is added to one of these queues depending on the priority setting. Data leaves the queues from highest priority to lowest:

the Very High queue is emptied first, followed by High then Medium and finally Low. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 162 | Managing the Radio ETHERNET PRIORITY This parameter controls the per port priority of the Ethernet customer traffic relative to the serial customer traffic. If equal priority is required to serial traffic, this setting must be the same as the Serial Data Priority setting. The Ethernet Priority enables users to set the priority of Ethernet port ingress frames. The priority for each port can be:

1. From PCP priority bits (VLAN priority) in VLAN tagged frames or priority tag (VLAN 0) frames 2. From DSCP priority bits in an IP packet (DSCP in IPv4 TOS field) 3. All frames are set to very high priority 4. All frames are set to high priority 5. All frames are set to medium priority 6. All frames are set to low priority The default setting is Low. A queuing system is used to prioritize customer traffic from the serial and Ethernet interfaces for over the air transmission. A weighting may be given to each data type and this is used to schedule the next transmission over the air e.g. if there are pending data packets in multiple buffers but serial data has a higher weighting it will be transmitted first. The Ethernet buffer is 10 Ethernet packets (1 packet can be up to Ethernet MTU, 1536 bytes). There are four priority queues in the Aprisa SR+: Very High, High, Medium and Low. Data is added to one of these queues depending on the priority setting. Data leaves the queues from highest priority to lowest:

the Very High queue is emptied first, followed by High then Medium and finally Low. Default Priority When the priority of an Ethernet port uses the PCP bits (VLAN priority) values the Default Priority option is enabled, allowing the priority of untagged VLAN frames to be set. When the priority of an Ethernet port uses the DSCP priority (in IPv4 TOS field) values the Default Priority option is enabled, allowing the priority of ARP frames to be set. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO PRIORITY DEFINITIONS PCP (Priority Code Point) These settings provide priority translation / mapping between the external radio LAN VLAN priority network and the radio internal VLAN priority network, using the VLAN tagged PCP (Priority Code Point) priority field in the Ethernet/VLAN frame. Managing the Radio | 163 The IEEE 802.1Q specification defines a standards-based mechanism for providing VLAN tagging and class of service (CoS) across Ethernet networks. This is accomplished through an additional VLAN tag, which carries VLAN tag ID and frame prioritization information (PCP field), inserted within the header of a Layer 2 Ethernet frame. Priority Code Point (PCP) is a 3-bit field that indicates the frame priority level (or CoS). The operation of the PCP field is defined within the IEEE 802.1p standard, which is an extension of 802.1Q. The standard establishes eight levels of priority, referred to as CoS values, where CoS 7 (111 in PCP filed) is the highest priority and CoS 0 (000) is the lowest priority. The radio in bridge mode used the PCP value in the VLAN tag to prioritize packets and provide the appropriate QoS treatment per traffic type. The radio implements 4 priority queuing techniques that base its QoS on the VLAN priority (PCP). Based on VLAN priority bits, traffic can be put into a particular Class of Service (CoS) queue. Packets with higher CoS will always serve first for OTA transfer and on ingress/egress Ethernet ports. The PCP priority definition tab is used to map ingress VLAN packet with PCP priority to the radio internal CoS (priority). Since, in most of the cases the radio VLAN network is connected to the corporate VLAN networks, the network administrator might like to have a different VLAN priority scheme of the radio network CoS. For example, management traffic in the multi-gigabit corporate VLAN network might be prioritize with priority 7 (highest priority) and SCADA traffic with priority 5, but in the narrow bandwidth radio network, SCADA traffic will be map to radio very high CoS / priority (i.e. set PCP 5 = Very high) and management traffic might will be map to radio medium CoS / priority (i.e. set PCP 7 = medium) in order to serve first the mission-critical SCADA traffic over the radio network. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 164 | Managing the Radio This is done by mapping the external radio network VLAN priority to the internal radio CoS / priority using the PCP priority definition tab. The radio support 4 queues, thus at maximum an 8 -> 4 VLAN priority /

CoS mapping is done. Default mapping of ingress packet VLAN priority to radio CoS / priority shown in the PCP priority definition tab. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) These settings provide translation / mapping between the external radio IP priority network and the radio internal IP priority network, using the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) priority field in the IP packet header. Managing the Radio | 165 Differentiated Services (DiffServ) is a new model in which traffic is treated by routers with relative priorities based on the IPv4 type of services (ToS) field. DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) standard defined in RFC 2474 and RFC 2475. DiffServ increases the number of definable priority levels by reallocating bits of an IP packet for priority marking. The DiffServ architecture defines the DiffServ (DS) field, which supersedes the ToS field in IPv4 to make per-hop behaviour (PHB) decisions about packet classification and traffic scheduling functions. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field (in the IPv4 TOS field) is called as the DSCP. The standardized DiffServ field of the packet is marked with a value so that the packet receives a particular routing/forwarding treatment or PHB, at each router node. Using DSCP packet classification, traffic can be partition into multiple priority levels. The radio in router mode uses the DSCP value in the IP header to select a PHB behaviour for the packet and provide the appropriate QoS treatment. The radio implements 4 priority queuing techniques that base its PHB on the DSCP in the IP header of a packet. Based on DSCP, traffic can be put into a particular priority / CoS (Class of Service) queue. Packets with higher CoS will always serve first for OTA transfer and on ingress / egress Ethernet ports. The DSCP priority definition tab is used to map ingress IP packet with DSCP priority to the radio internal priority / CoS. Since, in most of the cases the radio routed network is connected to the corporate routed networks, the network administrator might like to have a different routed network priority scheme of the radio network, for example management traffic in the multi-gigabit corporate routed network might be prioritize with DSCP EF (expedite forwarding) code (DSCP highest priority), and SCADA traffic with DSCP AF11 (assured forwarding) code (high priority), but in the narrow bandwidth radio network, SCADA traffic will be map to radio very high CoS / priority (i.e. set AF11 = Very high) and management traffic might map to radio low CoS / priority (i.e. set EF = Low) in order to serve first the mission-critical SCADA traffic over the radio network. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 166 | Managing the Radio This is done by mapping the external radio network DSCP priority to the internal radio CoS / priority levels using the DSCP priority definition tab. The radio support four queues, thus at maximum a 64 -> 4 CoS /

priority mapping is done. Default mapping of ingress packet DSCP priority to radio CoS shown in the DSCP priority definition tab. The radio maps all 64 DSCP values. The user can configure most common used 21 DSCP codes and the rest are mapped by default to low CoS / priority. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 167 QoS > Traffic Classification These settings provide multiple traffic classification profiles based on classification rules. Profiles for a specific traffic type, protocol or application can be assigned to a particular VLAN and CoS / priority in bridge mode or to CoS / priority in router mode to provide the appropriate QoS treatment. For example SCADA traffic, management traffic, FTP traffic, can each have its own profile build with a set of classification rules. A profile can be build using multiple classification rules based on ports, Ethernet, IP, TCP / UDP headers fields (i.e. L1/2/3/4 header fields) such as: Ethernet port #1, VLAN ID, VLAN priority, IP DSCP Priority, MAC/IP address, TCP / UDP port fields to identify and classify the specific traffic type. When an ingress packet matches the profile L2/3/4 header fields settings, the packet is assigned to a particular VLAN and CoS / priority in bridge mode or to CoS / priority in router mode to provide the appropriate QoS treatment. The radio supports four CoS / priority queues: very high, high, medium and low. These queues are connected to a strict priority scheduler which dispatches packets from the queues out to the egress port by always serving first the very high priority queue, whenever there is a packet in this queue. When the highest priority queue empties, the scheduler will serve the next high priority queues and so on. So when SCADA traffic is assigned to a Very high priority, it will always served first and send over-the-air (OTA) whenever SCADA traffic enters to the radio, giving it the highest priority over other traffic type. These settings are different for Bridge Mode and Router Mode. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 168 | Managing the Radio Bridge Mode Traffic Classification Settings TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION VLAN bridge mode traffic classification settings provide mapping / assigning of profiles (set by rules to match a specific traffic type) to a VLAN ID and VLAN CoS / priority. The profile which is used to match to a specific traffic type will be identified in the radio network by its associated VLAN ID and VLAN CoS /

priority to provide the appropriate QoS treatment. CoS / Priority can be set to very high, high, medium, low priority. Profile name A free form field to enter the profile name with a maximum of 32 chars. Assigned Priority Traffic packets that match the applied profile rules will be assigned to the selected assigned priority setting of Very High, High, Medium and Low. This field cannot be set to Dont Care. This applies profile rule mapping to the VLAN CoS / Priority with the appropriate internal radio assigned priority setting of Very High, High, Medium and Low. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 169 Assigned VLAN ID Traffic packets that match the applied profile rules will be assigned to the selected assigned VLAN ID setting of VLAN ID in the range of 0 to 4095. A VLAN ID of an ingress packet matching the classification rule (see VLAN ID rule in next page) shall be changed to the assigned VLAN ID setting, if below conditions are met:

1. The VLAN ID of Ingress packet is same as PVID of the ingress port. 2. Packet is received untagged at the port If the VLAN ID of the tagged ingress packet is not the same as the PVID of the ingress port, then it shall not be changed and the assigned VLAN ID setting is ignored i.e. ingress VLANs will pass-through unchanged. If assigned VLAN ID value is set in the port VLAN membership under Ethernet > VLAN (port x tab), then this VLAN will be available for ingress and egress on the Ethernet and RF ports, otherwise this VLAN will only be available in one direction on the egress RF port. For example, if the base station Ethernet port 1 assigned VLAN ID = 100 (VLAN-100) and it is also defined in the port VLAN membership under Ethernet > VLAN (port 1 tab) and the remote sends a packet to the base with a VLAN of 100, this packet will be egress out to Ethernet port 1 (tagged or untagged based on the egress action definition). If the VLAN-100 wasnt set in the port VLAN membership, then the base station will drop a packet from the remote. This setting parameter can be Dont Care (Assigned VLAN ID = 0) which means that the VLAN ID of ingress frame will never be modified. Active Activates or deactivates the profile rule. Controls The Save button saves all profiles to the radio. The Cancel button removes all changes since the last save or first view of the page if there has not been any saves. This button will un-select all the Select radio buttons. The Edit button will show the next screen for the selected profile where the profile can be configured. This button will be disabled unless a profile is selected. The Add button adds a new profile, If no profile was selected then the new profile is added to the end of the list, If a profile is selected the new profile is added after that profile. The Delete button will delete the selected profile. The button will be disabled unless a profile has been selected. The Delete All button will delete all the profiles. A pop-up will ask if the action is correct. If the answer is yes, then all profiles are deleted in SuperVisor. The Save button must be pressed to delete all the profiles in the radio. The Move up button will move the selected profile up one in the order of profiles The Move Down button will move the selected profile down one in the order of profiles The Previous button displays the previous page in the list of profiles. A pop up will be displayed if any profile has been modified and not saved, preventing the previous page being displayed. The Next button will display the next page in the list of profiles. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 170 | Managing the Radio To edit a traffic classification, select the profile and click on the Edit button ETHERNET PORT CRITERIA Ethernet Port Set the layer 1 Ethernet port number or all Ethernet ports in the selected profile classification rule. VLAN ID Sets the layer 2 packet Ethernet header VLAD ID field in the selected profile classification rule. Valid values are between 0 and 4095. This VLAN ID should be enabled in the system for using this parameter during classification. Enable this VLAN in the network by setting the same VLAN ID value in PVID (port VLAN ID) and in the PORT VLAN MEMBERSHIP under VLAN PORT SETTINGS Port 1 on page 144. If the VLAN ID is set to zero, all VLAN IDs will meet the criteria. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 171 PRIORITY CRITERIA Priority Type Set the layer 2 Ethernet or layer 3 IP packet header priority type fields in the selected profile classification rules. Priority Type Description None PCP DSCP Do not use any layer 2 / 3 Ethernet or IP header priority fields in the selected profile classification rules. Use the layer 2 Ethernet header priority field of PCP (Priority Code Point) VLAN priority bits (per IEEE 802.1p/q) in the selected profile classification rules. Use the layer 3 IP header TOS field used as DSCP

(Differentiated Services Code Point per RFC 2474 and RFC 2475) priority bit in the selected profile classification rules. PCP / DSCP Range As per the priority type selection, this parameter sets the PCP priority value/s or DSCP priority value/s fields in the selected profile classification rule. The value can be set to a single priority or a single range

(no multiple ranges are allowed), for example, the PCP selected priority value can be 7 or a range of priority values like 4-7. The following table shows the layer 2 packet VLAN tag header PCP priority field values PCP Value

(Decimal) PCP Priority Priority Level 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Priority [7]

Highest Priority [6]

Priority [5]

Priority [4]

Priority [3]

Priority [2]

Priority [1]

Priority [0]

Lowest Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 172 | Managing the Radio The following table shows the layer 3 packet IP header DSCP priority field values DSCP Value

(Decimal) DSCP Priority 46 10 12 14 18 20 22 26 28 30 34 36 38 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 EF (Expedited Forwarding) AF11 (Assured Forwarding) AF12 AF13 AF21 AF22 AF23 AF31 AF32 AF33 AF41 AF42 AF43 CS0/Best Effort (BE) CS1 (Class Selector ) CS2 CS3 CS4 CS5 CS6 CS7 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Click on More Options if more Layer 2/3/4 (Ethernet / IP / TCP or UDP) packet header fields are required for the selected profile classification rule. This page describes all the possible fields that can be used for the classification rules in bridge mode. Managing the Radio | 173 ETHERNET CRITERIA Source MAC Address This parameter sets the Layer 2 Ethernet packet header Source MAC Address field in the selected profile classification rule in the format of hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh. Source MAC Wildcard Mask This parameter sets the wildcard mask of the Source MAC Address. If the Source MAC Address is set to FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, all source MAC addresses will meet the criteria. Destination MAC Address This parameter sets the Layer 2 Ethernet packet header Destination MAC Address field in the selected profile classification rule in the format of hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh. Destination MAC Wildcard Mask This parameter sets the wildcard mask of the Destination MAC Address. If the Destination MAC Address is set to FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, all destination MAC addresses will meet the criteria. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 174 | Managing the Radio EtherType (Hex) This parameter sets the Layer 2 Ethernet packet header EtherType field in the selected profile classification rule. EtherType is a 16 bit (two octets) field in an Ethernet frame. It is used to indicate which protocol is encapsulated in the payload of an Ethernet Frame. EtherType Examples:

Protocol EtherType Value

(Hexadecimal) IPv4 ARP IPv6 VLAN 0800 0806 86DD 8100 IP CRITERIA Source IP Address This parameter sets the Layer 3 IP packet header Source IP Address field in the selected profile classification rule. This parameter is written in the standard IPv4 format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Source IP Wildcard Mask This parameter sets the wildcard mask applied to the Source IP Address. This parameter is written in the standard IPv4 format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. 0 means that it must be a match. If the wildcard mask is set to 0.0.0.0, the complete Source IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rule. If the wildcard mask is set to 0.0.255.255, the first 2 octets of the Source IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rule. If the wildcard mask is set to 255.255.255.255, none of the Source IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rule. Note: The wildcard mask operation is the inverse of subnet mask operation Destination IP Address This parameter sets the Layer 3 IP packet header Destination IP Address field in the selected profile classification rule. This parameter is written in the standard IPv4 format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Destination IP Wildcard Mask This parameter sets the wildcard mask applied to the Destination IP Address. This parameter is written in the standard IPv4 format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. 0 means that it must be a match. If the wildcard mask is set to 0.0.0.0, the complete Destination IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rule. If the wildcard mask is set to 0.0.255.255, the first 2 octets of the Destination IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rule. If the wildcard mask is set to 255.255.255.255, none of the Destination IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rule. Note: The wildcard mask operation is the inverse of subnet mask operation Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO IP Protocol Number This parameter sets the Layer 3 IP packet header Protocol field in the selected profile classification rule. This field defines the protocol used in the data portion of the IP datagram. Protocol number Examples:

Managing the Radio | 175 Protocol ICMP TCP UDP Protocol value

(decimal) 1 6 17 TCP / UDP PORT CRITERIA Source Range This parameter sets the Layer 4 TCP / UDP packet header Source Port or Source Port range field in the selected profile classification rule. To specify a range, insert a dash between the ports e.g. 1000-2000. If the source port range is set to 1-65535, traffic from any source port will meet the criteria. Destination Range This parameter sets the Layer 4 TCP / UDP packet header Destination Port or Destination Port range field in the selected profile classification rules. To specify a range, insert a dash between the ports e.g. 1000-

2000. If the source port range is set to 1-65535, traffic from any source port will meet the criteria. Examples for TCP / UDP Port Numbers:

Protocol TCP / UDP Port #

Modbus IEC 60870-5-104 DNP 3 SNMP SNMP TRAP

(decimal) 502 2,404 20,000 161 162 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 176 | Managing the Radio Router Mode Traffic Classification Settings TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION Router Mode traffic classification settings provide mapping / assigning of profiles (set by rules to match a specific traffic type) to a CoS / priority. The profile which is used to match to a specific traffic type will be identified in the radio network by its associated CoS / priority to provide the appropriate QoS treatment. CoS / Priority can be set to very high, high, medium, low priority. Profile name A free form field to enter the profile name with a maximum of 32 chars. Assigned Priority Traffic packets that match the applied profile rules will be assigned to the selected assigned priority setting of Very High, High, Medium and Low. This field cannot be set to Dont Care. Active Activated or deactivate the profile rule. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 177 Controls The Save button saves all profiles to the radio. The Cancel button removes all changes since the last save or first view of the page if there has not been any saves. This button will un-select all the Select radio buttons. The Edit button will show the next screen for the selected profile where the profile can be configured. This button will be disabled unless a profile is selected. The Add button adds a new profile, If no profile was selected then the new profile is added to the end of the list, If a profile is selected the new profile is added after that profile. The Delete button will delete the selected profile. The button will be disabled unless a profile has been selected. The Delete All button will delete all the profiles. A pop-up will ask if the action is correct. If the answer is yes, then all profiles are deleted in SuperVisor. The Save button must be pressed to delete all the profiles in the radio. The Move up button will move the selected profile up one in the order of profiles The Move Down button will move the selected profile down one in the order of profiles The Previous button displays the previous page in the list of profiles. A pop up will be displayed if any profile has been modified and not saved, preventing the previous page being displayed. The Next button will display the next page in the list of profiles. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 178 | Managing the Radio To edit a traffic classification, select the profile and click on the Edit button ETHERNET PORT CRITERIA Ethernet Port Set the layer 1 Ethernet port number or all Ethernet ports in the selected profile classification rules. PRIORITY CRITERIA DSCP Range Sets the DSCP priority value/s field in the selected profile classification rule. The value can be set to a single priority or a single range (no multiple range are allowed), for example, priority value can be 46 (EF) or a range of priority values like 10-14. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO The following table shows the layer 3 packet IP header DSCP priority field values Managing the Radio | 179 DSCP Value

(Decimal) DSCP Priority 46 10 12 14 18 20 22 26 28 30 34 36 38 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 EF (Expedited Forwarding) AF11 (Assured Forwarding) AF12 AF13 AF21 AF22 AF23 AF31 AF32 AF33 AF41 AF42 AF43 CS0/Best Effort (BE) CS1 (Class Selector ) CS2 CS3 CS4 CS5 CS6 CS7 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 180 | Managing the Radio Click on More Options if more Layer 3/4 packet header fields are required for the selected profile classification rule. This page describes all the possible fields that can be used for the classification rules in router mode. IP CRITERIA Source IP Address This parameter sets the Layer 3 packet IP header Source IP Address field in the selected profile classification rules. This parameter is written in the standard IPv4 format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Source IP Wildcard Mask This parameter sets the wildcard mask applied to the Source IP Address. This parameter is written in the standard IPv4 format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. 0 means that it must be a match. If the wildcard mask is set to 0.0.0.0, the complete Source IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rules. If the wildcard mask is set to 0.0.255.255, the first 2 octets of the Source IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rules. If the wildcard mask is set to 255.255.255.255, none of the Source IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rules. Note: The wildcard mask operation is the inverse of subnet mask operation Destination IP Address This parameter sets the Layer 3 packet IP header Destination IP Address field in the selected profile classification rules. This parameter is written in the standard IPv4 format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 181 Destination IP Wildcard Mask This parameter sets the wildcard mask applied to the Destination IP Address. This parameter is written in the standard IPv4 format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. 0 means that it must be a match. If the wildcard mask is set to 0.0.0.0, the complete Destination IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rules. If the wildcard mask is set to 0.0.255.255, the first 2 octets of the Destination IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rules. If the wildcard mask is set to 255.255.255.255, none of the Destination IP Address will be evaluated for the classification rules. Note: The wildcard mask operation is the inverse of subnet mask operation Protocol Number This parameter sets the Layer 3 IP packet header Protocol field in the selected profile classification rule. This field defines the protocol used in the data portion of the IP datagram. Protocol number Examples:

Protocol ICMP TCP UDP Protocol value

(decimal) 1 6 17 TCP / UDP Port Criteria Source Range This parameter sets the Layer 4 TCP / UDP packet header Source Port or Source Port range field in the selected profile classification rule. To specify a range, insert a dash between the ports e.g. 1000-2000. If the source port range is set to 1-65535, traffic from any source port will meet the criteria. Destination Range This parameter sets the Layer 4 TCP / UDP packet header Destination Port or Destination Port range field in the selected profile classification rule. To specify a range, insert a dash between the ports e.g. 1000-

2000. If the source port range is set to 1-65535, traffic from any source port will meet the criteria. Examples for TCP / UDP Port Numbers:

Protocol TCP / UDP Port #

Modbus IEC 60870-5-104 DNP 3 SNMP SNMP TRAP

(decimal) 502 2,404 20,000 161 162 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 182 | Managing the Radio Security Security > Summary This page displays the current settings for the Security parameters. See Security > Setup and Security > Manager for configuration options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Security > Setup Managing the Radio | 183 PAYLOAD SECURITY PROFILE SETTINGS Security Profile Name This parameter enables the user to predefine a security profile with a specified name. Security Scheme This parameter sets the security scheme to one of the values in the following table:

Security Scheme Disabled (No encryption and no Message Authentication Code) AES Encryption + CCM Authentication 128 bit AES Encryption + CCM Authentication 64 bit AES Encryption + CCM Authentication 32 bit AES Encryption only CCM Authentication 128 bit CCM Authentication 64 bit CCM Authentication 32 bit The default setting is Disabled. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 184 | Managing the Radio Payload Encryption Key Type This parameter sets the Payload Encryption Key Type:

Option Pass Phrase Raw Hexadecimal Function Use the Pass Phrase password format for standard security. Use the Raw Hexadecimal key format for better security. It must comply with the specified encryption key size e.g. if Encryption Type to AES128, the encryption key must be 16 bytes (32 chars) The default setting is Pass Phrase. Payload Encryption Key Size This parameter sets the Encryption Type to AES128, AES192 or AES256. The default setting is AES128. The higher the encryption size the better the security. Payload Encryption Key This parameter sets the Payload Encryption password. This key is used to encrypt the payload. Pass Phrase Good password policy:

contains at least eight characters, and contains at least one upper case letter, and contains at least one lower case letter, and contains at least one digit or another character such as @+... , and is not a term in a familiar language or jargon, and is not identical to or derived from the accompanying account name, from personal characteristics or from information from ones family/social circle, and is easy to remember, for instance by means of a key sentence Raw Hexadecimal The Raw Hexadecimal key must comply with the specified encryption key size e.g. if Encryption Type to AES128, the encryption key must be 16 bytes (32 chars). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 185 KEY ENCRYPTION KEY SETTINGS The Key Encryption Key provides the ability to encrypt the Payload Encryption Key so it can be safely transmitted over the radio link to remote radios. The Key Encryption Key Type, Key Encryption Key Size and Key Encryption Key must be the same on all radios in the network. Key Encryption Key Type This parameter sets the Payload Encryption Key Type:

Option Pass Phrase Raw Hexadecimal Function Use the Pass Phrase password format for standard security. Use the Raw Hexadecimal key format for better security. It must comply with the specified encryption key size e.g. if Encryption Type to AES128, the encryption key must be 16 bytes (32 chars) The default setting is Pass Phrase. Key Encryption Key Size This parameter sets the Encryption Type to AES128, AES192 or AES256. The default setting is AES128. The higher the encryption type the better the security. Key Encryption Key This parameter sets the Key Encryption Key. This is used to encrypt the payload encryption key. USB Transaction Status This parameter shows if a USB flash drive is plugged into the radio host port

. Option Function USB Storage Not Detected A USB flash drive is not plugged into the radio host port. USB Storage Detected A USB flash drive is plugged into the radio host port. Note: Some brands of USB flash drives may not work with 4RF radios. Controls The Save button saves the Key Encryption Key settings to the radio. If the Security Level is set to Strong

(see Security Level on page 191), this button will be grayed out. The Load From USB button loads the Key Encryption Key settings from the USB flash drive. If a USB flash drive is not detected, this button will be grayed out The Copy To USB button copies the Key Encryption Key settings to a file called asrkek.txt on the USB flash drive. This settings file can be used to load into other radios. If a USB flash drive is not detected or the Security Level is set to Strong (see Security Level on page 191), this button will not be shown. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 186 | Managing the Radio Key Encryption Key Summary The security of over-the-air-rekeying depends on a truly random Key Encryption Key. This is why the use of a Raw Hexadecimal key is recommended as a plain text phrase based on known spelling and grammar constructs is not very random. The default Key Encryption Key is provided only to allow testing of the security mechanism and is not intended for operational use. Using the default Key Encryption Key undermines the security of the AES payload encryption because an attacker using the default Key Encryption Key would immediately recover the AES payload key after the first over-the-air-rekeying event. When the Security Level is set to Strong, various protections are applied to the Key Encryption Key setting to prevent tampering. In addition, the Key Encryption Key Type, Key Encryption Key Size, and the Key Encryption Key itself are all loaded from a customer prepared USB key. This is a one way operation to prevent key recovery from radios. While the ability to save a Key Encryption Key to USB exists in Standard Security Level, the Strong Security Level Key Encryption Key is not compromised because the Strong Key Encryption Key is not the same as the Standard Security Level Key Encryption Key. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 187 PROTOCOL SECURITY SETTINGS Telnet option This parameter option determines if you can manage the radio via a Telnet session. The default setting is disabled. ICMP option (Internet Control Message Protocol) This parameter option determines whether the radio will respond to a ping. The default setting is disabled. HTTPS option This parameter option determines if you can manage the radio via a HTTPS session (via a Browser). The default setting is enabled. SNMP Proxy Support This parameter option enables an SNMP proxy server in the base station. This proxy server reduces the radio link traffic during SNMP communication to remote / repeater stations. This option applies to the base station only. The default setting is disabled. This option can also be used if the radio has Serial Only interfaces. SNMP Protocol This parameter sets the SNMP Protocol:

Option Disabled All Versions SNMPv3 Only Function All SNMP functions are disabled. Allows all SNMP protocol versions. Only SNMPv3 transactions will be accepted. SNMPv3 With Authentication Only Only SNMPv3 transactions authenticated using HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA will be accepted (as per table below). SNMPv3 With Encryption Only Only SNMPv3 transactions with an encrypted type of DES or AES will be accepted (as per table below). The default setting is All Versions. The default SNMPv3 with Authentication User Details provided are:

User Name Encryption Type Authentication Type Context Name Authentication Passphrase Encryption Passphrase noAuthUser

-

desUserMD5 desUserSHA authUserMD5 authUserSHA privUserMD5 privUserSHA DES DES

-

-

AES AES

-

MD5 SHA MD5 SHA MD5 SHA noAuth noAuthUser noAuthUser priv priv auth auth priv priv desUserMD5 desUserMD5 desUserSHA desUserSHA authUserMD5 authUserMD5 authUserSHA authUserSHA privUserMD5 privUserMD5 privUserSHA privUserSHA Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 188 | Managing the Radio SNMPv3 Authentication Passphrase The SNMPv3 Authentication Passphrase can be changed via the SNMPv3 secure management protocol interface (not via SuperVisor). When viewing / managing the details of the users via SNMPv3, the standard SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB interface is used. This interface can be used to change the SNMPv3 Authentication Passphrase of the users. The SNMPv3 Authentication Passphrase of a user required to be changed cannot be changed by the same user i.e. a different user must be used for the transactions. Generate New Keys from SNMPv3 USM User Passphrases Net-SNMP is a suite of open source software for using and deploying the SNMP protocol. Similar functionality is built into many commercial SNMP managers. This next step of loading the Aprisa SR+ radios with keys generated from USM user passphrases requires the SNMPv3 USM Management utility provided as part of NET-SNMP. The utility is called snmpusm. It provides a range of commands including the management of changing passwords for SNMPv3 users. In order to use this utility, the user will need to install NET-SNMP on a Linux

(or Windows) or machine. The examples below are from the Linux environment. This tool automatically obtains the engine ID from the target radio before generating the keys and loading them into the target. To change a user authentication passphrase:

The following are examples of:

Changing the privUserSHA user encryption key / password from privUserSHA to privUserSHANew:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u privUserSHA -n priv -l authPriv -a SHA -A privUserSHA -x AES -X privUserSHA -Cx 172.17.70.17 passwd privUserSHA privUserSHANew Changing the privUserSHA user authentication key / password from privUserSHA to privUserSHANew:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u privUserSHA -n priv -l authPriv -a SHA -A privUserSHA -x AES -X privUserSHANew -Ca 172.17.70.17 passwd privUserSHA privUserSHANew Changing the desUserSHA user encryption key / password from desUserSHA to desUserSHANew:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u desUserSHA -n priv -l authPriv -a SHA -A desUserSHA -x DES -X desUserSHA

-Cx 172.17.70.17 passwd desUserSHA desUserSHANew Changing the desUserSHA user authentication key / password from desUserSHA to desUserSHANew:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u desUserSHA -n priv -l authPriv -a SHA -A desUserSHA -x DES -X desUserSHANew -Ca 172.17.70.17 passwd desUserSHA desUserSHANew Changing the privUserMD5 user encryption key / password from privUserMD5 to privUserMD5New:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u privUserMD5 -n priv -l authPriv -a MD5 -A privUserMD5 -x AES -X privUserMD5 -Cx 172.17.70.17 passwd privUserMD5 privUserMD5New Changing the privUserMD5 user authentication key / password from privUserMD5 to privUserMD5New:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u privUserMD5 -n priv -l authPriv -a MD5 -A privUserMD5 -x AES -X privUserMD5New -Ca 172.17.70.17 passwd privUserMD5 privUserMD5New Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 189 Changing the desUserMD5 user encryption key / password from desUserMD5 to desUserMD5New:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u desUserMD5 -n priv -l authPriv -a MD5 -A desUserMD5 -x DES -X desUserMD5 -Cx 172.17.70.17 passwd desUserMD5 desUserMD5New Changing the desUserMD5 user authentication key / password from desUserMD5 to desUserMD5New:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u desUserMD5 -n priv -l authPriv -a MD5 -A desUserMD5 -x DES -X desUserMD5New -Ca 172.17.70.17 passwd desUserMD5 desUserMD5New Changing the authUserSHA user authentication key / password from authUserSHA to authUserSHANew:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u authUserSHA -n auth -l authNoPriv -a SHA -A authUserSHA -Ca 172.17.70.17 passwd authUserSHA authUserSHANew Changing the authUserMD5 user authentication key / password from authUserMD5 to authUserMD5New:

c:\usr\bin>snmpusm -v 3 -u authUserMD5 -n auth -l authNoPriv -a MD5 -A authUserMD5 -Ca 172.17.70.17 passwd authUserMD5 authUserMD5New Notes

-Cx option is to change the Encryption key/password

-Ca option is to change the Authentication key/password Other information on this utility can be obtained from the utility command help itself or online Summary It is necessary to record the new passphrases loaded into the Aprisa SR+ radios and then load the passphrases into the SNMP manager. There is a separate passphrase for the two supported forms of authentication (MD5 and SHA1) only as well as the two forms of authentication used in combination the two forms of encryption (DES and AES). It is vital to change all passphrases even if the depreciated mechanism are not used (MD5 and DES) otherwise an attacker could still use the default passphrases. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 190 | Managing the Radio Reset Unknown Passphrases with the Command Line Interface As it is not possible for users to read previously set passphrases, a CLI command is available from Aprisa SR+ software release 1.4.0 to reset the SNMPv3 USM users back to defaults. Note: USM users are not related to CLI and SuperVisor users. This command will only be accessible to the CLI admin user logins. To reset unknown passphrases:

1. Telnet into each radio in the network and via the CLI reset the passphrases 2. Login to the radio with:

Login: admin Password: *********

3. Set all SNMP3 users to default values with the snmpusm reset command (see SNMP3 users to default values below for the list of default values). 4. Reboot the radio with the reboot command. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 191 SECURITY LEVEL SETTINGS Security Level This parameter sets the Security Level active security features. The default setting is Standard. Option Standard Strong Payload Encryption HTTPS SNMPv3 USB KEK Only If the Security Level is reduced, there will be a pop up message warning that Key Encryption Key will be reset to the default value. If the Security Level is increased, there will be a pop up message reminding user to enter a new Key Encryption Key. If the Security Level is set to Strong, the Save button will be grayed out and the Copy To USB button will not be shown. SNMPv3 Context Addressing SNMPv3 is not user configurable and user can use this option with any NMS. The radio SNMP management interface supports SNMPv3/2 context addressing. The SNMv3 context addressing allows the user to use secure SNMPv3 management while improving NMS performance. A NMS (Network Management System) can access any remote radio directly by using its IP address or via the base / master station SNMPv3 context addressing. The SNMPv3 context addressing can compress the SNMPv3 management traffic OTA (Over The Air) to the remote station by up to 90% relative to direct OTA SNMPv3 access to remote station, avoiding the radio narrow bandwidth traffic loading. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 192 | Managing the Radio Security > Users Note: You must login with admin privileges to add, disable, delete a user or change a password. USER DETAILS Shows a list of the current users setup in the radio. ADD NEW USER To add a new user:

1. Enter the Username. A username can be up to 32 characters but cannot contain back slashes, forward slashes, spaces, tabs, single or double quotes. Usernames are case sensitive. 2. Enter the Password. A password can be 8 to 32 printable characters but cannot contain a tab. Passwords are case sensitive. Good password policy:

contains at least eight characters, and contains at least one upper case letter, and contains at least one lower case letter, and contains at least one digit or another character such as !@#$%^&(){}[]<>... , and is not a term in a familiar language or jargon, and is not identical to or derived from the accompanying account name, from personal characteristics or from information from ones family/social circle, and is easy to remember, for instance by means of a key sentence 3. Select the User Privileges Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO There are four pre-defined User Privilege settings to allocate access rights to users. These user privileges have associated default usernames and passwords of the same name. Managing the Radio | 193 The default login is admin. This login has full access to all radio parameters including the ability to add and change users. There can only be a maximum of two usernames with admin privileges and the last username with admin privileges cannot be deleted. User Default Privilege Username Default Password User Privileges View Technician Engineer Admin admin admin Users in this group can only view the summary pages. Users in this group can view and edit parameters except Security > Users and Security > Setup. Users in this group can view and edit parameters except Security > Users. Users in this group can view and edit all parameters. See SuperVisor Menu Access on page 80 for the list of SuperVisor menu items versus user privileges. 4. Click Add To delete a user:

1. Select Terminal Settings > Security > Users 2. Click on the Select button for the user you wish to delete. 3. Click Delete To change a Password:

1. Select Terminal Settings > Security > Users 2. Click on the Select button for the user you wish to change the Password. 3. Enter the Password. A password can be 8 to 32 characters but cannot contain back slashes, forward slashes, spaces, tabs, single or double quotes. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 194 | Managing the Radio Security > SNMP In addition to web-based management (SuperVisor), the network can also be managed using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) using any version of SNMP v1/2/3. MIB files are supplied, and these can be used by a dedicated SNMP Manager, such as Castle Rocks SNMPc, to access most of the radios configurable parameters. For communication between the SNMP manager and the radio, Access Controls and Community strings must be set up as described in the following sections. A SNMP Community String is used to protect against unauthorized access (similar to a password). The SNMP agent (radio or SNMP manager) will check the community string before performing the task requested in the SNMP message. ACCESS CONTROL SETUP A SNMP Access Control is the IP address of the radio used by an SNMP manager or any other SNMP device to access the radio. The Aprisa SR+ allows access to the radio from any IP address. Read Only The default Read Only community string is public. Read Write The default ReadWrite community string is private. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 195 SNMP Manager Setup The SNMP manager community strings must be setup to access the base station and remote / repeater stations. To access the base station, a community string must be setup on the SNMP manager the same as the community string setup on the radio (see Security > SNMP on page 194). SNMP access to remote / repeater stations can be achieved by using the radios IP address and the normal community string or by proxy in the base station. SNMP Access via Base Station Proxy To access the remote / repeater stations via the base station proxy, the community strings must be setup on the SNMP manager in the format:

ccccccccc:bbbbbb Where:

ccccccccc is the community string of the base station and bbbbbb is the last 3 bytes of the remote station MAC address (see Network Status > Network Table on page 271). The SNMP Proxy Support must be enabled for this method of SNMP access to operate (see SNMP Proxy Support on page 187). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 196 | Managing the Radio Security > RADIUS This page displays the current settings for the Security RADIUS. RADIUS - Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS is a client / server system that secures the radio link against unauthorized access. It is based on open standard RFCs: RFC 2865/6, 5607, 5080 and 2869. It is used for remote user Authorization, Authentication and Accounting. When a user logs into a radio with RADIUS enabled, the users credentials are sent to the RADIUS server for authentication of the user. Transactions between the RADIUS client and RADIUS server are authenticated through the use of a shared secret, which is never sent over the network. For a RADIUS server to respond to the radio, it must configured with and respond to the following Management-Privilege-level attributes:

Admin Level = 4 Technician Level = 2 Viewer Level = 1 A RADIUS server can act as a proxy client to other RADIUS servers or other kinds of authentication servers. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 197 RADIUS AUTHENTICATION SETTINGS Authentication Mode This parameter sets the Authentication Mode. Option Function Local Authentication No radius Authentication allows any local user privilege Radius Authentication Only radius Authentication no local user privilege Radius Authentication and Local admin Radius Then Local Authentication Local Then Radius Authentication Uses radius Authentication if it is available. If radius Authentication is not available, uses local Admin login If the user is not authenticated in the radius server, it allows any local user privilege. If the user is not allowed in the local user privilege, radius authentication is used. Primary Server This parameter sets which radius server is used as the primary server for authentication. Select one of the possible authentication servers setup in Radius Server Settings. Secondary Server This parameter sets which radius server is used as the secondary server for authentication. Select one of the possible authentication servers setup in Radius Server Settings. RADIUS ACCOUNTING SETTINGS Primary Server This parameter sets which radius server is used as the primary server for accounting (log of user activity). Select one of the possible accounting servers setup in Radius Server Settings. Secondary Server This parameter sets which radius server is used as the secondary server for accounting. Select one of the possible accounting servers setup in Radius Server Settings. RADIUS ADVANCED SETTINGS Initial Transaction Timeouts (IRT) (seconds) This parameter sets the initial time to wait before the retry mechanism starts when the server is not responding. Default Transaction Timeouts (MRT) (seconds) This parameter sets the maximum time between retries. Maximum Retries (MRC) This parameter sets the maximum number of retry attempts when the server is not responding. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 198 | Managing the Radio Maximum Retries Duration (MRD) (seconds) This parameter sets the maximum duration it will attempt retries when the server is not responding. Unknown Transaction Attributes This parameter sets the radios response to unknown attributes received from the radius server. Option Function Ignore and Authenticate Ignore the unknown attributes and accept the authentication received from the radius server Reject and Deny Reject the authentication received from the radius server RADIUS SERVER SETTINGS Server Name You can enter up to four radius servers 1-4. IP Address The IP address of the Radius server. Port Number The Port Number of the Radius server. RADIUS uses UDP as the transport protocol. UDP port 1812 is used for authentication / authorization UDP port 1813 is used for accounting. Old RADIUS servers may use unofficial UDP ports 1645 and 1646. Encryption Key The password of the Radius server. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Security > Manager Managing the Radio | 199 CURRENT PAYLOAD SECURITY PROFILE Profile Name This parameter shows the predefined security profile active on the radio. Status This parameter displays the status of the predefined security profile on the radio (always active). PREVIOUS PAYLOAD SECURITY PROFILE Profile Name This parameter displays the security profile that was active on the radio prior to the current profile being activated. Status This parameter displays the status of the security profile that was active on the radio prior to the current profile being activated. Option Active Inactive Function The security profile is active on the radio. The security profile is not active on the radio but could be activated if required. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 200 | Managing the Radio Activate This parameter activates the previous security profile (restores to previous version). PREDEFINED PAYLOAD SECURITY PROFILE Profile Name This parameter displays the new security profile that could be activated on the radio or distributed to all remote radios with Security > Distribution. Status This parameter displays the status of the new security profile. Option Function Unavailable A predefined security profile is not available on this radio. To create a predefined security profile, go to Security > Setup on page 183. Available A predefined security profile is available on this radio for distribution and activation. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Security > Distribution Managing the Radio | 201 REMOTE PAYLOAD SECURITY PROFILE DISTRIBUTION Predefined Profile Name This parameter displays the predefined security profile available for distribution to remote stations. Status This parameter shows if a predefined security profile is available for distribution to remote stations. Option Unavailable Available Start Transfer Function A predefined payload security profile is not available on this radio. A predefined payload security profile is available on this radio for distribution and activation. This parameter when activated distributes (broadcasts) the new payload security profile to all remote stations in the network. Note: The distribution of the payload security profile to remote stations does not stop customer traffic from being transferred. Payload security profile distribution traffic is classified as management traffic but does not use the Ethernet management priority setting. Security profile distribution traffic priority has a fixed priority setting of very low. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 202 | Managing the Radio To distribute the payload security profile to remote stations:

This process assumes that a payload security profile has been setup (see Security > Setup on page 183). 1. Tick Start Transfer and click Apply. Note: This process could take up to 1 minute per radio depending on channel size, Ethernet Management Priority setting and the amount of customer traffic on the network. 2. When the distribution is completed, activate the software with the Remote Payload Security Profile Activation. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 203 REMOTE PAYLOAD SECURITY PROFILE ACTIVATION When the security profile has been distributed to all the remote stations, the security profile is then activated in all the remote stations with this command. The base station will always attempt to distribute the profile successfully. This broadcast distribution has its own retry mechanism. The user can find out if all the remote radios have the latest profile when the managed activation process is attempted. A pop up confirmation will be shown by SuperVisor with relevant information and the user can decide to proceed or not. The user can attempt to redistribute again if needed. If the decision is made to continue, on completion of the activation process, communication with the remote radios that did not have the new security profile will be lost. Predefined Profile Name This parameter displays the predefined security profile available for activation on all remote stations. To activate the security profile in remote stations:

This process assumes that a security profile has been setup into the base station (see Security > Setup on page 183) and distributed to all remote radios in the network. Note: Do not navigate SuperVisor away from this page during the activation process (SuperVisor can lose PC focus). 1. Click Start Activation The remote stations will be polled to determine which radios require activation:

Result Function (X of Y) Remote Radios Polled for New Profile X is the number of radios polled to determine if the radio contains the new security profile. Y is the number of remote radios registered with the base station. Remote Radios Activated X is the number of radios activated. Y is the number of radios with the new security profile requiring activation. Remote Radios On New Profile X is the number of radios activated and on the new security profile. Y is the number of radios with the new security profile that have been activated. When the activation is ready to start:

3. Click on OK to start the activation process or Cancel to quit. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 204 | Managing the Radio Maintenance Maintenance > Summary This page displays the current settings for the Maintenance parameters. DIAGNOSTICS Last RX Packet RSSI (dBm) This parameter displays the receiver RSSI reading taken from the last data packet received. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 205 GENERAL Local Status Polling Period (sec) This parameter displays the rate at which SuperVisor refreshes the Local Radio alarm LED states and RSSI value. Remote Status Polling Period (sec) This parameter displays the rate at which SuperVisor refreshes the Remote Radio alarm LED states and RSSI value. Network View Polling Period (sec) This parameter displays the rate at which SuperVisor polls all remote radios for status and alarm reporting. Inactivity Timeout (min) This parameter displays the period of user inactivity before SuperVisor automatically logs out of the radio. Frequency Tracking This parameter displays if Frequency Tracking is enabled or disabled. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 206 | Managing the Radio NETWORK Node Registration Retry (sec) This parameter displays the base station poll time at startup or the remote / repeater station time between retries until registered. Base Station Announcement Period (min) This parameter displays the period between base station polls post startup. The default setting is 1440 minutes (24 hours). Node Missed Poll Count This parameter displays the number of times the base station attempts to poll the network at startup or if a duplicate IP is detected when a remote / repeater station is replaced. UPGRADE USB Boot Cycle Upgrade This parameter shows the type of USB Boot Cycle upgrade defined in Software Setup > USB Boot Upgrade on page 237. TEST MODE Packet Response Timeout (ms) This parameter displays the time Test Mode waits for a response from the base station before it times out and retries. Transmit Period (sec) This parameter displays the time between Test Mode requests to the base station. Response Timeout (ms) This parameter sets the time Test Mode waits for a response from the base station before it times out and retries. The default setting is 3000 ms. RSSI Enter Button Timeout (sec) This parameter displays the Test Mode timeout period. The radio will automatically exit Test Mode after the Timeout period. Transmitter Timeout (sec) This parameter displays the transmitter Test Mode timeout period. The radio will automatically exit the transmitter Test Mode after the Timeout period. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 207 LICENCE Remote Management This parameter displays if Remote Management is enabled or disabled. The default setting is enabled. Ethernet OTA (over the air) This parameter displays if Ethernet traffic is enabled or disabled. The Ethernet OTA will be enabled if the Ethernet feature licence has been purchased (see Maintenance > Licence on page 216). SNMP Management This parameter displays if SNMP management is enabled or disabled. The default setting is enabled. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 208 | Managing the Radio Maintenance > General GENERAL Local Status Polling Period (sec) This parameter sets the rate at which SuperVisor refreshes the Local Radio alarm LED states and RSSI value. The default setting is 10 seconds. Network View Polling Period (sec) This parameter sets the rate at which SuperVisor polls all remote radios for status and alarm reporting. The default setting is 20 seconds. Remote Status Polling Period (sec) This parameter sets the rate at which SuperVisor refreshes the Remote Radio alarm LED states and RSSI value. To avoid problems when managing Aprisa SR+ Networks, ensure that the Remote Polling Period is set to be longer than the Inband Management Timeout (set on page 88). The default setting is 20 seconds. Inactivity Timeout (min) This parameter sets the period of user inactivity before SuperVisor automatically logs out of the radio. The default setting is 15 minutes. Delete Alarm History file This parameter when activated deletes the alarm history file stored in the radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO REBOOT To reboot the radio:

1. Select Maintenance > General. 2. Tick the Reboot checkbox. Managing the Radio | 209 3. Click Save to apply the changes or Cancel to restore the current value. 4. Click OK to reboot the radio or Cancel to abort. All the radio LEDs will flash repeatedly for 1 second. The radio will be operational again in about 10 seconds. The OK, MODE, and AUX LEDs will light green and the TX and RX LEDs will be green (steady or flashing) if the network is operating correctly. 5. Login to SuperVisor. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 210 | Managing the Radio Maintenance > Test Mode TRANSMITTER PRBS Test Enabled When active, the transmitter outputs a continuous PRBS signal. This can be used for evaluating the output spectrum of the transmitter and verifying adjacent channel power and spurious emission products. Deviation Test Enabled When active, the transmitter outputs a sideband tone at the deviation frequency used by the CPFSK modulator. This can be used to evaluate the local oscillator leakage and sideband rejection performance of the transmitter. CW Test Enabled When active, the transmitter outputs a continuous wave signal. This can be used to verify the frequency stability of the transmitter. Test Mode Timeout (s) This parameter sets the Transmitter Test Mode timeout period. The radio will automatically exit Transmitter Test Mode after the Timeout period. The default setting is 10 seconds. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 211 RSSI TEST BUTTON Response Timeout (ms) This parameter sets the time RSSI Test Mode waits for a response from the base station before it times out and retries. The default setting is 3000 ms. Transmit Period (sec) This parameter sets the time between RSSI Test Mode requests to the base station. The default setting is 5 seconds. Test Mode Timeout (s) This parameter sets the RSSI Test Mode timeout period. The radio will automatically exit RSSI Test Mode after the Timeout period. The default setting is 600 seconds. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 212 | Managing the Radio Maintenance > Modem Base Station FEC DISABLE FEC Disable This diagnostic function allows the user to temporarily disable forward error correction on the channel when diagnosing problems on the link. Therefore, enabling this diagnostic function would temporarily disable FEC on the channel and the associated maintenance mode alarm would activate. Note that the opposite is not true for this diagnostic function. In other words, this diagnostic function does not provide the user with the option to temporarily enable forward error correction on the channel. All diagnostic functions are not persistent and will be return to disabled states should the system restart. Option Enable Disable Timer Duration (s) Function Enables the FEC Disable diagnostic function Disables the FEC Disable diagnostic function Allows the FEC to be disabled but only for a predetermined period. This parameter defines the period required for disabling of the FEC. When this period elapses, the FEC is enabled. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Remote Station Managing the Radio | 213 ADAPTIVE CODING AND MODULATION ACM Lock This parameter sets whether adaptive modulation can be locked or not. Option Disable Enable Timer ACM Lock To Function Disables manual locking of the adaptive modulation i.e. allows for automatic adaptive modulation. Allows the adaptive modulation to be manually locked Allows the adaptive modulation to be manually locked but only for a predetermined period. This parameter manually locks the adaptive modulation. Option Default Current Duration (s) Function Manually locks the adaptive modulation to the default modulation defined in Default Modulation on page 113. Manually locks the adaptive modulation to the current modulation at that time. This parameter defines the period required for manually locking the adaptive modulation. When this period elapses, the adaptive modulation becomes automatic. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 214 | Managing the Radio FEC DISABLE FEC Disable This diagnostic function allows the user to temporarily disable forward error correction on the channel when diagnosing problems on the link. Therefore, enabling this diagnostic function would temporarily disable FEC on the channel and the associated maintenance mode alarm would activate. Note that the opposite is not true for this diagnostic function. In other words, this diagnostic function does not provide the user with the option to temporarily enable forward error correction on the channel. All diagnostic functions are not persistent and will be return to disabled states should the system restart. Option Enable Disable Timer Duration (s) Function Enables the FEC Disable diagnostic function Disables the FEC Disable diagnostic function Allows the FEC to be disabled but only for a predetermined period. This parameter defines the period required for disabling of the FEC. When this period elapses, the FEC is enabled. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Maintenance > Defaults Managing the Radio | 215 DEFAULTS The Maintenance Defaults page is only available for the local terminal. Restore Factory Defaults When activated, all radio parameters will be set to the factory default values. This includes resetting the radio IP address to the default of 169.254.50.10. Note: Take care using this command. Save User Defaults When activated, all current radio parameter settings will be saved to non-volatile memory within the radio. Restore User Defaults When activated, all radio parameters will be set to the settings previously saved using Save User Defaults. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 216 | Managing the Radio Maintenance > Licence LICENCE Fully Featured Radio When a fully featured Aprisa SR+ radio is purchased (indicated by the AA), it contains the licences which activate Remote Management, Ethernet Traffic, and SNMP Management e.g. Part Number Part Description APSQ-N400-SSC-HD-22-ENAA 4RF SR+, BR, 400-470 MHz, SSC, Half Duplex, 2E2S, EN, STD In this software version, Remote Management, Ethernet Traffic and SNMP management are enabled by default. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Maintenance > Advanced Managing the Radio | 217 NETWORK Node Registration Retry (sec) This parameter sets the base station poll time at startup or the remote / repeater station time between retries until registered. The default setting is 10 seconds. Base Station Announcement Period (min) This parameter sets the period between base station polls post startup. The default setting is 1440 minutes (24 hours). When a new base station powers on, it announces its presence and each remote that receives the announcement message will be advised that a new base station is present and that they should re-register. This allows the new base station to populate its Network Table, with knowledge of the nodes in the network. If, during this initial period, there is some temporary path disturbance to one or more remotes, they may miss the initial announcement messages and be left unaware of the base station change. For this reason, the base station must periodically send out announcement messages to pick up any stray nodes and the period of these messages is the base station Announcement Period. Setting this parameter to 0 will stop periodic announcement messages being transmitted. If a critical parameter is changed in the base station, such as IP address, then the change is distributed to the network using base station announcement message. Note that in this case, an announcement is sent immediately independent of the Announcement Period setting. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 218 | Managing the Radio Node Missed Poll Count This parameter sets the number of times the base station attempts to poll the network at startup or if a duplicate IP is detected when a remote / repeater station is replaced. The default setting is 3. Discover Nodes This parameter when activated triggers the base station to poll the network with Node Missed Poll Count and Node Registration Retry values. Decommission Node(s) This parameter when activated resets the network registrations to remove the entire network from service. Note: Take care using this option. Broadcast Time This parameter when activated sends the base station Date / Time setting to all the remote and repeater stations in the network and sets their Date / Time. This option applies to the base station only. Automatic Route Rediscovery This parameter enables the radio to transmit route discovery messages when packets are unacknowledged. When enabled, unacknowledged unicast packets are converted into uni-broadcast messages and sent through the network. All nodes see the message and populate their routing tables accordingly. When the destination node is reached, it sends a route response message via the shortest path. The intermediate nodes see this message and populate their routing tables in the reverse direction, thus re-

establishing the route. The default setting is disabled. GENERAL Frequency Tracking Frequency Tracking enables the receiver to track any frequency drift in the transmitter to maintain optimum SNR and radio link performance over the full temperature range. When enabled, remote stations adjust their receive frequency to the frequency of the incoming packet rate and the base station notifies remote stations if their transmit frequency requires adjustment. The default setting is Enabled. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 219 MAINTENANCE FILES There are three maintenance file types which can saved / restored to / from PC or USB flash drive:

Note: Some brands of USB flash drives may not work with 4RF radios. File - Configuration Settings Action Action Save to PC Option This saves the file with a filename of Config.4 to a binary encrypted file. This can then be saved from the Browser popup

(example is Windows Internet Explorer 11). The file should be renamed to be able to identify the radio it was saved from. Save to Radio USB Restore from PC This saves the file with a filename of asrcfg_1.6.0 to a binary encrypted file on the radio USB flash drive root directory. This restores all user configuration settings from a binary encrypted file on a PC directory to the radio. A reboot warning message will warn of a pending reboot after the PC file is selected. Clicking OK will open a browser file selection window to select the file. Note: If you are using Explorer, it must be IE10 or above for this feature to work correctly. Restore from Radio USB This restores all user configuration settings from a binary encrypted file on the USB root directory to the radio. Note: Payload Encryption Key and Key Encryption Key parameters (see Security > Setup) are not saved to the configuration file. When a Restore from PC or Restore from Radio USB is used, these parameters will retain their existing values so are not changed by the operation of restoring the configuration file. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 220 | Managing the Radio File - Event History Log Action Action Save to PC Option This saves the file with a filename of Info.tar.gz to a binary encrypted file. This can then be saved from the Browser popup

(example is Windows Internet Explorer 11). The file should be renamed to be able to identify the radio it was saved from. The gz file is normally for sending back to 4RF Limited for analysis but can be opened with WinRar. Save to Radio USB This saves the file with a filename of e.g. alarm_173.10.1.30_2014-11-10,15.54.14.txt to a text file on the radio USB flash drive root directory. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 221 File - Configuration Script Action Action Option Load and Execute This loads and executes configuration script files. There are sample configuration script files on the product CD in a directory called Master Configuration. The purpose of these files is to use as templates to create your own configuration scripts. Note: Be careful using this feature as incompatible configurations will change the radios settings and break radio connectivity. Note: Activating this function will over-write all existing configuration settings in the radio (except for the non-saved settings e.g. security passwords, licence keys etc) without any verification of the command setting in the radio. Precautions should be taken to prevent radio outages with incorrect radio configurations. The following process steps are recommended:

Save the current radio configuration to a PC or USB before uploading the new configuration script file Upload the new configuration script file to the radio If for some reason the radio doesnt work as expected, the saved configuration file can be uploaded to the radio (roll back to previous configuration). a. b. c. Retain IP Address This parameter when enabled ensures that the radio IP address is not changed when the radio configuration settings are restored from a configuration file with a different IP radio address. It prevents the radio losing connectivity when the configuration settings are restored from a configuration file. Revert Config if Connection Lost When the Maintenance Files feature is used on remote radios from the base station, this parameter allows the configurations to be restored to the previous configuration if the connection is lost. This must be set before executing the Configuration Settings / Configuration Script restore functions. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 222 | Managing the Radio Events The Events menu contains the setup and management of the alarms, alarm events and traps. Events > Alarm Summary There are two types of events that can be generated on the Aprisa SR+ radio. These are:

1. Alarm Events Alarm Events are generated to indicate a problem on the radio. 2. Informational Events Informational Events are generated to provide information on key activities that are occurring on the radio. These events do not indicate an alarm on the radio and are used to provide information only. See Alarm Types and Sources on page 368 for a complete list of events. ALARM SUMMARY The Alarm Summary is a display tree that displays the current states of all radio alarms. The alarm states refresh automatically every 12 seconds. LED Colour Green Orange Red Severity No alarm Warning alarm Critical, major or minor alarm Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Events > Event History Managing the Radio | 223 EVENT HISTORY The last 1500 events are stored in the radio. The complete event history list can be downloaded to a USB flash drive (see File - Event History Log on page 220). The Event History can display the last 50 events stored in the radio in blocks of 8 events. The Next button will display the next page of 8 events and the Prev button will display the previous page of 8 events. Using these buttons will disable Auto Refresh to prevent data refresh and page navigation contention. The last 50 events stored in the radio are also accessible via an SNMP command. Auto Refresh The Event History page selected will refresh automatically every 12 seconds if the Auto Refresh is ticked. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 224 | Managing the Radio Events > Events Setup EVENTS SETUP Alarm event parameters can be configured for all alarm events (see Alarm Events on page 369). All active alarms for configured alarm events will be displayed on the Monitoring pages (see Monitoring on page 253). This Switch and Block parameters are only visible / applicable when the radio is part of a Protected Station. Severity The Severity parameter sets the alarm severity. Severity Critical Major Minor Warning Function The Critical severity level indicates that a service affecting condition has occurred and an immediate corrective action is required. Such a severity can be reported, for example, when a managed object becomes totally out of service and its capability must be restored. The Major severity level indicates that a service affecting condition has developed and an urgent corrective action is required. Such a severity can be reported, for example, when there is a severe degradation in the capability of the managed object and its full capability must be restored. The Minor severity level indicates the existence of a non-service affecting fault condition and that corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more serious

(for example, service affecting) fault. Such a severity can be reported, for example, when the detected alarm condition is not currently degrading the capacity of the managed object. The Warning severity level indicates the detection of a potential or impending service affecting fault, before any significant effects have been felt. Action should be taken to further diagnose (if necessary) and correct the problem in order to prevent it from becoming a more serious service affecting fault. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Information No problem indicated purely information Managing the Radio | 225 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 226 | Managing the Radio Suppress This parameter determines if the action taken by an alarm. Option None Traps Function Alarm triggers an event trap and is logged in the radio Alarm is logged in the radio but does not trigger an event trap Traps and Log Alarm neither triggers an event trap nor is logged in the radio Lower Limit / Upper Limit Threshold alarm events have lower and upper limit settings. The alarm is activated if the current reading is outside the limits. Example: 9 RX CRC Errors The Upper Limit is set to 0.7 and the Duration is set to 5 seconds. If in any 5 second period, the total number of errored packets divided by the total number of received packets exceeds 0.7, the alarm will activate. Units (1) The Units parameter shows the unit for the Lower Limit and Upper Limit parameters. Duration This parameter determines the period to wait before an alarm is raised if no data is received. Units (2) This parameter shows the unit for the Duration parameters. Switch This parameter determines if the alarm when active causes a switch over of the Protection Switch. This parameter is only applicable when the radio is part of a Protected Station. Block This parameter determines if the alarm is prevented from causing a switch over of the Protection Switch. This parameter is only applicable when the radio is part of a Protected Station. The Next button will display the next page of 8 alarm events and the Prev button will display the previous page of 8 alarm events. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Events > Traps Setup Managing the Radio | 227 TRAPS SETUP All events can generate SNMP traps. The types of traps that are supported are defined in the Notification Mode. Destination Address This parameter sets the IP address of the server running the SNMP manager. Port This parameter sets the port number the server running the SNMP manager. Community String This parameter sets the community string which is sent with the IP address for security. The default community string is public. Notification Mode This parameter sets when an event related trap is sent:

Option None Function No event related traps are sent. Event Recorded When an event is recorded in the event history log, a trap is sent. Event Updated When an event is updated in the event history log, a trap is sent. All Events When an event is recorded or updated in the event history log, a trap is sent. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 228 | Managing the Radio Notification Type This parameter sets the type of event notification:

Option Function Standard Trap Provides a standard SNMP trap event Inform Request Provides a SNMP v2 Inform Request trap event including trap retry and acknowledgement Notification Type set to Inform Request:

Timeout (second) This parameter sets the time interval to wait for an acknowledgement before sending another retry. Maximum Retries This parameter sets the maximum number of retries to send the event without acknowledgement before it gives up. Enabled This parameter determines if the entry is used. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Events > Alarm I/O Setup Managing the Radio | 229 ALARM PORTS This page provides control of the two hardware alarm inputs and two hardware alarm outputs provided on the alarm connector. The alarm inputs are used to transport alarms to the other radios in the network. The alarm outputs are used to receive alarms from other radios in the network. These alarms are only available when the station is non protected. Name The alarm IO number. Type The Type shows if the alarm is an input or output. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 230 | Managing the Radio Active State The Active State parameter sets the alarm state when the alarm is active. Alarm Input Option Low High Alarm Output Option Low High Current State Function The alarm is active low i.e. a ground contact on the port will cause an active alarm state The alarm is active high i.e. an open contact on the port will cause an active alarm state Function The alarm is active low i.e. the active alarm state will generate a ground contact output The alarm is active high i.e. the active alarm state will generate a open contact output The Current State shows the current state of the alarm. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Events > Event Action Setup Managing the Radio | 231 EVENT ACTION SETUP This page provides control of the mapping of events to specific actions. Specific alarm events can setup to trigger outputs. Action Definition This parameter shows the number of the event action setup and the maximum number of setups stored. Action Destination IP Address This parameter sets the IP address of the radio that will output the action type. Action Type This parameter sets the action type that will be activated on the radio. Option None Function This action setup does not activate any alarm output Activate Alarm Output 1 This action setup activates alarm output 1 Activate Alarm Output 2 This action setup activates alarm output 2 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 232 | Managing the Radio Action Threshold Criteria This parameter sets the radio event that will trigger the action output. Option None Function No action output. Radio Severity Equal Critical Radio Severity Equal Major Activates the action output when a radio alarm is critical alarm Activates the action output when a radio alarm is a major alarm Radio Severity Equal Minor Activates the action output when a radio alarm is minor alarm Radio Severity Equal Warning Activates the action output when a radio alarm is a warning alarm Radio Severity Equal Cleared Activates the action output when a radio alarm is cleared Radio Severity Equal or Worse than Major Activates the action output when a radio alarm is a major alarm or a critical alarm Radio Severity Equal or Worse than Minor Activates the action output when a radio alarm is a minor alarm, a major alarm or a critical alarm Radio Severity Equal or Worse than Warning Activates the action output when a radio alarm is a warning, a major alarm, a minor alarm or a critical alarm Controls The Save button saves the current event action setup. The Cancel button cancels the new event action setup. The Add button adds a new event action setup. The Delete button deletes the current event action setup. The Clear Map button clears all alarm selections on the current setup. To add an event action setup:

1. Click on the Add button. 2. Enter the Action Destination IP Address. This is the IP address of the radio that will output the action type. 3. Select the Action Type from the list. 4. Select the Action Threshold Criteria from the list. 5. Tick the alarms required for the event action setup from the Action Alarm Map. You can clear all alarm selections with the Clear Map button. 6. Click on Save. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Events > Defaults Managing the Radio | 233 EVENT DEFAULTS Restore Defaults This parameter when activated restores all previously configured event parameters using Events > Events Setup to the factory default settings. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 234 | Managing the Radio Software The Software menu contains the setup and management of the system software including network software distribution and activation. The distribution of the system software to the remote radios is encrypted by the AES session key over-the-air. Single Radio Software Upgrade The radio software can be upgraded on a single Aprisa SR+ radio (see Single Radio Software Upgrade on page 362). This process would only be used if the radio was a replacement or a new station in an existing network. Network Software Upgrade The radio software can be upgraded on an entire Aprisa SR+ radio network remotely over the radio link

(see Network Software Upgrade on page 358). This process involves following steps:

1. Transfer the new software to base station with Software > File Transfer 2. Distribute the new software to all remote stations with Software > Remote Distribution 3. Activate of the new software on remote stations with Software > Remote Activation. 4. Finally, activate the new software on the base station radio with Software > Manager. Note:

activating the software will reboot the radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Software > Summary This page provides a summary of the software versions installed on the radio, the setup options and the status of the File Transfer. Managing the Radio | 235 SOFTWARE VERSIONS Current Version This parameter displays the software version running on the radio. Previous Version This parameter displays the software version that was running on the radio prior to the current software being activated. Software Pack Version On the base station, this parameter displays the software version available for distribution to all radios in the network. On the all stations, this parameter displays the software version ready for activation. USB AUTOMATIC UPGRADE USB Boot Upgrade This parameter shows the type of USB Boot upgrade defined in Software Setup > USB Boot Upgrade on page 237. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 236 | Managing the Radio FILE TRANSFER Transfer Activity This parameter shows the status of the transfer, Idle, In Progress or Completed. Method This parameter shows the file transfer method. When the software distribution is in progress, this parameter will change to Over the Air (from xx.xx.xx.xx) to show that the interface is busy and the transfer is in progress. File This parameter shows the software file source. Transfer Result This parameter shows the progress of the transfer. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Software > Setup This page provides the setup of the USB flash drive containing a Software Pack. Managing the Radio | 237 USB SETUP USB Boot Upgrade This parameter determines the action taken when the radio power cycles and finds a USB flash drive in the Host port. The default setting is Load and Activate. Option Function Load and Activate Load Only Disabled New software will be uploaded from a USB flash drive in to the Aprisa SR+ when the radio is power cycled and activated automatically. New software will be uploaded from a USB flash drive in to the Aprisa SR+ when the radio is power cycled. The software will need to be manually activated (see Software > Manager on page 242). Software will not be uploaded from a USB flash drive into the Aprisa SR+ when the radio is power cycled. Note: This parameter must be set to Disabled if the File Transfer and Activate method of upgrade is used. This Disabled setting prevents the radio from attempting another software upload when the radio boots (which it does automatically after activation). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 238 | Managing the Radio Software > File Transfer This page provides the mechanism to transfer new software from a file source into the radio. SETUP FILE TRANSFER Direction This parameter sets the direction of file transfer. In this software version, the only choice is To the Radio. Method This parameter sets the method of file transfer. Option Function USB Transfer Transfers the software from the USB flash drive to the radio. FTP Transfers the software from an FTP server to the radio. HTTP / HTTPS Transfers the software directly from a PC software pack file to the radio. File This parameter shows the software file source. FTP Username This parameter sets the Username to access the FTP server. FTP Password This parameter sets the Password to access the FTP server. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 239 FILE TRANSFER STATUS Transfer Activity This parameter shows the status of the transfer, Idle, In Progress or Completed. Direction This parameter shows the direction of file transfer. In this software version, the only choice is To The Radio. Method This parameter shows the file transfer method. File This parameter shows the software file source. Transfer Result This parameter shows the progress of the transfer:

Transfer Result Function Starting Transfer The transfer has started but no data has transferred. In Progress (x %) The transfer has started and has transferred x % of the data. Successful File Error The transfer has finished successfully. The transfer has failed. Possible causes of failure are:

Is the source file available e.g. USB flash drive plugged in Does the file source contain the Aprisa SR+ software release files;

Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 240 | Managing the Radio To transfer software into the Aprisa SR+ radio:

USB Transfer Method 1. Unzip the software release files in to the root directory of a USB flash drive. 2. Insert the USB flash drive into the host port

. 3. Click on Start Transfer. 4. When the transfer is completed, remove the USB flash drive from the host port. If the SuperVisor USB Boot Upgrade setting is set to Disabled (see USB Boot Upgrade on page 237), the USB flash drive doesnt need to be removed as the radio wont try to load from it. Go to Supervisor > Software > Manager and activate the Software Pack (see Software > Manager on page 242). The radio will reboot automatically. If the file transfer fails, check the Event History page (see Events > Event History on page 223) for more details of the transfer. Note: Some brands of USB flash drives may not work with 4RF radios. FTP Method 1. Unzip the software release files in to a temporary directory. 2. Open the FTP server and point it to the temporary directory. 3. Enter the FTP server IP address, Username and password into SuperVisor. 4. Click on Start Transfer. Go to Supervisor > Software > Manager and activate the Software Pack (see Software > Manager on page 242). The radio will reboot automatically. If the file transfer fails, check the Event History page (see Events > Event History on page 223) for more details of the transfer. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO HTTP / HTTPS Method 1. Unzip the software release files in to a temporary directory. 2. Click on Start Transfer. 3. Browse to the *.swpack file in the temporary directory and open the file. Managing the Radio | 241 Go to Supervisor > Software > Manager and activate the Software Pack (see Software > Manager on page 242). The radio will reboot automatically. If the file transfer fails, check the Event History page (see Events > Event History on page 223) for more details of the transfer. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 242 | Managing the Radio Software > Manager This page summarises and manages the software versions available in the radio. The manager is predominantly used to activate new software on single radios. Network activation is performed with Software > Remote Activation. Both the previous software (if available) and Software Pack versions can be activated on the radio from this page. CURRENT SOFTWARE Version This parameter displays the software version running on the radio. Status This parameter displays the status of the software version running on the radio (always active). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 243 PREVIOUS SOFTWARE Version This parameter displays the software version that was running on the radio prior to the current software being activated. Status This parameter displays the status of the software version that was running on the radio prior to the current software being activated. Option Active Inactive Activate Function The software is operating the radio. The software is not operating the radio but could be re-activated if required. This parameter activates the previous software version (restores to previous version). The Aprisa SR+ will automatically reboot after activation. SOFTWARE PACK Version This parameter displays the software pack version available for distribution on base station and activate on all stations. Status This parameter displays the status of the software pack version. Option Available Activating Unavailable Activate Function On the base station, the software pack is available for distribution. On all stations, the software pack is available for activation. The software pack is activating in the radio. There is no software pack loaded into the radio. This parameter activates the software pack. The Aprisa SR+ will automatically reboot after activation. Activation Type This parameter sets when the software pack activation will occur. Option Now Date & Time Function Activates the software pack now. Activates the software pack at the Date & Time set in the following parameter. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 244 | Managing the Radio Activation Date & Time This parameter sets the Date & Time when the software pack activation will occur. This setting can be any future date and 24 hour time. If the network base station radio date / time is not synchronized, you will get the following popup:

You can manually enter the base station radio date / time or use the Date And Time Synchronization from a SNTP server feature (see Terminal > Date / Time on page 92). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO To activate a software version:

1. Tick the software version required to be activated (previous software or software pack). Managing the Radio | 245 2. Click Apply. The page will display a Status of Activating. Once started, activation cannot be cancelled. When the activation is completed, the radio will reboot. This will cause the current SuperVisor session to expire. 3. Login to SuperVisor to check the result. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 246 | Managing the Radio Software > Remote Distribution This page provides the mechanism to distribute software to all remote stations into the Aprisa SR+

network (network) and then activate it. The Software Pack that was loaded into the base station with the file transfer process (see Software >

File Transfer on page 238) can be distributed via the radio link to all remote stations. This page is used to manage the distribution of that software pack to all remote radios on the network. This page is only available when the radio is configured as a Base Station. REMOTE SOFTWARE DISTRIBUTION Software Pack Version This parameter displays the software pack version available for distribution on base station and activate on all stations. Status This parameter displays the status of the software pack version. If a Software Pack is not available, the status will display Unavailable and the software distribution mechanism will not work. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 247 Start Transfer This parameter when activated distributes (broadcasts) the new Software Pack to all remote stations in the network. Note: The distribution of software to remote stations does not stop customer traffic from being transferred. However, due to the volume of traffic, the software distribution process may affect customer traffic. Software distribution traffic is classified as management traffic but does not use the Ethernet management priority setting. Software distribution traffic priority has a fixed priority setting of very low. To distribute software to remote stations:

This process assumes that a Software Pack has been loaded into the base station with the file transfer process (see Software > File Transfer on page 238). 1. To ensure that the Network Table is up to date, it is recommended running the node discover function

(see Discover Nodes on page 218). 2. Click on Start Transfer. Note: This process could take anywhere between 40 minutes and several hours depending on channel size, Ethernet Management Priority setting and the amount of customer traffic on the network. 3. When the distribution is completed, activate the software with the Remote Software Activation. Pause Transfer This parameter when activated, pauses the distribution process and shows the distribution status. The distribution process will continue from where it was paused with Resume Transfer. Cancel Transfer This parameter when activated, cancels the distribution process immediately. During the distribution process, it is possible to navigate away from this page and come back to it to check progress. The SuperVisor session will not timeout. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 248 | Managing the Radio Software > Remote Activation This page provides the mechanism to activate software on all remote stations. The Software Pack was loaded into the base station with the file transfer process (see Software > File Transfer on page 238) and was distributed via the radio link to all remote stations. This page is used to manage the activation of that software pack on all remote radios on the network. This page is only available when the radio is configured as a Base Station. REMOTE SOFTWARE ACTIVATION When the software pack version has been distributed to all the remote stations, the software is then activated in all the remote stations with this command. If successful, then activate the software pack in the base station to complete the network upgrade. Version This parameter displays the software version for activation. The default version is the software pack version but any valid software version can be entered in the format n.n.n. Activation Type This parameter sets when the software pack activation will occur. Option Now Date & Time Function Activates the software pack now. Activates the software pack at the Date & Time set in the following parameter. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 249 Activation Date & Time This parameter sets the Date & Time when the software pack activation will occur. This setting can be any future date and 24 hour time. Skip Confirmation Step This parameter when enabled skips the confirmation step during the activation process. Normally, the confirmation step will require use intervention to accept the confirmation which will halt the activation process. Skipping the confirmation will enable the activation process to continue without use intervention. To activate software in remote stations:

This process assumes that a Software Pack has been loaded into the base station with the file transfer process (see Software > File Transfer on page 238) and distributed to all remote radios in the network. Note: Do not navigate SuperVisor away from this page during the activation process (SuperVisor can lose PC focus). 1. Enter the Software Pack version (if different from displayed version). 2. Select the Activation type. 3. Click Apply. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 250 | Managing the Radio The remote stations will be polled to determine which radios require activation:

Result Function (X of Y) Remote Radios Polled for Partners X is the number of radios polled to determine the number of protected stations in the network. Y is the number of remote radios registered with the base station. Remote Radios Polled for New Version X is the number of radios polled to determine the number of radios that contain the new software version. Y is the number of remote radios registered with the base station. Remote Radios Activated X is the number of radios that contain the new software version and have been activated. Y is the number of radios that contain the new software version and can be activated. Remote Radios On New Version X is the number of radios that has been successfully activated and now running the new version of software. Y is the number of radios that the activation command was executed on. Note: When upgrading from software version 1.2.5 to 1.2.6 or later, communication to all remote radios will be lost due to a MAC protocol change. This will prevent this function from working correctly. In this case, activate the new software on the base station and run the Maintenance > Advanced Discover Nodes function on page 217. When the activation is ready to start:

4. Click on OK to start the activation process or Cancel to quit. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO The page will display the progress of the activation. Managing the Radio | 251 The example shows that during the activation process there were exceptions that may need to be investigated. When all the remote radios have been activated, the base station radio must now be activated with (see Software > Manager on page 242). 4. Click on OK to start the activation on the base station. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 252 | Managing the Radio Activation Type This parameter sets when the remote software activation will occur. Option Now Date & Time Skip Confirmation Step Function Activates the remote software now. Activates the remote software at the Date & Time set in the following parameter. This parameter when enabled skips the confirmation step during the activation process. Normally, the confirmation step will require use intervention to accept the confirmation which will halt the activation process. Skipping the confirmation will enable the activation process to continue without use intervention. Activation Date & Time This parameter sets the Date & Time when the remote software activation will occur. This setting can be any future date and 24 hour time. When the date and time is set, the remotes will be polled to setup the scheduled activation date and time. If the network base station radio date / time is not synchronized, you will get the following popup:

You can manually enter the base station radio date / time or use the Date And Time Synchronization from a SNTP server feature (see Terminal > Date / Time on page 92). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 253 Monitoring The Terminal, Serial, Ethernet, Radio and User Selected Monitored Parameter results have history log views for both Quarter Hourly and Daily. Monitored parameter data is accumulated into 2 sets:

15 minutes of data, for 96 readings for the last 24 hours 24 hours of data, for 31 readings for the last 31 days. Monitoring > Terminal This page displays the current radio internal and external input source radio power supply voltage diagnostic parameters. POWER SUPPLY PARAMETERS Monitored Parameter Function Normal Operating Limits Current VDC Power Supply Parameter to show the current power supply input voltage 10 to 30 VDC Current 3.3 Volts Power Supply Parameter to show the current 3.3 volt power rail voltage 3.1 to 3.5 VDC Current 5.0 Volts Power Supply Parameter to show the current that the current 5.0 volt power rail voltage 4.7 to 5.5 VDC Current 7.2 Volts Power Supply Parameter to show the current that the current 7.2 volt power rail voltage 6.9 to 7.5 VDC Current 15 Volts Power Supply Parameter to show the current that the current 15 volt power rail voltage. 320, 400 and 450 MHz 14.5 to 15.3 VDC The 15 volt power supply is used to power the transmitter driver and power amplifier. 135, 220, 896 and 928 MHz 12.7 to 13.5 VDC Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 254 | Managing the Radio Controls The History Quarter Hourly button presents a log of results every quarter of an hour. The History Daily button presents a log of results every day. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Monitoring > Serial This page displays the current radio performance monitoring parameters per serial port in packet and byte level granularity, for serial port high level statistics and troubleshooting. The results shown are since the page was opened and are updated automatically every 12 seconds. Managing the Radio | 255 SERIAL PORT PARAMETERS All Serial Ports Monitored Parameter Function Normal Operating Limits Maximum Capacity Parameter to show the maximum serial data rate of the serial port Equal to the serial port baud rate setting Packets Transmitted Packets Received Bytes Received Errored Bytes Received Dropped Bytes (Congestion) Parameter to show the number of packets transmitted to the customer from the serial port Parameter to show the number of packets received from the customer into the serial port Parameter to show the number of bytes received from the customer into the serial port Parameter to show the number of bytes received from the customer into the serial port that have errors Parameter to show the number of bytes received from the customer into the serial port that are dropped due to over the air congestion Controls The Reset button clears the current results. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 256 | Managing the Radio Monitoring > Ethernet This page displays the current radio performance monitoring parameters per Ethernet port transmission

(TX) out of the radio in packet and byte level granularity, for Ethernet port high level statistics and troubleshooting. The results shown are since the page was opened and are updated automatically every 12 seconds. ETHERNET PORT PARAMETERS All Ethernet Ports TX Monitored Parameter Function Normal Operating Limits Maximum Capacity Packets Bytes Packet Collisions VLAN Frames Parameter to show the maximum Ethernet data rate of the Ethernet port Parameter to show the number of packets transmitted to the customer from the Ethernet port Parameter to show the number of bytes transmitted to the customer from the Ethernet port Parameter to show the number of packet collisions on the data transmitted to the customer from the Ethernet port on a shared LAN Parameter to show the number of VLAN tagged frames transmitted to the customer from the Ethernet port Equal to the Ethernet port speed setting Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Controls The Reset button clears the current results. The History Quarter Hourly button presents a log of results every quarter of an hour. Managing the Radio | 257 The History Daily button presents a log of results every day. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 258 | Managing the Radio This page displays the current radio performance monitoring parameters per Ethernet port received (RX) data in packet and byte level granularity, for Ethernet port high level statistics and troubleshooting. The results shown are since the page was opened and are updated automatically every 12 seconds. ETHERNET PORT PARAMETERS All Ethernet Ports RX Monitored Parameter Function Packets Bytes Parameter to show the number of packets received by the customer from the Ethernet port (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) Parameter to show the number of bytes received (including those in bad packets) by the customer from the Ethernet port (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) Packets equal to 64 bytes Parameter to show the number of packets received (including bad packets) from the customer into the Ethernet port that are equal to 64 bytes (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) Packets 65 to 127 bytes Parameter to show the number of packets received (including bad packets) from the customer into the Ethernet port that are between 65 and 127 bytes (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) Packets 128 to 255 bytes Parameter to show the number of packets received (including bad packets) from the customer into the Ethernet port that are between 128 and 255 bytes (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) Packets 256 to 511 bytes Parameter to show the number of packets received (including bad packets) from the customer into the Ethernet port that are between 256 and 511 bytes(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) Packets 512 to 1023 bytes Parameter to show the number of packets received (including bad packets) from the customer into the Ethernet port that are between 512 and 1023 bytes(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) Packets 1024 to 1536 bytes Parameter to show the number of packets received (including bad packets) from the customer into the Ethernet port that are between 1024 and 1536 bytes(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) Broadcast Packets Parameter to show the number of broadcast packets received from the customer into the Ethernet port. Broadcast packets are good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 259 Monitored Parameter Function Multicast Packets Parameter to show the number of multicast packets received from the customer into the Ethernet port. Multicast packets are packets that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address. VLAN Frames Parameter to show the number of VLAN tagged frames received from the customer into the Ethernet port VLAN Frames Dropped Parameter to show the number of VLAN tagged frames received from the customer into the Ethernet port that were dropped due to CRC errored frames, filtered VLAN frames, undersized frames or oversized frames. Packet In Error Parameter to show the number of errored packets received from the customer into the Ethernet port caused by CRC errors, FCS Errors, alignment errors, oversized packets, undersized packets, fragmented packets and jabber packets Bytes In Error Parameter to show the number of errored bytes received from the customer into the Ethernet port CRC / Alignment Error Undersized Packets Oversized Packets Fragmented Packets Parameter to show the number of CRC / alignment errors received from the customer into the Ethernet port. CRC / alignment errors are defined as frames that had a length excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets. Parameter to show the number of undersized packets received from the customer into the Ethernet port. Undersized packets are less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets. Parameter to show the number of oversized packets received from the customer into the Ethernet port. Oversized packets are longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets. Parameter to show the number of fragmented packets received from the customer into the Ethernet port. Fragmented packets have either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS. Jabber Packets Parameter to show the number of jabber packets received from the customer into the Ethernet port Dropped Packets

(congestion) Parameter to show the number of dropped packets received from the customer into the Ethernet port caused by congestion Dropped Packets (filtering) Parameter to show the number of dropped packets received from the customer into the Ethernet port caused by packet L2 / L3 filtering Dropped Bytes (filtering) Parameter to show the number of dropped bytes received from the customer into the Ethernet port caused by packet L2 / L3 filtering Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 260 | Managing the Radio Controls The Reset button clears the current results. The History Quarter Hourly button presents a log of results every quarter of an hour. The History Daily button presents a log of results every day. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Monitoring > Radio This page displays the current radio diagnostic and performance monitoring parameters of the radio transmitter. The results shown are since the page was opened and are updated automatically every 12 seconds. Managing the Radio | 261 RADIO PARAMETERS Transmitter Monitored Parameter Function Normal Operating Limits Current Temperature Parameter to show the current temperature of the transmitter 0 to 70 C Packets Transmitted Parameter to show the number of packets transmitted over the air Bytes Transmitted Dropped Packets

(congestion) Dropped Bytes (congestion) Last TX Packet PA Current Last TX Packet Driver Current Parameter to show the number of bytes transmitted over the air Parameter to show the number of dropped packets transmitted over the air caused by congestion Parameter to show the number of dropped bytes transmitted over the air caused by congestion Parameter to show the current consumed by the transmitter power amplifier in mA. The value is stored from the last time the transmitter was active and transmitted a packet. Parameter to show the current consumed by the transmitter power amplifier driver in mA. The value is stored from the last time the transmitter was active and transmitted a packet. This value will change depending on the transmitter power setting, modulation, temperature and the VSWR of the antenna. The alarm limits for this are 50 mA to 2.5 A This value will change depending on the transmitter power setting, modulation and temperature. The alarm limits for the PA Driver Current are 10 mA to 500 mA. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 262 | Managing the Radio Monitored Parameter Function Normal Operating Limits Last TX Packet Forward Power Parameter to show the actual transmitter power in dBm. The value is stored from the last time the transmitter was active and transmitted a packet. This value will be dependent on the output power, the temperature and the VSWR of the antenna. The alarm limits for the Tx forward power are +/-4 dB. Controls The Reset button clears the current results. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO This page displays the current radio performance monitoring parameters of radio receiver. The results shown are since the page was opened and are updated automatically every 12 seconds. Managing the Radio | 263 RADIO PARAMETERS Receiver Monitored Parameter Function Packets Received Parameter to show the number of packets received over the air Bytes Received Parameter to show the number of bytes received over the air Packets Received In Error Parameter to show the number of packets received over the air Dropped Packets (filtering) Parameter to show the number of dropped packets received over the air caused by L2 / L3 filtering Dropped Bytes (filtering) Parameter to show the number of dropped bytes received over the air caused by L2 / L3 filtering Controls The Reset button clears the current results. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 264 | Managing the Radio This page displays the current radio RF transmit path modulation setting to single or multiple destination radios that the radio is transmitting to. The results shown are since the page was opened and are updated automatically every 12 seconds. RADIO PARAMETERS Result To Tx Mod Function The destination Node Address of the radio/s transmitting data to. The current radio transmitter modulation being used to communicate with the destination radio/s. Tx Timestamp The timestamp of the last transmitted packet to the destination radio/s. Controls The Next button will display the next page of 8 radios and the Prev button will display the previous page of 8 radios. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO This page displays the current radio RF receive path parameters from single or multiple source radios that the radio is receiving from. The results shown are since the page was opened and are updated automatically every 12 seconds. Managing the Radio | 265 RADIO PARAMETERS Receive Path Result From Rx RSSI Rx SNR Rx Freq Error Rx Mod Function The source Node Address of the radio receiving data from. The RSSI of the RF signal received from the source radio/s. This parameter displays the receiver RSSI reading taken from the last data packet received. The SNR of the RF signal received from the source radio/s. This parameter displays the receiver SNR reading taken from the last data packet received. The frequency difference between this radios receiver and the frequency of the incoming packet rate from the source radio/s. The current radio receive modulation being used to communicate with the source radio/s. Rx Timestamp The timestamp of the last received packet from the source radio/s. Controls The Next button will display the next page of 8 radios and the Prev button will display the previous page of 8 radios. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 266 | Managing the Radio Monitoring > User Selected This page displays the User parameters setup in all the other Monitoring screens e.g. in the Monitoring >

Radio > Transmitter, the User checkbox is ticked for the Dropped Packets (Congestion) and Dropped Bytes

(Congestion). The results shown are since the page was opened and are updated automatically every 12 seconds. Controls The Reset button clears the current results. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Monitoring > TCP Connections This page displays the list of active TCP connections on the radio. Managing the Radio | 267 TCP CONNECTIONS TABLE Result Function Local Address The local radio IP address Local Port The local radio TCP port number Remote Address Remote Port The remote host IP address (in most case a host PC connected to radio/network) The local radio TCP port number (in most case a host PC connected to radio / network) Controls The Next button will display the next page of 8 connections and the Prev button will display the previous page of 8 connections. If the Auto Refresh option is ticked, the TCP Connections table will refresh every 12 seconds. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 268 | Managing the Radio Monitoring > Routing Table This page displays the list of active routes on the radio. ROUTING TABLE Result Index Destination Mask Next Hop Interface Controls Function The routing table index The target destination IP address of the route The subnet mask of the destination IP address of the route The next hop IP address on the path to the destination IP address of the route The physical interface output on the path to the destination IP address of the route The Next button will display the next page of 8 routes and the Prev button will display the previous page of 8 routes. If the Auto Refresh option is ticked, the routing table will refresh every 12 seconds. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 269 Monitoring > Address Tables ARP Table This page displays the current Address Resolution Protocols (ARP) on the radio. The radio implemented ARP protocol is used for resolution of network layer addresses into link layer addresses. It is used to map a IPv4 address to an Ethernet MAC address. The ARP table shows the results of the ARP protocol linkage between IPv4 address and Ethernet MAC address of the devices attached to the radio. In a layer 2 bridge LAN, an upper layer protocol may include the IP address of the destination, but since it is an Ethernet LAN network, it also needs to know the destination MAC address. First, the radio uses a cached ARP table to look up the IPv4 destination address for the matching MAC address records. If the MAC address is found, it sends the IPv4 packet encapsulated in Ethernet frame with the found MAC address. If the ARP cache table did not produce a result for the destination IPv4 address, the radio sends a broadcast ARP message requesting an answer (of MAC address that matches) for IP address. The destination device responds with its MAC address (and IP). The response information is cached in radios ARP table and the message can now be sent with the appropriate destination MAC address. ADDRESS TABLES Title Function IP Address The IPv4 address of a neighboring device in the radio LAN network MAC Address The ARP result matching or mapping MAC address from the IPv4 address. Interface The Ethernet port interface the ARP results found the matching/mapping Type Dynamic indicates an ARP result and Static indicates a user static mapping. Controls The Next button will display the next page of 8 addresses and the Prev button will display the previous page of 8 addresses. If the Auto Refresh option is ticked, the ARP table will refresh every 12 seconds. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 270 | Managing the Radio Ethernet MAC Learning Table This page displays the current Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC) Address table on the radio LAN network. In order for the radio to switch frames between Ethernet LAN ports efficiently, the radio layer 2 bridge maintains a MAC address table. When the radio bridge receives a frame, it associates the MAC address of the sending network device with the LAN port on which it was received. The bridge dynamically learns and builds the MAC address table by using the MAC source address of the frames received. When the radio bridge receives a frame for a MAC destination address not listed in its address table, it floods the frame to all LAN ports of the same LAN (or in case of VLAN, to the specific VLAN) except the port that received the frame. When the destination bridge device replies, the radio bridge adds its relevant MAC source address and interface port number to the MAC address table. The switch then forwards subsequent frames to a single LAN port without flooding all LAN ports. ADDRESS TABLES Title Function MAC Address The learned MAC address of a neighboring bridge device in the LAN network. Interface The Ethernet port interface the MAC address has learned Age left The aging time of this MAC entry will stay in the table, even if this MAC address is not used. Every time this MAC address is used, the aging time restarts from its maximum. Default is 300 sec. Controls The Next button will display the next page of 8 addresses and the Prev button will display the previous page of 8 addresses. If the Auto Refresh option is ticked, the routing table will refresh every 12 seconds. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Network Status Network Status > Network Table This page displays a list of all the registered remote stations for the base station and provides management access to each of the remote stations. Managing the Radio | 271 NETWORK TABLE This Network Table is only available when the local radio is the base station i.e. SuperVisor is logged into the base station. To manage a remote / repeater station with SuperVisor:

Click on the radio button of the required station. The remaining menu items then apply to the selected remote station. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 272 | Managing the Radio Network Status > Summary Network View is an overview of the health of the network providing the ability to investigate issues directly within SuperVisor. This page provides an overall summary view of the alarm status of all registered remote stations for the base station. When open, it provides a continuous monitor of the network. Depending on the poll period set (20 seconds minimum) and the number of remotes in the network, it will take at least three poll cycles to indicate a failure in the network. Initial results may indicate All ok until at least three poll cycles completed. This could take Number Of Remotes * Poll Period * 3 seconds to complete. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 273 NETWORK SUMMARY A network poll will start when any of the Network Status pages are opened (Summary, Exceptions or View). The network poll will only continue to poll the remote stations if one of the Network Status pages is open (SuperVisor can lose PC focus). The network poll continues from where it was stopped last time it was polling. The initial result assumes that all remote stations are operating correctly. Network Summary Example:

Result Function Network Polling Cycle The number of poll cycles since first opening a Network Status >

Summary, Exceptions or View page. Remote Radios Polled Polling Interval The page example shows 6 polling cycles. This shows the number of radios polled for the current polling cycle out of the number remote radios registered with the base station. The page example shows 1 radio polled for the current polling cycle out of 3 remote radios registered. The time interval between the completion of one radio poll and the start of the next radio poll. To set the polling interval, see Maintenance > General on page 208. If a remote radio does not respond to a poll request within 10 seconds, the previous readings from that radio will be presented. Connectivity to a remote radio will be show as lost if the remote radio has not responded to 3 consecutive poll requests. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 274 | Managing the Radio Network Status > Exceptions This page provides a list of all registered remote radios that are in an alarmed state or have stopped responding to the SuperVisor polling. When open, it provides a continuous monitor of the network. NETWORK EXCEPTIONS A network poll will start when any of the Network Status pages are opened (Summary, Exceptions or View). The network poll will only continue to poll the remote stations if one of the Network Status pages is open (SuperVisor can lose PC focus). The network poll continues from where it was stopped last time it was polling. Network Exceptions Example:

Result Function Network Polling Cycle The number of poll cycles since first opening a Network Status >

Summary, Exceptions or View page. Remote Radios Polled Polling Interval The page example shows 4 polling cycles. This shows the number of radios polled for the current polling cycle out of the number remote radios registered with the base station. The page example shows 3 radios polled for the current polling cycle out of 4 remote radios registered. The time interval between the completion of one radio poll and the start of the next radio poll. To set the polling interval, see Maintenance > General on page 208. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO If a remote radio does not respond to a poll request within 10 seconds, the previous readings from that radio will be presented. Connectivity to a remote radio will be show as lost if the remote radio has not responded to 3 consecutive poll requests. If a remote radio on the list is detected to be responding to a poll request and no longer be in an alarmed state, the entry for this remote radio will be removed from the list. Managing the Radio | 275 View Events Clicking on View Events navigates to the Events page (see Events on page 222) for the specific remote radio where the radio events will be displayed. View Parameters Clicking on View Parameters navigates to the Monitoring page (see Monitoring on page 253) for the specific remote radio where the radio parameters will be displayed. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 276 | Managing the Radio Network Status > View This page provides a complete list of all registered remote radios. It is similar to the Exceptions page but it shows all radios, not limited to the radios with alarms. When open, it provides a continuous monitor of the network. NETWORK VIEW A network poll will start when any of the Network Status pages are opened (Summary, Exceptions or View). The network poll will only continue to poll the remote stations if one of the Network Status pages is open (SuperVisor can lose PC focus). The network poll continues from where it was stopped last time it was polling. Network View Example:

Result Function Network Polling Cycle The number of poll cycles since first opening a Network Status >

Summary, Exceptions or View page. Remote Radios Polled Polling Interval The page example shows 2 polling cycles. This shows the number of radios polled for the current polling cycle out of the number remote radios registered with the base station. The page example shows 1 radio polled for the current polling cycle out of 3 remote radios registered. The time interval between the completion of one radio poll and the start of the next radio poll. To set the polling interval, see Maintenance > General on page 208. Note: as this polling feature utilizes air time, the polling interval should be selected to suit the network traffic. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO If a remote radio does not respond to a poll request within 10 seconds, the previous readings from that radio will be presented. Connectivity to a remote radio will be show as lost if the remote radio has not responded to 3 consecutive poll requests. Managing the Radio | 277 View Events Clicking on View Events navigates to the Events page (see Events on page 222) for the specific remote radio where the radio events will be displayed. View Parameters Clicking on View Parameters navigates to the Monitoring page (see Monitoring on page 253) for the specific remote radio where the radio parameters will be displayed. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 278 | Managing the Radio Protected Station The majority of SuperVisor screens are the same for the standard radio and the protected station. The following screens are specific to the protected station. Logging into a Protected Station When SuperVisor detects a protected station, it operates in Single Session Management operation mode. When in Single Session Management mode, SuperVisor will automatically detect the two individual Aprisa SR+ radios configured to pair together for protection, and manage the two units in a single browser session. To the user, it will appear as managing a single unit, but SuperVisor will interact with the two individual units at a lower level. The user can login with the IP address of either the Primary or Secondary radio to manage the protected station (dont use the PVIP address as it is not a management IP address). SuperVisor will present all information appropriately where Common Parameters will be presented to the user as a single parameter e.g. TX and RX Frequencies and Unit Specific Parameters will be presented to the user as Primary or Secondary parameters e.g. Events and Alarms. When saving data, SuperVisor will also validate and ensure that the correct settings are written to both units. The SuperVisor Single Session Management ensures that both units of the protected station are always configured correctly to complement each other as protected partners. The user can still login with two different sessions to the active and standby radios. If the user opens two session management, one session logged into the active radio and a second session logged into the standby radio, the Multiple Management Sessions pop-up message will show the user names and IP addresses of the active and standby radio. Parameter Errors On protected station screens, parameter values displayed in red indicate discrepancies in common parameter values between the primary and secondary radios (see Protected Station: Terminal >

Summary on page 279 for an example of the red display). The value displayed is from the addressed radio. These value discrepancies can occur if the two protected station radios have been separately configured. The discrepancies can be corrected by re-entering the values in one of the radios. The value will be copied to the partner radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Terminal Protected Station: Terminal > Summary Managing the Radio | 279 TERMINAL SUMMARY This page displays the current settings for the Terminal parameters. PROTECTION INFORMATION Protection Type This parameter shows the type of protection:

Option Function Serial Data Driven Switching Provides radio and RS-232 serial port user interface protection for Aprisa SR+ radios. Monitored Hot Standby

(Protected Station) The RF ports and interface ports from two standard Aprisa SR+

radios are switched to the standby radio if there is a failure in the active radio. The standby radio is monitored to ensure its correct operation should a switch-over be required. See Monitored Alarms on page 333 for the list of monitored alarms. Redundant

(Protected Station) The RF ports and interface ports from two standard Aprisa SR+

radios are switched to the standby radio if there is a failure in the active radio Active Unit This parameter shows the radio which is currently active (Primary or Secondary). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 280 | Managing the Radio Switch Count This parameter shows the number of protection switch-overs since the last radio reboot (volatile). Primary Address This parameter shows the IP address of the primary radio (usually the left side radio A). Secondary Address This parameter shows the IP address of the secondary radio (usually the right side radio B). OPERATING SUMMARY See Terminal > Summary on page 83 for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Protected Station: Terminal > Details Managing the Radio | 281 PRIMARY UNIT / SECONDARY UNIT MANUFACTURING DETAILS See Terminal > Details on page 86 for parameter settings. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 282 | Managing the Radio Protected Station: Terminal > Operating Mode OPERATING MODES Terminal Operating Mode The Terminal Operating Mode can be set to Base, Base Repeater, Repeater, Remote or Point-To-Point station. The default setting is Remote. Option Base Base Repeater Base MMS Repeater Remote Point To Point Function The base station manages all traffic activity between itself, repeaters and remotes. It is the center-point of network where in most cases will be connected to a SCADA master. The Base-Repeater has the same function as the base station (and repeater station), but used when peer to peer connections between remotes is required via the base station. The Base-MMS has the same function as the base station, but used when Migration Master Station operation is required (see Aprisa SR+

MMS User Manual). The repeater forwards packets coming from base station and other repeaters e.g. in daisy chain LBS mode and /or remote stations. The remote in most cases is used as the end-point of the SCADA network connected to an RTU or PLC device for SCADA network control and monitoring. Configures a full duplex radio for Point-To-Point (PTP) operation. Changing from PMP or PTP or vice versa requires the radio to be restored to factory default settings which will clear all previous radio setup and configuration. See Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PTP for all Point-To-Point setup and configuration. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Ethernet Operating Mode The Ethernet Operating Mode defines how Ethernet / IP traffic is processed in the radio. The default setting is Bridge. Managing the Radio | 283 Option Bridge Gateway Router Router SR Compatible Function Bridge mode inspects each incoming Ethernet frame source and destination MAC addresses to determine if the frame is forwarded over the radio link or discarded. Gateway Router mode inspects each incoming IP source and destination IP addresses to determine if the packet is forwarded over the radio link or discarded. In this mode, all Ethernet interfaces have the same IP address and subnet. Router mode inspects each incoming IP source and destination IP addresses to determine if the packet is forwarded over the radio link or discarded. In this mode, each Ethernet interface has a different IP address and subnet. The SR Compatible option enables over-theair point-to-multipoint interoperation between an Aprisa SR+

network and New Aprisa SR radios. The default setting is unticked. When the Aprisa SR+ SR Compatible option is activated, the Aprisa SR+ locks its modulation to QPSK (as per the New Aprisa SR modulation) and disables functionality which is not available in the New Aprisa SR for full compatibility / interoperability operation. This compatibility option allows the user a smooth migration to Aprisa SR+ when higher speeds of 120, 60 kbit/s (at 25, 12.5 kHz channel sizes), Adaptive Coding and Modulation, full duplex and more features are required. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 284 | Managing the Radio TERMINAL PROTECTION Protection Type The Protection Type defines if a radio is a stand-alone radio or part of an Aprisa SR+ Protected Station. The default setting is None. Option None Redundant

(Protected Station) Monitored Hot Standby

(Protected Station) Function The SR+ radio is a stand-alone radio (not part of an Aprisa SR+

Protected Station). The SR+ radio is part of an Aprisa SR+ Protected Station. The RF ports and interface ports from two standard Aprisa SR+

radios are switched to the standby radio if there is a failure in the active radio Set to make this SR+ radio part of an Aprisa SR+ Protected Station. The RF ports and interface ports from two standard Aprisa SR+

radios are switched to the standby radio if there is a failure in the active radio. The standby radio is monitored to ensure its correct operation should a switch-over be required. See Monitored Alarms on page 333 for the list of monitored alarms. Serial Data Driven Switching The SR+ radio is part of an Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station. Provides radio and RS-232 serial port user interface protection for Aprisa SR+ radios. Automatic Periodic Switch Duration The Automatic Periodic Switch Duration sets the time interval for automatic switch-over from the active radio to the standby radio. This feature will automatically switch-over from the active radio to the standby radio if there are no alarms preventing the switch-over to the standby radio. It can be used to provide confidence that the standby radio is still operational maybe after many days of standby operation. The maximum number of days that can be set is 49 days. The default setting is 0 which disables the automatic switch-over feature. PROTECTION MANAGEMENT IP ADDRESS Primary Address This parameter shows the IP address of the primary radio (usually the left side radio A). Secondary Address This parameter shows the IP address of the secondary radio (usually the right side radio B). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Radio Protected Station: Radio > Radio Setup Transmit frequency, transmit power and channel size would normally be defined by a local regulatory body and licensed to a particular user. Refer to your site license details when setting these fields. Managing the Radio | 285 Antenna Port Configuration This parameter sets the Antenna Port Configuration for the radio. For more information on single and dual antenna port part numbers and cabling options, see Cabling on page 340. Option Function Single Antenna Single Port Select Single Antenna Single Port for a single antenna protected station using one or two frequency half duplex transmission. The antenna is connected to the ANT port. Single Antenna Dual Port (duplexer) Select Single Antenna Dual Port for a single antenna protected station using:

(1) One or two frequency in half duplex transmission with an external duplexer (for filtering) connected to the ANT/TX and RX antenna ports and single antenna connected to the duplexer.

(2) Two frequency in full duplex transmission with an external duplexer (for full duplex operation) connected to the ANT/TX and RX antenna ports and single antenna connected to the duplexer.

(3) Single frequency in half duplex transmission with external dual antennas, connected to the ANT/TX and RX antenna ports.

(4) Two frequency in half or full duplex transmission with external dual antennas, connected to the ANT/TX and RX antenna ports. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 286 | Managing the Radio Dual Antenna Single Port Select Dual Antenna Single Port for a dual antenna protected station using one or two frequency half duplex transmission. The antenna is connected to the A and B TX/ANT ports. Dual Antenna Dual Port (duplexer) Select Dual Antenna Dual Port for a dual antenna protected station using:

(1) One or two frequency in half duplex transmission with two external duplexer (for filtering) connected to the A and B ANT/TX and RX antenna ports and single antenna connected to the duplexer.

(2) Two frequency in full duplex transmission with an external duplexer (for full duplex operation) connected to the A and B ANT/TX and RX antenna ports and single antenna connected to the duplexer.

(3) Single frequency in half duplex transmission with an external dual antennas, connected to the A and B ANT/TX and RX antenna ports.

(4) Two frequency in half or full duplex transmission with external dual antennas, connected to the A and B ANT/TX and RX antenna ports. The default setting is Single Antenna Single Port. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Ethernet Protected Station: Ethernet > Summary This page displays the current settings for the Protected Station Ethernet port parameters. Managing the Radio | 287 See Ethernet > Port Setup for configuration options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 288 | Managing the Radio IP Protected Station: IP > IP Summary This page displays the current settings for the Protected Station Networking IP settings. See IP > IP Summary > Bridge / Gateway Router Modes on page 147 for configuration options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Protected Station: IP > IP Setup This page provides the setup for the Protected Station Networking IP setup. Managing the Radio | 289 NETWORKING IP SETTINGS Changes in these parameters are automatically changed in the partner radio. Primary IP Address Set the static IP Address of the primary radio assigned by your site network administrator using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default IP address is in the range 169.254.50.10. Secondary IP Address Set the static IP Address of the secondary radio assigned by your site network administrator using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default IP address is in the range 169.254.50.10. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 290 | Managing the Radio Protected Station Virtual IP Address (PVIP) The Protected Station Virtual IP Address (PVIP) is the IP Address of the active radio whether it is the primary radio or the secondary radio. The PVIP is available in both bridge and router modes. In router mode, the PVIP can be used as next hop IP address by external routers to reach the protected station so the protection station switch will always be transparent to the external devices and routers. In both bridge and router modes, the PVIP is used in terminal server mode in remote protected stations. The PVIP is used to reach the protected remote station from the SCADA master connected to base station in terminal server mode. Note: The radio IP address should be used for SNMP management as using the PVIP for SNMP management will result in undefined behaviour if a switch-over occurs during an SNMP transaction. Thus, using PVIP for SNMP network management is not recommended. After a switch-over, new active radio owns the PVIP and will send out a gratuitous ARP to clear the MAC learning tables of upstream switches/routers. Set the static IP Address of the PVIP using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default IP address is 0.0.0.0. Subnet Mask Set the Subnet Mask of the radio using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0. Gateway Set the Gateway address of the radio, if required, using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx. The default Gateway is 0.0.0.0. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 291 RADIO INTERFACE IP SETTINGS The RF interface IP address is the address that traffic is routed to for transport over the radio link. This IP address is only used when Router Mode is selected i.e. not used in Bridge Mode. Radio Interface IP Address Set the IP Address of the RF interface using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default IP address is in the range 10.0.0.0. Radio Interface Subnet Mask Set the Subnet Mask of the RF interface using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0 (/16). Note 1: If the base station RF interface IP address is a network IP address, and if the remote radio is also using a network IP address within the same subnet or different subnet, then the base radio will assign an automatic RF interface IP address from its own subnet. When the base radio has a host specific RF interface IP address, then all the remotes must have a host specific RF interface IP address from the same subnet. Note 2: When a remote radio is configured for Router Mode and the base radio is changed from Bridge Mode to Router Mode and the RF interface IP address is set to AUTO IP configuration (at least the last octet of the RF interface IP address is zero), it is mandatory to configure the network topology by using the Decommission Node and Discover Nodes (see Maintenance > Advanced on page 217). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 292 | Managing the Radio Security Protected Station: Security > Setup This page displays the current settings for the Security parameters. KEY ENCRYPTION KEY SETTINGS USB Transaction Status This parameter shows if a USB flash drive is plugged into the radio host port

. Option Function USB Storage Disconnected A USB flash drive is not plugged into the radio host port. USB Storage Connected A USB flash drive is plugged into the radio host port. Controls These buttons are grayed out if a USB flash drive is not plugged into the radio host port. The Load Primary From USB button loads the Key Encryption Key settings from the primary radio USB flash drive into the primary radio. The Copy To Primary USB button copies the Key Encryption Key settings from the primary radio to the primary radio USB flash drive. The Load Secondary From USB button loads the Key Encryption Key settings from the secondary radio USB flash drive into the secondary radio. The Copy To Secondary USB button copies the Key Encryption Key settings from the secondary radio to the secondary radio USB flash drive. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Protected Station: Security > Manager This page provides the management and control of the Protected Station Networking Security settings. Managing the Radio | 293 PRIMARY / SECONDARY SECURITY PROFILE See Security > Manager on page 199 for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 294 | Managing the Radio Maintenance Protected Station: Maintenance > General This page provides the management and control of the Protected Station Maintenance General settings. See Maintenance > General on page 208 for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Protected Station: Maintenance > Protection This page provides the management and control of the Protected Station Maintenance Protection settings. Managing the Radio | 295 SOFTWARE MANUAL LOCK The software Manual Lock is a software implementation of the Hardware Manual Lock switch on the Protection Switch. Lock Active To This parameter sets the Protection Switch Software Manual Lock. The Software Manual Lock only operates if the Hardware Manual Lock is deactivated (set to the Auto position). Option Automatic Primary Secondary Duration (s) Function The protection is automatic and switching will be governed by normal switching and blocking criteria. The primary radio will become active i.e. traffic will be switched to the primary radio. The secondary radio will become active i.e. traffic will be switched to the secondary radio. This parameter defines the period required for manually locking to the primary or secondary radios. When this period elapses, the Lock To becomes automatic. Switch Now Button This button forces a switch-over independent of the state of Lock Type. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 296 | Managing the Radio CURRENT PROTECTION INFORMATION Switch Control This parameter shows the status of the switch control i.e. which mechanism is in control of the protection switch. Option Automatic Function The protection is automatic and switching will be governed by normal switching and blocking criteria. Software Manual Lock The Software Manual Lock has control of the protection switch. Hardware Manual Lock The Hardware Manual Lock has control of the protection switch. Active Unit This parameter shows the radio which is currently active (Primary or Secondary). Switch Count This parameter shows the number of protection switch-overs since the last radio reboot (volatile). Automatic Periodic Switch will occur in If this parameter is visible, the Automatic Periodic Switch feature has been enabled and will show the period before the next automatic switch-over. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Protected Station: Maintenance > Protection Copy This page provides the management and control of the Protected Station Maintenance Protection Copy. Managing the Radio | 297 COPY CONFIGURATION When common parameters are changed in one radio, they are automatically changed in the partner radio but if one radio has been replaced in the protected station, common parameters will need to be updated in the new radio. Note: This function does not copy user IDs, passwords, encryption keys or licenses. These must be entered manually. Copy from Primary to Secondary This parameter copies all common parameters from the primary to the secondary radio. To activate copy configuration:

1. Tick the Copy from Primary to Secondary and click Save. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 298 | Managing the Radio 2. To continue, click OK. Copy from Secondary to Primary This parameter copies all common parameters from the secondary to the primary radio. Copy Status This parameter displays the status of the Copy Configuration. Option Available Function The Copy Configuration feature can be used (but not necessarily required). Processing The Copy Configuration feature is running and the % completed. CURRENT PROTECTION INFORMATION Switch Control This parameter shows the status of the switch control i.e. which mechanism is in control of the protection switch. Option Automatic Function The protection is automatic and switching will be governed by normal switching and blocking criteria. Software Manual Lock The Software Manual Lock has control of the protection switch. Hardware Manual Lock The Hardware Manual Lock has control of the protection switch. Active Unit This parameter shows the radio which is currently active (Primary or Secondary). Switch Count This parameter shows the number of protection switch-overs since the last radio reboot (volatile). Automatic Periodic Switch will occur in If this parameter is visible, the Automatic Periodic Switch feature has been enabled and will show the period before the next automatic switch-over. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO

July 2016 Version 1.6.0

| 1 Copyright Copyright 2016 4RF Limited. All rights reserved. This document is protected by copyright belonging to 4RF Limited and may not be reproduced or republished in whole or part in any form without the prior written permission of 4RF Limited. Trademarks Aprisa and the 4RF logo are trademarks of 4RF Limited. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Java and all Java-related trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. All other marks are the property of their respective owners. Disclaimer Although every precaution has been taken preparing this information, 4RF Limited assumes no liability for errors and omissions, or any damages resulting from use of this information. This document or the equipment may change, without notice, in the interests of improving the product. RoHS and WEEE Compliance The Aprisa SR+ is fully compliant with the European Commissions RoHS (Restriction of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment) and WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) environmental directives. Restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The RoHS Directive prohibits the sale in the European Union of electronic equipment containing these hazardous substances: lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs), and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs). 4RF has worked with its component suppliers to ensure compliance with the RoHS Directive which came into effect on the 1st July 2006. End-of-life recycling programme (WEEE) The WEEE Directive concerns the recovery, reuse, and recycling of electronic and electrical equipment. Under the Directive, used equipment must be marked, collected separately, and disposed of properly. 4RF has instigated a programme to manage the reuse, recycling, and recovery of waste in an environmentally safe manner using processes that comply with the WEEE Directive (EU Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment 2002/96/EC). 4RF invites questions from customers and partners on its environmental programmes and compliance with the European Commissions Directives (sales@4RF.com). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 2 |

Compliance General The Aprisa SR+ radio predominantly operates within frequency bands that require a site license be issued by the radio regulatory authority with jurisdiction over the territory in which the equipment is being operated. It is the responsibility of the user, before operating the equipment, to ensure that where required the appropriate license has been granted and all conditions attendant to that license have been met. Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Equipment authorizations sought by 4RF are based on the Aprisa SR+ radio equipment being installed at a fixed restricted access location and operated in point-to-multipoint or point-to-point mode within the environmental profile defined by EN 300 019, Class 3.4. Operation outside these criteria may invalidate the authorizations and / or license conditions. The term Radio with reference to the Aprisa SR+ User Manual, is a generic term for one end station of a point-to-multipoint Aprisa SR+ network and does not confer any rights to connect to any public network or to operate the equipment within any territory. Compliance European Telecommunications Standards Institute The Aprisa SR+ radio is designed to comply with the European Telecommunications Standards Institute

(ETSI) specifications as follows:

12.5 kHz and 25 kHz Channel 50 kHz Channel Radio performance EN 300 113-2 EN 302 561 (pending) EMC Environmental Safety EN 301 489-1 and 5 EN 300 019, Class 3.4 Ingress Protection IP51 EN 60950-1:2006 Class 1 division 2 for hazardous locations Frequency band Channel size Power input 135-175 MHz 215-240 MHz 320-400 MHz 400-470 MHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz 12.5 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 12.5 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 12.5 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 13.8 VDC 13.8 VDC 13.8 VDC 13.8 VDC 450-520 MHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 13.8 VDC Notified body Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO

| 3 Compliance Federal Communications Commission The Aprisa SR+ radio is designed to comply with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) specifications as follows:

Radio EMC Environmental Safety 47CFR part 24, part 27, part 90 and part 101 Private Land Mobile Radio Services 47CFR part 15 Radio Frequency Devices, EN 301 489-1 and 5 EN 300 019, Class 3.4 Ingress Protection IP51 EN 60950-1:2006 Class 1 division 2 for hazardous locations Frequency Band *

Channel size Power input Authorization FCC ID 135-175 MHz 15 kHz, 30 kHz 13.8 VDC Part 90 UIPSQ135M150 215-240 MHz 400-470 MHz 450-520 MHz 757-758 MHz and 787-788 MHz 896-902 MHz 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 928-960 MHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 13.8 VDC 13.8 VDC Part 90 UIPSQ215M141 13.8 VDC Part 90 UIPSQ400M1311 13.8 VDC Part 90 Pending 13.8 VDC Part 27 Pending 13.8 VDC Part 24 /

Part 90 /

Part 101 Part 24 /

Part 90 /

Part 101 UIPSQ896M141 UIPSQ928M141 NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

* The Frequency Band is not an indication of the exact frequencies approved by FCC. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 4 |

Compliance Industry Canada The Aprisa SR+ radio is designed to comply with Industry Canada (IC) specifications as follows:

Radio EMC Environmental Safety RSS-119 / RSS-134 This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian standard ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. EN 300 019, Class 3.4 Ingress Protection IP51 EN 60950-1:2006 Class 1 division 2 for hazardous locations Frequency Band *

Channel size Power input Authorization IC 135-175 MHz 15 kHz, 30 kHz 13.8 VDC RSS-119 6772A-SQ135M150 215-240 MHz 400-470 MHz 896-902 MHz 928-960 MHz 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz, 50 kHz 13.8 VDC RSS-119 Pending 13.8 VDC RSS-119 6772A-SQ400M1311 13.8 VDC 13.8 VDC RSS-119 and RSS-134 RSS-119 and RSS-134 Pending Pending

* The Frequency Band is not an indication of the exact frequencies approved by IC. Compliance Brazil Este produto ser comercializado no Brasil com as configuraes abaixo:

Faixa de frequncia: 406,10 a 413,05, 423,05 a 430 MHz, 451,00625 a 452,0065 MHz, 459 a 460 MHz, 461,0025 a 462,00625 MHz e 469 a 470 MHz. Modulaes: QPSK, 16QAM e 64QAM BW: 12,5 e 25 KHz. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO

| 5 Compliance Hazardous Locations Notice This product is suitable for use in Class 1, Division 2, Groups A - D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations. The following text is printed on the Aprisa SR+ fascia:

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do not connect or disconnect while circuits are live unless area is known to be non-hazardous. The following text is printed on the Aprisa SR+ where the end user is in Canada:

AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE D'EXPLOSION - Ne pas brancher ou dbrancher tant que le circuit est sous tension, moins qu'il ne s'agisse d'un emplacement non dangereux. The USB service ports are not to be used unless the area is known to be non-hazardous. Compliance IEEE 1613 class 2 Users requiring compliance to IEEE 1613 class 2 should use screened cables and connectors to connect to the serial ports. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 6 |

RF Exposure Warning WARNING:

The installer and / or user of Aprisa SR+ radios shall ensure that a separation distance as given in the following table is maintained between the main axis of the terminals antenna and the body of the user or nearby persons. Minimum separation distances given are based on the maximum values of the following methodologies:

1. Maximum Permissible Exposure non-occupational limit (B or general public) of 47 CFR 1.1310 and the methodology of FCCs OST/OET Bulletin number 65. 2. Reference levels as given in Annex III, European Directive on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz)

(1999/519/EC). These distances will ensure indirect compliance with the requirements of EN 50385:2002. Frequency (MHz) Maximum Power Maximum Antenna Minimum Separation

(dBm) Note 1 Gain (dBi) Distance

(m) 135 175 215 240 320 400 450 470 520 757 788 896 902 928 960

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37

+ 37 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 18 18 28 28 28 28 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 10.0 10.0 9.5 9.5 Note 1: The Peak Envelope Power (PEP) at maximum set power level is +41 dBm. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Contents Contents | 7 1. Getting Started ........................................................................ 13 2. Introduction ............................................................................ 15 About This Manual ............................................................................... 15 What It Covers ............................................................................ 15 Who Should Read It ...................................................................... 15 Contact Us ................................................................................. 15 Whats in the Box ............................................................................... 15 Aprisa SR+ Accessory Kit ................................................................ 16 Aprisa SR+ CD Contents .................................................................. 16 Software ............................................................................ 16 Documentation .................................................................... 16 3. About the Radio ....................................................................... 17 The 4RF Aprisa SR+ Radio ...................................................................... 17 Product Overview ............................................................................... 18 Network Coverage and Capacity ....................................................... 18 Automatic Registration .................................................................. 18 Remote Messaging ........................................................................ 18 Store and Forward Repeater ............................................................ 19 Repeater Packet Forwarding..................................................... 19 Repeater Messaging ............................................................... 22 Peer To Peer Communication Between Remote Radios ...................... 23 Product Features ................................................................................ 24 Functions .................................................................................. 24 Security .................................................................................... 25 Performance .............................................................................. 26 Usability ................................................................................... 26 System Gain vs FEC Coding ............................................................. 27 Architecture ...................................................................................... 28 Product Operation ........................................................................ 28 Physical Layer ............................................................................. 28 Data Link Layer / MAC layer ............................................................ 29 Channel Access .................................................................... 29 Hop by Hop Transmission ......................................................... 30 Adaptive Coding and Modulation ................................................ 30 Network Layer ............................................................................ 31 Packet Routing ..................................................................... 31 Static IP Router .................................................................... 32 Bridge Mode with VLAN Aware .................................................. 35 VLAN Bridge Mode Description .................................................. 36 Avoiding Narrow Band Radio Traffic Overloading .................................... 38 Interfaces ......................................................................................... 40 Antenna Interface ........................................................................ 40 Ethernet Interface ....................................................................... 40 RS-232 / RS-485 Interface ............................................................... 40 USB Interfaces ............................................................................ 40 Protect Interface ......................................................................... 40 Alarms Interface .......................................................................... 40 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 8 | Contents Front Panel Connections ....................................................................... 41 LED Display Panel ............................................................................... 42 Normal Operation ........................................................................ 42 Single Radio Software Upgrade ......................................................... 43 Network Software Upgrade ............................................................. 43 Test Mode ................................................................................. 44 Network Management .......................................................................... 45 Hardware Alarm Inputs / Outputs ............................................................ 46 Alarm Input to SNMP Trap ............................................................... 46 Alarm Input to Alarm Output ........................................................... 46 Aprisa SR Alarm Input to Aprisa SR+ Alarm Output .................................. 46 4. Implementing the Network.......................................................... 47 Network Topologies ............................................................................. 47 Point-To-Point Network .......................................................... 47 Point-to-Multipoint Network ..................................................... 47 Point-to-Multipoint with Repeater 1 ............................................ 47 Point-to-Multipoint with Repeater 2 ............................................ 47 Initial Network Deployment ................................................................... 48 Install the Base Station .................................................................. 48 Installing the Remote Stations ......................................................... 48 Install a Repeater Station ............................................................... 48 Network Changes ................................................................................ 49 Adding a Repeater Station .............................................................. 49 Adding a Remote Station ................................................................ 49 5. Preparation ............................................................................ 51 Bench Setup ...................................................................................... 51 Path Planning .................................................................................... 52 Antenna Selection and Siting ........................................................... 52 Base or Repeater Station ......................................................... 52 Remote station .................................................................... 53 Antenna Siting ..................................................................... 54 Coaxial Feeder Cables ................................................................... 55 Linking System Plan ...................................................................... 55 Site Requirements ............................................................................... 56 Power Supply .............................................................................. 56 Equipment Cooling ....................................................................... 56 Earthing and Lightning Protection ..................................................... 57 Feeder Earthing .................................................................... 57 Radio Earthing ..................................................................... 57 6. Installing the Radio ................................................................... 58 Mounting .......................................................................................... 58 Required Tools ............................................................................ 58 DIN Rail Mounting ........................................................................ 59 Rack Shelf Mounting ..................................................................... 60 Wall Mounting ............................................................................. 61 Installing the Antenna and Feeder Cable .................................................... 62 Connecting the Power Supply ................................................................. 63 External Power Supplies ................................................................. 63 Spare Fuses ................................................................................ 64 Additional Spare Fuses ............................................................ 65 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 7. Managing the Radio ................................................................... 67 Contents | 9 SuperVisor ........................................................................................ 67 PC Requirements for SuperVisor ....................................................... 68 Connecting to SuperVisor ............................................................... 69 Management PC Connection ..................................................... 70 PC Settings for SuperVisor ....................................................... 71 Login to SuperVisor................................................................ 75 Logout of SuperVisor .............................................................. 76 SuperVisor Page Layout ........................................................... 77 SuperVisor Menu ................................................................... 79 SuperVisor Menu Access .......................................................... 80 SuperVisor Menu Items ........................................................... 82 Standard Radio............................................................................ 83 Terminal ............................................................................ 83 Radio .............................................................................. 101 Serial .............................................................................. 122 Ethernet .......................................................................... 137 IP................................................................................... 147 QoS ................................................................................ 160 Security ........................................................................... 182 Maintenance ..................................................................... 204 Events ............................................................................. 222 Software .......................................................................... 234 Monitoring ........................................................................ 253 Network Status .................................................................. 271 Protected Station ...................................................................... 278 Terminal .......................................................................... 279 Radio .............................................................................. 285 Ethernet .......................................................................... 287 IP................................................................................... 288 Security ........................................................................... 292 Maintenance ..................................................................... 294 Events ............................................................................. 302 Software .......................................................................... 305 Command Line Interface ..................................................................... 322 Connecting to the Management Port ................................................ 322 CLI Commands .......................................................................... 325 Viewing the CLI Terminal Summary ........................................... 326 Changing the Radio IP Address with the CLI ................................. 326 8. In-Service Commissioning .......................................................... 327 Before You Start ............................................................................... 327 What You Will Need .................................................................... 327 Antenna Alignment ............................................................................ 328 Aligning the Antennas ................................................................. 328 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 10 | Contents 9. Product Options ...................................................................... 329 Data Interface Ports .......................................................................... 329 Full Duplex Base Station ..................................................................... 329 Protected Station ............................................................................. 330 Protected Ports ......................................................................... 331 Operation ................................................................................ 331 Switch Over ...................................................................... 331 Switching Criteria ............................................................... 332 Monitored Alarms ................................................................ 333 Configuration Management .................................................... 334 Hardware Manual Lock ......................................................... 335 Remote Control .................................................................. 335 L2 / L3 Protection Operation .................................................. 336 Hot-Swappable ................................................................... 336 Antenna and Duplexer Options ................................................ 337 Installation .............................................................................. 339 Mounting .......................................................................... 339 Cabling ............................................................................ 340 Power ............................................................................. 342 Alarms ............................................................................. 342 Maintenance ............................................................................ 343 Changing the Protected Station IP Addresses ............................... 343 Creating a Protected Station .................................................. 344 Replacing a Protected Station Faulty Radio ................................. 344 Replacing a Faulty Power Supply .............................................. 345 Replacing a Faulty Protection Switch ........................................ 345 Spares .................................................................................... 345 Data Driven Protected Station............................................................... 346 Operation ................................................................................ 346 Over The Air Compatibility .................................................... 346 Switch Over ...................................................................... 347 Configuration Management .................................................... 347 Power ............................................................................. 347 Installation .............................................................................. 348 Mounting .......................................................................... 348 Cabling ............................................................................ 348 Duplexer Kits ................................................................................... 349 Radio Duplexer Kits .................................................................... 349 Protected Station Duplexer Kits ...................................................... 351 USB RS-232 / RS-485 Serial Port ............................................................. 353 USB RS-232 / RS-485 operation ....................................................... 353 USB RS-232 Cabling Options ........................................................... 354 USB RS-485 Cabling Options ........................................................... 354 USB Retention Clip .............................................................. 355 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 10. Maintenance .......................................................................... 357 Contents | 11 No User-Serviceable Components ........................................................... 357 Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 358 Network Software Upgrade ........................................................... 358 Non-Protected Network Upgrade Process .................................... 358 Protected Network Upgrade Process ......................................... 360 Single Radio Software Upgrade ....................................................... 362 File Transfer Method ............................................................ 362 USB Boot Upgrade Method ..................................................... 363 Software Downgrade ............................................................ 363 Protected Station Software Upgrade ................................................ 364 11. Interface Connections ............................................................... 365 RJ45 Connector Pin Assignments ............................................................ 365 Ethernet Interface Connections ............................................................. 365 RS-232 Serial Interface Connections ........................................................ 366 RS-232 Pinout .................................................................... 366 RS-232 Customer Cable Wiring ................................................ 366 RS-232 RJ45 LED Indicators .................................................... 366 Alarm Interface Connections ................................................................ 367 Protection Switch Remote Control Connections .......................................... 367 12. Alarm Types and Sources ........................................................... 368 Alarm Types .................................................................................... 368 Alarm Events ............................................................................ 369 Informational Events ................................................................... 374 13. Specifications ......................................................................... 375 RF Specifications .............................................................................. 375 Frequency Bands ....................................................................... 375 Channel Sizes ........................................................................... 376 Receiver ................................................................................. 389 Transmitter ............................................................................. 392 Modem ................................................................................... 393 Data Payload Security ................................................................. 393 Interface Specifications ...................................................................... 394 Ethernet Interface ..................................................................... 394 RS-232 Asynchronous Interface ....................................................... 395 Hardware Alarms Interface ........................................................... 396 Protection Switch Specifications ..................................................... 396 Power Specifications .......................................................................... 397 Power Supply ............................................................................ 397 Power Consumption .................................................................... 398 Power Dissipation ...................................................................... 398 General Specifications ........................................................................ 399 Environmental .......................................................................... 399 Mechanical .............................................................................. 399 Compliance .............................................................................. 400 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 12 | Contents 14. Product End Of Life .................................................................. 401 End-of-Life Recycling Programme (WEEE) ................................................. 401 The WEEE Symbol Explained .......................................................... 401 WEEE Must Be Collected Separately ................................................. 401 YOUR ROLE in the Recovery of WEEE ................................................ 401 EEE Waste Impacts the Environment and Health .................................. 401 15. Copyrights ............................................................................. 402 16. Abbreviations ......................................................................... 403 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 1. Getting Started Getting Started | 13 This section is an overview of the steps required to commission an Aprisa SR+ radio network in the field:

Phase 1: Pre-installation 1. 2. Confirm path planning. Ensure that the site preparation is complete:

Power requirements Tower requirements Environmental considerations, for example, temperature control Mounting space Phase 2:

Installing the radios 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Mount the radio. Connect earthing to the radio. Confirm that the:

Antenna is mounted and visually aligned Feeder cable is connected to the antenna Feeder connections are tightened to recommended level Tower earthing is complete Install lightning protection. Connect the coaxial jumper cable between the lightning protection and the radio antenna port. 6. Connect the power to the radio. Page 52 Page 55 Page 58 Page 57 Page 57 Page 62 Page 63 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 14 | Getting Started Phase 3: Establishing the link 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. If radios IP address is not the default IP address (169.254.50.10 with a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0) and you dont know the radios IP address see Command Line Interface on page 322. Page 322 Connect the Ethernet cable between the radios Ethernet port and the PC. Confirm that the PC IP settings are correct for the Ethernet connection:

Page 71 IP address Subnet mask Gateway IP address Open a web browser and login to the radio. Set or confirm the RF characteristics:

TX and RX frequencies TX output power Page 75 Page 103 Compare the actual RSSI to the expected RSSI value (from your path planning). Page 44 Align the antennas. Confirm that the radio is operating correctly; the OK, MODE and AUX LEDs are green. Page 328 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Introduction | 15 2. Introduction About This Manual What It Covers This user manual describes how to install and configure an Aprisa SR+ point-to-multipoint digital radio network. It specifically documents an Aprisa SR+ radio running system software version 1.6.0 . It is recommended that you read the relevant sections of this manual before installing or operating the radios. Who Should Read It This manual has been written for professional field technicians and engineers who have an appropriate level of training and experience. Contact Us If you experience any difficulty installing or using Aprisa SR+ after reading this manual, please contact Customer Support or your local 4RF representative. Our area representative contact details are available from our website:

4RF Limited 26 Glover Street, Ngauranga PO Box 13-506 Wellington 6032 New Zealand E-mail Web site Telephone Facsimile Attention support@4rf.com www.4rf.com

+64 4 499 6000

+64 4 473 4447 Customer Services Whats in the Box Inside the box you will find:

One Aprisa SR+ radio fitted with a power connector. One Aprisa SR+ Accessory kit containing the following:

Aprisa SR+ CD Aprisa SR+ Quick Start Guide Management Cable Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 16 | Introduction Aprisa SR+ Accessory Kit The accessory kit contains the following items:

Aprisa SR+ Quick Start Guide Aprisa SR+ CD Management Cable USB Cable USB A to USB micro B, 1m Aprisa SR+ CD Contents The Aprisa SR+ CD contains the following:

Software The latest version of the radio software (see Software Upgrade on page 358) USB Serial Driver Web browsers - Mozilla Firefox and Internet Explorer are included for your convenience Adobe Acrobat Reader which you need to view the PDF files on the Aprisa SR+ CD Documentation User manual - an electronic (PDF) version for you to view online or print Product collateral - application overviews, product description, quick start guide, case studies, software release notes and technical papers Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 17 3. About the Radio The 4RF Aprisa SR+ Radio The 4RF Aprisa SR+ is a Point-To-Multipoint (PMP) and Point-To-Point (PTP) digital radio providing secure narrowband wireless data connectivity for SCADA, infrastructure and telemetry applications. The radios carry a combination of serial data and Ethernet data between the base station, repeater stations and remote stations. A single Aprisa SR+ is configurable as a:

Point-To-Multipoint base station, remote station, repeater station or a base-repeater station Point-To-Point local or remote radio Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 18 | About the Radio Product Overview Network Coverage and Capacity The Aprisa SR+ has a typical link range of up to 120 km, however, geographic features, such as hills, mountains, trees and foliage, or other path obstructions, such as buildings, will limit radio coverage. Additionally, geography may reduce network capacity at the edge of the network where errors may occur and require retransmission. However, the Aprisa SR+ uses 10W output power and Forward Error Correction

(FEC) which greatly improves the sensitivity and system gain performance of the radio resulting in less retries and minimal reduction in capacity. Ultimately, the overall performance of any specific network will be defined by a range of factors including the RF output power, the modulation used and its related receiver sensitivity, the geographic location, the number of remote stations in the base station coverage area and the traffic profile across the network. Effective network design will distribute the total number of remote stations across the available base stations to ensure optimal geographic coverage and network capacity. One base station can register and operate with up to 500 remote / repeater stations. The practical limit of remote / repeater stations that can operate with one base station is determined by a range of factors including the number of services, the packet sizes, the protocols used, the message types and network timeouts. Automatic Registration On start-up, the remote station transmits a registration message to the base station which responds with a registration response. This allows the base station to record the details of all the remote stations active in the network. If a remote station cannot register with the base station after multiple attempts within 10 minutes, it will automatically reboot. If remote is not able to register with base station in 5 attempts, then a Network Configuration Warning alarm event will be raised indicating that a remote is not registered with the base station. If a remote station has registered with the base station but then loses communication, it will automatically reboot within 2 minutes. Remote Messaging There are two message types in the Aprisa SR+ network, broadcast messages and unicast messages. Broadcast messages are transmitted by the base station to the remote stations and unicast messages are transmitted by the remote station to the base station. These messages are commonly referred to as uplink

(unicast remote to base) and downlink (broadcast base to remote). All remotes within the coverage area will receive broadcast messages and pass them on to either the Ethernet or serial interface. The RTU determines if the message is intended for it and will accept it or discard it. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Store and Forward Repeater The Aprisa SR+ in Repeater mode is used to link remote stations to the base station when direct communication is not possible due to terrain, distance, fade margin or other obstructions in the network. The following example depicts a repeater on the hill top to allow communication between the base station and the remote stations on the other side of hilly terrain. About the Radio | 19 Repeater Packet Forwarding The Aprisa SR+ works in packet Store and Forward (S&F) for simple and low cost repeater network. Repeater mode is available in both Access Request (AR) and Listen Before Send (LBS/CSMA) MAC operating modes. It allows a radio in Repeater mode to store a received packet and retransmit it. Single Repeater Single Hop The following example depicts an Aprisa SR+ single repeater single hop Store and Forward network. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 20 | About the Radio Multiple Repeater Single Hop The following example depicts an Aprisa SR+ multiple repeater single hop store and forward network supporting both overlapping and non-overlapping coverage repeater networks. An overlapped RF coverage area creates radio interference and might affect network performance and reduce throughput, as show in figure (a), where Remote 1 is in overlapped RF coverage with Repeater 1 and Repeater 2. The Aprisa SR+ functionality allows repeaters in Bridge mode to forward Ethernet packets based on Repeater Network Segment ID. The base station translates the destination address (DA) to the Repeater Network Segment ID. This improves repeater performance by forwarding the packet if the Repeater Network Segment ID belongs to the repeater branch and discards the packet if it doesnt. Router mode supports repeater packet forwarding based on IP destination address. This improves repeater performance by forwarding the packet if the IP destination address belongs to the repeater branch and discards the packet if it doesnt Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Multiple Repeater Multiple Hop The following example depicts an Aprisa SR+ daisy chain multiple repeater multiple hop store and forward network i.e. multiple hops and multiple repeaters in non-overlapping RF coverage. The Aprisa SR+ daisy chain store and forward repeaters are currently supported in LBS MAC mode only. About the Radio | 21 In any type of store and forward repeater network base, repeater and remote radios must have their Tx/Rx frequencies sets to match to their appropriate linking devices as shown in the figures. Note: Frequencies shown in the figures relates to the device on the left where {Tx, Rx} = {fx, fy}. In this example, the Base Station, Repeater 2 and remotes are deployed with Tx=f1 and Rx=f2. On the other hand Repeater 1 and Repeater 3 are deployed with Tx=f2 and Rx=f1, creating the required linking for daisy chain operation. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 22 | About the Radio Repeater Messaging The Aprisa SR+ uses a routed protocol throughout the network whereby messages contain source and destination addresses. The remote and repeater stations will register with a base station. In networks with a repeater, the repeater must register with the base station before the remotes can register with the base station. Additionally, based on destination address, messages are designated as either a broadcast message,

(mostly originating from a base station) or a unicast message (mostly originating from a remote station). In a network with a repeater, or multiple repeaters, the base station broadcasts a message which contains a source address and a destination address. The repeater receives the message and recognizes it as a broadcast message, from the destination address and re-broadcasts the message across the network. In IP routing mode all remote stations in the coverage area will receive the message but only the radio with the destination address will act upon the message. Similarly, the remote station will send a unicast message which contains a unicast destination address (the base station). The repeater will receive this message; recognize the destination address and forward it to the appropriate destination address. In order to prevent repeater-repeater loops, a detection mechanism of duplicate message and use of unicast messaging in remote to base/repeater direction is used. For example, in the Multiple Repeater Single Hop figure above, the topology is of Base, Repeater 1, Repeater 2 and Remote 1 connected to Repeater 1 in overlapping coverage, where Remote 1 can also hear Repeater 2. When the Base station broadcasts a message, Remote1 will receive this message from both Repeater 1 and Repeater 2 but will drop one of them as duplicate message. It is possible that Repeater 1, for example, can also hear the broadcast sent out by Repeater 2. In this case, Repeater 1 will drop this broadcast as a duplicate message. These phenomena will not happen in the upstream direction as all messages are sent unicast. Remote 1 will send a packet to Base station, setting the destination address in packet to Base station and next hop address in packet to Repeater 1. Thus, only Repeater 1 will forward the packet to Base station and Repeater 2 will drop the packet as the next hop address is not Repeater 2. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 23 Peer To Peer Communication Between Remote Radios The Aprisa SR+ peer to peer communication between remote radios is used to enable communication between remote radios via the repeater or base-repeater. It is useful if the SCADA server or base station fails or when in some industries like the water industry, where a reservoir remote station might send a direct message to a valve remote station to close or open the valve without the intervention of the SCADA server. The Aprisa SR+ has a special operating mode for peer to peer communication between remote radios and requires the following settings:

1. If peer to peer communication between remote radios is required to operate via the base station, then the SuperVisor > Terminal > Operating Mode > Terminal operating mode must be set to Base-

Repeater. Base-Repeater operating mode doesnt change the Network Radius parameter as the base-repeater is considered to be like a regular base station. 2. The remote radios participating in peer to peer communication must set the SuperVisor > Radio >

Channel Setup > Packet Filtering to Disable to allow a repeated packet received from peer to peer remote radios by the repeater or base-repeater to forward the packet to the relevant interface and not to discard it. 3. IP Header Compression must be disabled on all radios (base, repeater, remotes) for this feature to operate correctly (See IP Header Compression Ratio on page 119). 4. The Network Repeaters Proximity must be set to Base Repeater on all remote radios for this feature to operate correctly (See Network Repeaters Proximity on page 89). 5. Note: In Router Mode setup a static route for any required peer to peer path. The following example depicts peer to peer communication between remote radios via a base-repeater and via a repeater station where remote-1 and remote-2 communicate with each other via the base-

repeater station and remote-3 and remote-4 communicate with each other via the repeater station. All the remote radios are configured with packet filtering disabled and all radios in the network are configured with IP header compression ratio disabled. Note: The Aprisa SR+ network is transparent to the protocol being transmitted; therefore the Packet Filtering parameter is based on the Aprisa SR+ addressing and network protocols, not the user (SCADA, etc.) traffic protocols. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 24 | About the Radio Product Features Functions Point-to-Point (PTP) or Point-to-Multipoint (PMP) operation Licensed frequency bands:

VHF 135 VHF 220 UHF 320 UHF 400 UHF 450 UHF 700 UHF 896 UHF 928 135-175 MHz 215-240 MHz 320-400 MHz 400-470 MHz 450-520 MHz 757-758 MHz and 787-788 MHz 896-902 MHz 928-960 MHz Channel sizes software selectable:

12.5 kHz 20 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM): QPSK to 64 QAM Half duplex or full duplex RF Point-To-Multipoint operation Full duplex RF Point-To-Point operation Ethernet data interface and RS-232 / RS-485 asynchronous multiple port options Software selectable dual / single antenna port options (dual antenna port for external duplexers or filters) Data encryption and authentication using 128,192 and 256 bit AES and CCM security standards Terminal server operation for transporting RS-232 / RS-485 traffic over IP or Ethernet and converting IP packets to a local physical serial port Mirrored Bits and SLIP support for RS-232 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN support with single and double VLAN tagged and add/remove VLAN manipulation to adapt to the appropriate RTU / PLCs QoS supports using IEEE 802.1p VLAN priority bits to prioritize and handle the VLAN / traffic types QoS per port (Ethernet, serial, management) L2 / L3 / L4 filtering for security and avoiding narrow band radio network overload L3 Gateway Router mode with standard static IP route for simple routing network integration L3 Router mode with per Ethernet interface IP address and subnet L2 Bridge mode with VLAN aware for standard Industrial LAN integration Ethernet header and IP/TCP / UDP ROHC header compression to increase the narrow band radio capacity Ethernet and serial payload compression to increase the narrow band radio capacity Pseudo peer to peer communication between remote stations through base-repeater or repeater stations SuperVisor web management support for element and sub-network (base-repeater-remotes) management SNMPv1/2/3 & encryption MIB supports for 4RF SNMP manager or third party SNMP agent network management Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 25 SNMP context addressing for compressed SNMP access to remote stations SNTP for accurate wide radio network time and date RADIUS security for remote user authorization, authentication and accounting Build-configuration / flexibility of serial and Ethernet interface ports (3+1, 2+2, 4+0) Radio and user interface redundancy (provided with Aprisa SR+ Protected Station) Protected Station fully hot swappable and monitored hot standby Power optimized with sleep modes Transparent to all common SCADA protocols; e.g. Modbus, IEC 60870-5-101/104, DNP3 or similar Complies with international standards, including ETSI, FCC, IC, ACMA, EMC, safety and environmental standards Security The Aprisa SR+ provides security features to implement the key recommendations for industrial control systems. The security provided builds upon the best in class from multiple standards bodies, including:

IEC/TR 62443 (TC65) Industrial Communications Networks Network and System Security IEC/TS 62351 (TC57) Power System Control and Associated Communications Data and Communication Security FIPS PUB 197, NIST SP 800-38C, IETF RFC3394, RFC3610 and IEEE P1711/P1689/P1685 FIPS 140-2: Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules The security features implemented are:

Data encryption Counter Mode Encryption (CTR) using Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128, 192, 256 bit, based on FIPS PUB 197 AES encryption (using Rijndael version 3.0) Data authentication NIST SP 800-38C Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code (CBC-MAC) based on RFC 3610 using Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Data payload security CCM Counter with CBC-MAC integrity (NIST special publication 800-38C) Secured management interface protects configuration L2 / L3 / L4 Address filtering enables traffic source authorization Proprietary physical layer protocol and modified MAC layer protocol based on standardized IEEE 802.15.4 Licensed radio spectrum provides recourse against interference SNMPv3 with Encryption for NMS secure access Secure USB software upgrade Key Encryption Key (KEK) based on RFC 3394, for secure Over The Air Re-keying (OTAR) of encryption keys User privilege allows the accessibility control of the different radio network users and the user permissions Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 26 | About the Radio Performance Typical deployment of 30 remote stations from one base station with a practical limit of a few hundred remote stations Long distance operation High transmit power Low noise receiver Forward Error Correction Electronic tuning over the frequency band Thermal management for high power over a wide temperature range Usability Configuration / diagnostics via front panel Management Port USB interface, Ethernet interface Built-in webserver SuperVisor with full configuration, diagnostics and monitoring functionality, including remote station configuration / diagnostics over the radio link LED display for on-site diagnostics Dedicated alarm port Software upgrade and diagnostic reporting via the host port USB flash drive Over-the-air software distribution and upgrades Simple installation with integrated mounting holes for wall, DIN rail and rack shelf mounting Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 27 System Gain vs FEC Coding This table shows the relationship between modulation, FEC coding, system gain, capacity and coverage. Maximum FEC coding results in the highest system gain, the best coverage but the least capacity Minimum FEC coding results in lower system gain, lower coverage but higher capacity No FEC coding results in the lowest system gain, the lowest coverage but the highest capacity This table defines the modulation order based on gross capacity:

Modulation FEC Coding QPSK (High Gain) Max Coded FEC QPSK (Low Gain) Min Coded FEC 16QAM (High Gain) Max Coded FEC QPSK No FEC 16QAM (Low Gain) Min Coded FEC 16QAM No FEC 64QAM (High Gain) Max Coded FEC Capacity Minimum 64QAM (Low Gain) Min Coded FEC Maximum This table defines the modulation order based on receiver sensitivity:

Modulation FEC Coding QPSK (High Gain) Max Coded FEC QPSK (Low Gain) Min Coded FEC 16QAM (High Gain) Max Coded FEC QPSK No FEC 16QAM (Low Gain) Min Coded FEC 64QAM (High Gain) Max Coded FEC 16QAM No FEC Coverage Maximum 64QAM (Low Gain) Min Coded FEC Minimum Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 28 | About the Radio Architecture The Aprisa SR+ Architecture is based around a layered TCP/IP protocol stack:

Physical Proprietary wireless RS-232 and Ethernet interfaces Link Proprietary wireless (channel access, ARQ, segmentation) VLAN aware Ethernet bridge Network Standard IP Proprietary automatic radio routing table population algorithm Transport TCP, UDP Application HTTPS web management access through base station with proprietary management application software including management of remote stations over the radio link SNMPv1/2/3 for network management application software Product Operation There are three components to the wireless interface: the Physical Layer (PHY), the Data Link Layer (DLL) and the Network Layer. These three layers are required to transport data across the wireless channel in the Point-to-Multipoint (PMP) configuration. The Aprisa SR+ DLL is largely based on the 802.15.4 Media Access Control (MAC) layer using a proprietary implementation. Physical Layer The Aprisa SR+ PHY uses a one or two frequency half duplex transmission mode which eliminates the need for a duplexer. However, a Dual Antenna port option is available for separate transmit and receive antenna connection to support external duplexers or filters (half duplex operation). Remote nodes are predominantly in receive mode with only sporadic bursts of transmit data. This reduces power consumption. The Aprisa SR+ is a packet based radio. Data is sent over the wireless channel in discrete packets /

frames, separated in time. The PHY demodulates data within these packets with coherent detection. The Aprisa SR+ PHY provides carrier, symbol and frame synchronization predominantly through the use of preambles. This preamble prefixes all packets sent over the wireless channel which enables fast Synchronization. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 29 Data Link Layer / MAC layer The Aprisa SR+ PHY enables multiple users to be able to share a single wireless channel; however a DLL is required to manage data transport. The two key components to the DLL are channel access and hop by hop transmission. Channel Access The Aprisa SR+ radio has two modes of channel access, Access Request and Listen Before Send. Option Function Access Request Channel access scheme where the base stations controls the communication on the channel. Remotes ask for access to the channel, and the base station grants access if the channel is not occupied. Listen Before Send Channel access scheme where network elements listen to ensure the channel is clear, before trying to access the channel. Access Request This scheme is particularly suited to digital SCADA systems where all data flows through the base station. In this case it is important that the base station has contention-free access as it is involved in every transaction. The channel access scheme assigns the base station as the channel access arbitrator and therefore inherently it has contention-free access to the channel. This means that there is no possibility of contention on data originating from the base station. As all data flows to or from the base station, this significantly improves the robustness of the system. All data messages are controlled via the AG (access grant) control message and therefore there is no possibility of contention on the actual end user data. If a remote station accesses the channel, the only contention risk is on the AR (access request) control message. These control messages are designed to be as short as possible and therefore the risk of collision of these control messages is significantly reduced. Should collisions occur these are resolved using a random back off and retry mechanism. As the base station controls all data transactions multiple applications can be effectively handled, including a mixture of polling and report by exception. Access Request Full Duplex This scheme is used in a network with a full duplex base / master station and half duplex repeater /

remote stations. Full duplex Access Request utilizes the existing (half duplex) Access Request scheme as described in the section above. The base / master station can transmit while simultaneously receiving from the remote / repeaters. This increases Access Request efficiency, especially in the report by exception scheme (spontaneous messages). This feature can be operated on full duplex hardware only (see Product Options section on page 329). If the Access Scheme is set to full duplex on a repeater, packets start to egress a repeater before the entire packet has been received by the repeater. This scheme reduces latency on long packets through a repeater and improves performance in Overlapping Coverage mode. To allow this new MAC scheme to operate, two new RF Network Detail parameters have been added; Base Station ID and Repeater Network Segment ID (see Base Station ID on page 89 and Repeater Network Segment ID on page 90). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 30 | About the Radio Listen Before Send The Listen Before Send channel access scheme is realized using Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA). In this mode, a pending transmission requires the channel to be clear. This is determined by monitoring the channel for other signals for a set time prior to transmission. This results in reduced collisions and improved channel capacity. There are still possibilities for collisions with this technique e.g. if two radios simultaneously determine the channel is clear and transmit at the same time. In this case an acknowledged transaction may be used. The transmitter requests an ACK to ensure that the transmission has been successful. If the transmitter does not receive an ACK, then random backoffs are used to reschedule the next transmission. Hop by Hop Transmission Hop by Hop Transmission is realized in the Aprisa SR+ by adding a MAC address header to the packet. For 802.15.4, there are 2 addresses, the source and destination addresses. Adaptive Coding and Modulation The Aprisa SR+ provides Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM) which maximizes the use of the RF path to provide the highest radio capacity available. ACM automatically adjusts the modulation coding and FEC code rate in the remote to base direction of transmission based on the signal quality for each individual remote radio. When the RF path is healthy (no fading), modulation coding is increased and the FEC code rate is decreased to maximize the data capacity. If the RF path quality degrades, modulation coding is decreased and the FEC code rate is increased for maximum robustness to maintain path connectivity. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 31 Network Layer Packet Routing Aprisa SR+ is a standard static IP router which routes and forwards IP packet based on standard IP address and routing table decisions. Aprisa SR+ router mode (see figure below), enables the routing of IP packets within the Aprisa SR+ wireless network and in and out to the external router / IP RTUs devices connected to the Aprisa SR+ wired Ethernet ports. Within the Aprisa SR+ Router mode, each incoming Ethernet packet on the Ethernet port is stripped from its Ethernet header to reveal the IP packet and to route the IP packet based on its routing table. If the destination IP address is one of the RTUs, the packet is then forwarded to the wireless ports and broadcasted as a PMP wireless packet to all the repeater / remotes stations. The appropriate remote then routes the IP packet and forwards it based on its routing table to the appropriate Ethernet port, encapsulating the appropriate next hop MAC header and forwarding it to the RTU. The RTU can then interpret and process the IP data and communication is established between the RTU and the initiating communication device. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 32 | About the Radio Static IP Router The Aprisa SR+ works in the point-to-multipoint (PMP) network as a standard static IP router with the Ethernet and wireless / radio as interfaces and serial ports using terminal server as a virtual interface. The Aprisa SR+ static router is semi-automated operation, where the routing table is automatically created in the base station and populated with routes to all remotes and repeater stations in the network during the registration process and vice versa, where the routing table is automatically created in remote and repeater stations and populated with routes to base station during the registration process. Updates occur when remote is disconnected from network for any reason, with the routing table updated in a controlled fashion. Also, in decommission operation, the base station routing tables are completely flushed allowing an automatic rebuild. This avoids the user manually inserting / removing of multiple static routes to build /

change the routes in the network which might be tedious and introduce significant human error. The Aprisa SR+ works as a static IP router without using any routing protocol and therefore does not have the overhead of a routing protocol for better utilization of the narrow bandwidth network. In addition to the semi-automated routes, the user can manually add / remove routes in the routing table for the radio interface, Ethernet Interface and for routers which are connected to the radio network. The Aprisa SR+ base station is used as a gateway to other networks. Thus, a configurable IP address default gateway can be set using a static route in the routing table with a destination IP address of the destination network address. It is recommended to use a real network IP address (actual device IP) for the gateway and not 0.0.0.0. The Aprisa SR+ sub-netting rules distinguish between the wireless interface and the remote Ethernet interface where RTUs are connected. The entire wireless network is set on a single IP subnet, while each Aprisa SR+ remotes Ethernet interface is set to a different subnet network. In this way, the user can easily distinguish between the remotes subnet IP addresses. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 33 The Radio Network as a Gateway Router The Aprisa SR+ point-to-multipoint radio network can be considered as a gateway router where the network Ethernet interface on each radio in the network is the router port. The routing table for all directly attached devices to the Aprisa SR+ network, at the Base or the Remote stations is automatically built and no static routes are required to be entered for those device routes. The Radio interface IP address is used internally for the radio network and automatic routes. It is not used when setting static routes or default gateways. Static route IP addresses or the default gateway should use the network Ethernet interface IP address. External network routers should be set with a high metric for the SR+ path, to prevent route updates being sent over the radio network. The Radio Network as a Router Example The purpose of this example is to determine the static route setting for router R2 in the base station and remote station in the following network. Since the Aprisa SR+ network should be considered as a router where the network Ethernet interface is the router port, the network configuration for setting the static routes or the default gateway IP addresses is described in the follow figure:

Thus, the static route setting for router R2 at the Aprisa SR+ base station and remote station will be:

Destination Address Destination Mask Gateway Address Static Route Setting at ?

192.168.3.0 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.1 Base station 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.2 Remote station Note: The radio network (base station and remote stations) will automatically build routes to the attached device e.g. SCADA Master station or attached router e.g. router R1 so static routes are not required for these devices. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 34 | About the Radio Static IP Router Human Error Free To ensure correct operation, the Aprisa SR+ router base station alerts when one (or more) of the devices is not configured for router mode or a duplicated IP is detected when manually added. When the user changes the base station IP address / subnet, the base station sends an ARP unsolicited announcement message and the remotes / repeaters auto-update their routing table accordingly. This also allows the router that is connected to the base station to update its next hop IP address and its routing table. When the user changes the remote / repeater station IP address / subnet, a re-registration process in the base station then auto-updates its routing table accordingly. Terminal Server - Transition to Converged Ethernet / IP Network Customers that are transitioning their SCADA network to an Ethernet / IP SCADA network, can simultaneously operate their legacy serial RTUs, not as a separate serial network to the new Ethernet / IP network, but as part of the Ethernet / IP network, by using the terminal server feature. The Aprisa SR+ terminal server is an application running in the radio that encapsulates serial traffic into Ethernet / IP traffic. For SCADA networks, this enables the use of both serial and Ethernet / IP RTUs within an Ethernet / IP based SCADA network. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 35 Bridge Mode with VLAN Aware Ethernet VLAN Bridge / Switch Overview The Aprisa SR+ in Bridge mode of operation is a standard Ethernet Bridge based on IEEE 802.1d or VLAN Bridge based on IEEE 802.1q/p which forward / switch Ethernet packet based on standard MAC addresses and VLANs using FDB (forwarding database) table decisions. VLAN is short for Virtual LAN and is a virtual separate network, within its own broadcast domain, but across the same physical network. VLANs offer several important benefits such as improved network performance, increased security and simplified network management. The Aprisa SR+ Bridge mode (see figure below), is the default mode of operation and it enables the switching / bridging of Ethernet VLAN tagged or untagged packets within the Aprisa SR+ wireless network and in and out to the external Industrial LAN network and RTUs devices connected to the Aprisa SR+ wired Ethernet ports or serial ports through the terminal server function. Within the Aprisa SR+ Bridge mode, each incoming Ethernet packet is inspected for the destination MAC address (and VLAN) and looks up its FDB table for information on where to send the specific Ethernet frame. If the FDB table doesnt contain the specific MAC address, it will flood the Ethernet frame out to all ports in the broadcast domain and when using VLAN, the broadcast domain is narrowed to the specific VLAN used in the packet (i.e. broadcast will be done only to the ports which configured with that specific VLAN). The FDB table is used to store the MAC addresses that have been learnt and the ports associated with that MAC address. If the destination MAC address is one of the RTUs, the packet is then forwarded to the wireless ports and broadcast as a PMP wireless packet to all the repeater / remote stations. The appropriate remote then switches the Ethernet packet and forwards it based on its FDB table (based on the MAC or VLAN & MAC) to the appropriate Ethernet port to the RTU. The RTU can then interpret and process the Ethernet / IP data and communication is established between the RTU and the initiating communication device. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 36 | About the Radio VLAN Bridge Mode Description General Aprisa SR+ VLAN Bridge The Aprisa SR+ works in a point-to-multipoint (PMP) network as a standard VLAN bridge with the Ethernet and wireless / radio as interfaces and serial ports using terminal server as a virtual interface. The Aprisa SR+ is a standard IEEE 802.1q VLAN bridge, where the FDB table is created by the bridge learning / aging process. New MACs are learnt and the FDB table updated. Unused MACs are aged out and flushed automatically after aging period. VLANs are statically configured by the user on the ports where a Virtual LAN is required across the radio network. An example of VLAN isolation of traffic type is shown in the figure below, where RTUs #1, 4 and 6 together with SCADA meter master form a Virtual LAN which is isolated from the other devices, even though they are on the same physical network. VLAN management can be used to manage with external NMS all the Aprisa SR+ devices on the radio network and is automatically created with a VLAN ID = 1 default value. The VLAN ID can be changed by the user later on. Each device in the Aprisa SR+ bridge is identified by its own IP address, as shown in the figure. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 37 VLANs Single, Double and Trunk VLAN ports The Aprisa SR+ supports single VLAN (CVLAN), double VLAN (SVLAN) and trunk VLAN. A single VLAN can be used to segregate traffic type. A double VLAN can be used to distinguish between Aprisa SR+ sub-networks (base-repeater-remote), where the outer SVLAN is used to identify the sub-network and the CVLAN is used to identify the traffic type. In this case, a double tagged VLAN will be forwarded across the Industrial LAN network and switched based on the SVLAN to the appropriate Aprisa SR+ sub-network. When packet enters the Aprisa SR+

network, the SVLAN will be stripped off (removed) and the forwarding will be done based on the CVLAN, so only a single VLAN will pass through over the radio network and double VLAN will be valid on the borders of the radio network. Trunk VLAN is also supported by the Aprisa SR+ where the user can configure multiple VLANs on a specific Ethernet port, creating a trunk VLAN port. For example, in the above figure, a single trunk VLAN port is created between the switch and the Aprisa SR+ base station, carrying VLAN ID #1, 20, 30 and 40. VLAN Manipulation Add / Remove VLAN Tags In order to support double VLAN and different device types connected to the Aprisa SR+ e.g. switches, RTUs, etc, which can be VLAN tagged or untagged / plain Ethernet devices, add / remove VLAN manipulation is required. In an Aprisa SR+ VLAN tagged network, a remote Aprisa SR+ connected to a plain RTU without VLAN support, will remove (strip-off) the VLAN tag from the packet before sending it to the RTU. On the other direction, when the RTU is sending an untagged packet, the Aprisa SR+ will add (append) an appropriate user pre-configure VLAN tag before sending it over the air to the base station. This is shown in the above figure on untagged RTU #5 and 7. QoS using VLAN VLANs carry 3 priority bits (PCP field) in the VLAN tag allowing prioritization of VLAN tagged traffic types with 8 levels of priority (where 7 is the highest priority and 0 is the lowest priority). The Aprisa SR+

supports QoS (Quality of Service) where the priority bits in the VLAN tagged frame are evaluated and mapped to four priority levels and four queues supported by the Aprisa SR+ radio. Packets in the queues are then scheduled out in a strict priority fashion for transmission over-the-air as per the priority level from high to low. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 38 | About the Radio Avoiding Narrow Band Radio Traffic Overloading The Aprisa SR+ supports mechanisms to prevent narrowband radio network overload:

1. L3/L4 Filtering The L3 filtering can be used to block undesired traffic from being transferred on the narrow band channel, occupying the channel and risking the SCADA critical traffic. L3/4 filtering has the ability to block a known IP address and applications using TCP/IP or UDP/IP protocols with multiple filtering rules. The L3 (/L4) filter can block/forward (discard/process) a specific IP address and a range of IP addresses. Each IP addressing filtering rule set can also be set to filter a L4 TCP or UDP port/s which in most cases relates to specific applications as per IANA official and unofficial well-known ports. For example, filter and block E-

mail SMTP or TFTP protocol as undesired traffic over the SCADA network. The user can block a specific or range of IP port addresses, examples SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) TCP port 25 or TFTP (Simple Trivial File Transfer Protocol) UDP port 69. 2. L2 Address Filtering L2 Filtering (Bridge Mode) provides the ability to filter radio link traffic based on specified Layer 2 MAC addresses. Destination MAC (DA) addresses and a Source MAC (SA) addresses and protocol type (ARP, VLAN, IPv4, IPv6 or Any type) that meet the filtering criteria will be transmitted over the radio link. Traffic that does not meet the filtering criteria will not be transmitted over the radio link. 3. L2 Port VLANs Ingress Filtering and QoS Double VLAN (Bridge Mode) Double VLAN is used to distinguish/segregate between different radio sub-networks (Base-repeaters-

remotes). Traffic with double VLANs which are not destined to a specific sub-network will be discarded on the ingress of the radio sub-network, avoiding the overload of the radio sub-network. Single VLAN (Bridge Mode) Single VLAN is used to distinguish/segregate between different traffic types assigned by the user in its industrial corporate LAN. In order to avoid the overload of the radio network, traffic with single VLANs which are not destined to a specific radio network will be discarded on the Ethernet ingress port of the radio network. All single VLANs which set and are eligible will be transmitted over the radio link. QoS using 802.1p priority bits (Bridge Mode) The priority bits can be used in the VLAN tagged frames to prioritized critical mission SCADA traffic and ensure SCADA traffic transmission relative to any other unimportant traffic. In this case, traffic based on VLAN priority (priority 0 to 7) enters one of the four priority queues of the Aprisa SR+ (Very High, High, Medium and Low). Traffic leaves the queues (to the radio network) from highest priority to lowest in a strict priority fashion. 4. Ethernet port QoS The Aprisa SR+ supports Ethernet Per Port Prioritization. Each Ethernet port can be assigned a priority and traffic shall be prioritized accordingly. This is quite useful in networks where customers do not use VLANs or cannot use 802.1p prioritization. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 39 5. Ethernet Data and Management Priority and Background Bulk Data Transfer Rate Alternatively to VLAN priority, users can control the Ethernet traffic priority (vs serial), management priority and rate in order to control the traffic load of the radio network, where important and high priority data (SCADA) will pass-through first assuring SCADA network operation. The user can set the use of the Ethernet Data Priority, which controls the priority of the Ethernet customer traffic relative to the serial customer traffic and can be set to one of the four queues. The Ethernet Management Priority controls the priority of the Ethernet management traffic relative to Ethernet customer traffic and can be set to one of the four queues. The Background Bulk Data Transfer Rate sets the data transfer rate (high, medium, low) for large amounts of management data. 6. Ethernet Packet Time to Live Another aspect of avoiding overload radio network is the Ethernet packet TTL, which is used to prevent old, redundant packets being transmitted through the radio network. This sets the time an Ethernet packet is allowed to live in the system before being dropped if it cannot be transmitted over the air. 7. Robust Header Compression (ROHC) and Payload Compression Aprisa SR+ supports ROHC (Robust Header Compression RFC3095). ROHC is a standard way to compress IP, UDP and TCP headers and this significantly increases IP traffic throughput especially in narrow band network. Aprisa SR+ supports payload compression. A LempelZiv (LZ) algorithm is used to efficiently compress up to 50% traffic with high percentage of repetitive strings. Both serial and Ethernet / IP payload traffic are compressed. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 40 | About the Radio Interfaces Antenna Interface 2 x TNC, 50 ohm, female connectors Single or dual antenna ports (with or without the use of external duplexer / filter) Ethernet Interface 2, 3 or 4 ports 10/100 base-T Ethernet layer 2 switch using RJ45 Used for Ethernet user traffic and radio sub-network management. RS-232 / RS-485 Interface 2, 1 or 0 RS-232 asynchronous ports using RJ45 connector Optional 1x RS-232 or RS-485 asynchronous port using USB host port with USB to RS-232 or USB to RS-485 converters USB Interfaces 1 x Management port using USB micro type B connector Used for product configuration with the Command Line Interface (CLI). 1 x Host port using USB standard type A connector Used for software upgrade, diagnostic reporting and configuration save / restore. Protect Interface 1x Protect interface port Used for the Protected Station operation. Alarms Interface 1x Alarm port using RJ45 connector Used to provide 2 x hardware alarm inputs and 2 x hardware alarm outputs Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Front Panel Connections About the Radio | 41 Example; 2 Ethernet ports and 2 RS-232 serial ports - see Data Interface Ports on page 329 for the other interface port options. Interface Port Option Part Number 2 Ethernet ports and 2 RS-232 serial ports APSQ-N400-SSC-HD-22-ENAA All connections to the radio are made on the front panel. The functions of the connectors are (from left to right):

Designator Description 10 - 30 VDC; 3A

+10 to +30 VDC (negative ground) DC power input using Molex 2 pin male screw fitting connector. AC/DC and DC/DC power supplies are available as accessories. See External Power Supplies on page 63. ETHERNET 1 & 2 Integrated 10Base-T/100Base-TX layer-3 Ethernet switch using RJ45 connectors. Used for Ethernet user traffic and product management. See Ethernet > Port Setup on page 138. SERIAL 1 & 2 Two ports of RS-232 serial using RJ45 connectors. Used for RS-232 asynchronous user traffic. See Serial > Port Setup on page 124. Host Port using a USB standard type A connector. Used for software upgrade and diagnostic reporting and optional: 1x RS-232 asynchronous port with USB to RS-232 converter. See Software Upgrade on page 358 and Maintenance > General on page 208. ALARM Alarm Port using a RJ45 connector. Used for two alarm inputs and two alarm outputs. See Hardware Alarms Interface on page 396. MGMT Management Port using a USB micro type B connector. PROTECT TX / ANT Used for product configuration with the Command Line Interface. See Connecting to the Management Port on page 322. Protect port. Used for Protected Station operation. TNC, 50 ohm, female connector for connection of antenna feeder cable for half duplex RF operation or the Transmit connection to an external duplexer for full duplex RF operation or to an external filter. See Coaxial Feeder Cables on page 55. RX TNC, 50 ohm, female connector for the Receive connection to an external duplexer for full duplex RF operation or to an external filter. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 42 | About the Radio LED Display Panel The Aprisa SR+ has an LED Display panel which provides on-site alarms / diagnostics without the need for PC. Normal Operation In normal radio operation, the LEDs indicate the following conditions:

OK MODE AUX TX RX Flashing Red Radio has not registered Solid Red Alarm present with severity Critical, Major and Minor Flashing Orange Diagnostics Function Active OTA software distribution Solid Orange Alarm present with Warning Severity TX path fail RX path fail Management traffic on the USB MGMT port Device detect on the USB host port

(momentary) Flashing Green Software Upgrade Successful Stand-by radio in protected station Tx / Rx Data on the USB host port RF path TX is RF path RX is active active Solid Green Power on and functions OK and no alarms Processor Block is OK or active radio in protected station USB interface OK Tx path OK Rx path OK LED Colour Severity Green Orange Red No alarm information only Warning alarm Critical, major or minor alarm Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 43 Single Radio Software Upgrade During a radio software upgrade, the LEDs indicate the following conditions:

Software upgrade started - the OK LED flashes orange Software upgrade progress indicated by running AUX to MODE LEDs Software upgrade completed successfully - the OK LED flashes green Software upgrade failed - any LED flashing red during the upgrade Network Software Upgrade During a network software upgrade, the MODE LED flashes orange on the base station and all remote stations. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 44 | About the Radio Test Mode Remote station and repeater station radios have a Test Mode which presents a real time visual display of the RSSI on the LED Display panel. This can be used to adjust the antenna for optimum signal strength (see Maintenance > Test Mode on page 210 for Test Mode options). To enter Test Mode, press and hold the TEST button on the radio LED panel until all the LEDs flash green

(about 3 - 5 seconds). The response time is variable and can be up to 5 seconds. To exit Test Mode, press and hold the TEST button until all the LEDs flash red (about 3 5 seconds). Note: Test Mode traffic has a low priority but could affect customer traffic depending on the relative priorities setup. The RSSI result is displayed on the LED Display panel as a combination of LED states:

Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO About the Radio | 45 Network Management The Aprisa SR+ contains an embedded web server application (SuperVisor) to enable element management with any major web browser (such as Mozilla Firefox or Microsoft Internet Explorer). SuperVisor enables operators to configure and manage the Aprisa SR+ base station radio and repeater /

remote station radios over the radio link. The key features of SuperVisor are:

Full element management, configuration and diagnostics Manage the entire network from the Base Station (remote management of elements) Managed network software distribution and upgrades Performance and alarm monitoring of the entire network, including RSSI, alarm states, time-

stamped events, etc. View and set standard radio configuration parameters including frequencies, transmit power, channel access, serial, Ethernet port settings Set and view security parameters User management Operates over a secure HTTPS session on the access connection to the base station SuperVisor, when connected to the base station radio allows management of all radios in the network. The Network Table displays a list of all the registered remote stations for the base station and provides management access to each of the remote stations (see Network Status > Network Table on page 271). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 46 | About the Radio Hardware Alarm Inputs / Outputs The Aprisa SR+ provides two hardware alarm inputs to generate alarm events in the network and two hardware alarm outputs to receive alarm events from the network. The hardware alarm inputs and outputs are part of the event system. All alarm events can be viewed in SuperVisor event history log (see Events > Event History on page 223). These include the alarm events generated by the hardware alarm inputs. Alarm Input to SNMP Trap An alarm event from an Aprisa SR+ hardware alarm input can be sent over the air to any SNMP Manager using SNMP traps. Alarm Input to Alarm Output An alarm event from an Aprisa SR+ hardware alarm input can be mapped to an hardware alarm output of another SR+ using an event action setup (see Events > Event Action Setup on page 231). Aprisa SR Alarm Input to Aprisa SR+ Alarm Output The Aprisa SR+ event action setup feature is compatible with the Aprisa SR. Since, the Aprisa SR only supports hardware alarm inputs, the Aprisa SR+ can be used as an option to provide a hardware alarm output. As shown in the figure below, an Aprisa SR+ connected on the same IP network of the Aprisa SR, alarm events from the SR hardware alarm input can be mapped to the hardware alarm output of the SR+ using an event action setup. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Implementing the Network | 47 4. Implementing the Network Network Topologies The following are examples of typical network topologies:

Point-To-Point Network Point-to-Multipoint Network Point-to-Multipoint with Repeater 1 Point-to-Multipoint with Repeater 2 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 48 | Implementing the Network Initial Network Deployment Install the Base Station To install the base station in your network:

1. Install the base station radio (see Installing the Radio on page 58). 2. Set the radio Network ID to a unique ID in your entire network (see Terminal > Device on page 88). 3. Set the radio operating mode to base station (see Terminal > Operating Mode on page 94). 4. Set the radio IP address (see IP > IP Setup > Bridge / Gateway Router Modes on page 150). 5. Set the radio frequencies to the frequencies you wish to operate from (see Radio > Radio Setup on page 103). 6. Set the radio security settings (see Security > Setup on page 183). Installing the Remote Stations To install the remote stations in your network:

1. Install the remote station radio (see Installing the Radio on page 58). 2. Set the radio Network ID to the same ID as the other stations in the network (see Terminal > Device on page 88). 3. If repeater used in radius 1, set the network radius=2 on all network stations (see Terminal > Device on page 88). 4. Set the radio operating mode to remote station (see Terminal > Operating Mode on page 94). 5. Set the radio IP address (see IP > IP Setup > Bridge / Gateway Router Modes on page 150). 6. Set the radio frequencies to the base station / repeater station frequencies you wish to operate from

(see Radio > Radio Setup on page 103). 7. Set the radio security settings to the same as the base station (see Security > Setup on page 183). The base station will automatically allocate a node address to the new remote station. Install a Repeater Station To install a repeater station in your network:

1. Install the repeater station radio (see Installing the Radio on page 58). 2. Set the radio Network ID to the same ID as the other stations in the network (see Terminal > Device on page 88). 3. Increase the radio network radius by one on all stations in the network (see Terminal > Device on page 88). 4. Set the radio operating mode to repeater station (see Terminal > Operating Mode on page 94). 5. Set the radio IP address (see IP > IP Setup > Bridge / Gateway Router Modes on page 150). 6. Set the radio frequencies to base station frequencies you wish to operate from (see Radio > Radio Setup on page 103). 7. Set the radio security settings to the same as the base station (see Security > Setup on page 183). The base station will automatically allocate a node address to the new repeater station. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Implementing the Network | 49 Network Changes Adding a Repeater Station To add a repeater station to your network:

1. Install the repeater station radio (see Installing the Radio on page 58). 2. Set the radio Network ID to the same ID as the other stations in the network (see Terminal > Device on page 88). 3. Set the radio IP address (see IP > IP Setup > Bridge / Gateway Router Modes on page 150). 4. Set the radio frequencies to the base station frequencies you wish to operate from (see Radio > Radio Setup on page 103). 5. Set the radio operating mode to repeater station (see Terminal > Operating Mode on page 94). 6. Increase the radio network radius by one on all stations in the network (see Terminal > Device on page 88). The base station will automatically allocate a node address to the new repeater station. To remove a repeater station from your network:

1. Turn the power off on the remote station radios operating from the repeater station radio you wish to remove. 2. Turn the power off on the repeater station radio you wish to remove. 3. Decrease the network radius by one on all stations in the network (see Terminal > Device on page 88). Adding a Remote Station To add a remote station to your network:

1. Install the remote station radio (see Installing the Radio on page 58). 2. Set the radio Network ID to the same ID as the other stations in the network (see Terminal > Device on page 88). 3. If repeater used in radius 1, set the network radius=2 on all network stations (see Terminal > Device on page 88). 4. Set the radio IP address (see IP > IP Setup > Bridge / Gateway Router Modes on page 150). 5. Set the radio frequencies to the base station / repeater station frequencies you wish to operate from

(see Radio > Radio Setup on page 103). 6. Set the radio operating mode to remote station (see Terminal > Operating Mode on page 94). The base station will automatically allocate a node address to the new remote station. To remove a remote station from your network:

1. Turn the power off on the remote station radio you wish to remove. This is the only action that is required. Note: The remote station will continue to show in the Network Table list. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 5. Preparation Bench Setup Before installing the links in the field, it is recommended that you bench-test the links. A suggested setup for basic bench testing is shown below:

Preparation | 51 When setting up the equipment for bench testing, note the following:

Earthing Each radio should be earthed at all times. The radio earth point should be connected to a protection earth. Attenuators In a bench setup, there should be 60 - 80 dB at up to 1 GHz of 50 ohm coaxial attenuation, capable of handling the transmit power of +37 dBm (5 W) between the radios antenna connectors. Splitter If more than two radios are required in your bench setup, a multi-way splitter is required. The diagram shows a two way splitter. This splitter should be 50 ohm coaxial up to 1 GHz and capable of handling the transmit power of +37 dBm (5 W). Cables Use double-screened coaxial cable that is suitable for use up to 1 GHz at 1 metre. CAUTION: Do not apply signals greater than +10 dBm to the antenna connection as they can damage the receiver. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 52 | Preparation Path Planning The following factors should be considered to achieve optimum path planning:

Antenna Selection and Siting Coaxial Cable Selection Linking System Plan Antenna Selection and Siting Selecting and siting antennas are important considerations in your system design. The antenna choice for the site is determined primarily by the frequency of operation and the gain required to establish reliable links. Base or Repeater Station The predominant antenna for a base station or a repeater station is an omni-directional collinear gain antenna. Omni Directional Collinear Antennas Factor Frequency Gain Explanation Often used in 380-530 MHz bands Varies with size (5 dBi to 8 dBi typical) Wind loading Minimal Tower aperture required Minimal Size Polarization Range from 2 m to 3 m length Vertical Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Remote station There are two main types of directional antenna that are commonly used for remote stations, Yagi and corner reflector antennas. Preparation | 53 Yagi Antennas Factor Frequency Gain Explanation Often used in 350-600 MHz bands Varies with size (typically 11 dBi to 16 dBi) Stackable gain increase 2 Yagi antennas (+ 2.8 dB) 4 Yagi antennas (+ 5.6 dB) Size Range from 0.6 m to 3 m in length Front to back ratio Low (typically 18 to 20 dB) It is possible to increase the gain of a Yagi antenna installation by placing two or more of them in a stack. The relative position of the antennas is critical. Example of stacked antennas Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 54 | Preparation Corner Reflector Antennas Factor Frequency Gain Size Explanation Often used in 330-960 MHz bands Typically 12 dBi Range from 0.36 m to 0.75 m in length Front to back ratio High (typically 30 dB) Beamwidth Broad (up to 60) Antenna Siting When siting antennas, consider the following points:

A site with a clear line of sight to the remote radio is recommended. Pay particular attention to trees, buildings, and other obstructions close to the antenna site. Example of a clear line-of-sight path Any large flat areas that reflect RF energy along the link path, for instance, water, could cause multipath fading. If the link path crosses a feature that is likely to cause RF reflections, shield the antenna from the reflected signals by positioning it on the far side of the roof of the equipment shelter or other structure. Example of a mid-path reflection path The antenna site should be as far as possible from other potential sources of RF interference such as electrical equipment, power lines and roads. The antenna site should be as close as possible to the equipment shelter. Wide angle and zoom photographs taken at the proposed antenna location (looking down the proposed path), can be useful when considering the best mounting positions. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Preparation | 55 Coaxial Feeder Cables To ensure maximum performance, it is recommended that you use good quality low-loss coaxial cable for all feeder runs. When selecting a coaxial cable consider the following:

Factor Attenuation Cost Effect Short cables and larger diameter cables have less attenuation Smaller diameter cables are cheaper Ease of installation Easier with smaller diameter cables or short cables For installations requiring long feeder cable runs, use the RFI AVA5 50, RFI LDF4 50A or RFI CNT-400 feeder cable or equivalent:

Part Number Part Description Specification RFI AVA5 50 Feeder Cable, 7/8", HELIAX, Low loss 7/8" foam dielectric. Standard Jacket Outer conductor corrugated copper, inner conductor copper-clad aluminum Bending radius of 250 mm min Attenuation of 2.65 dB / 100m @ 520 MHz RFI LDF4 50A Feeder cable, 1/2", HELIAX, Loss Loss 1/2" foam dielectric. Standard Jacket RFI CNT 400 Feeder, CNT-400, 10.8mm, Double Shielded Solid Polyethylene Outer conductor corrugated copper, inner conductor copper-clad aluminum Bending radius of 125 mm min Attenuation of 5.1 dB / 100m @ 520 MHz Low loss 0.4 (10.8 mm) feeder cable UV protected black Polyethylene, bonded AL tape outer conductor Bending radius of 30 mm min Attenuation of 8.8 dB / 100m @ 450 MHz For installations requiring short feeder cable runs, use the RFI 8223 feeder cable or equivalent:

Part Number Part Description Specification RFI 8223 Feeder, RG 223 5.4mm d, Double Shielded Solid Polyethylene Bending radius of 20 mm min Attenuation of 30.5 dB / 100m @ 450 MHz When running cables:

Run coaxial feeder cable from the installation to the antenna, ensuring you leave enough extra cable at each end to allow drip loops to be formed. Terminate and ground the feeder cables in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Bond the outer conductor of the coaxial feeder cables to the base of the tower mast. Linking System Plan All of the above factors combine in any proposed installation to create a Linking System Plan. The Linking System Plan predicts how well the radios will perform after it is installed. Use the outputs of the Linking System Plan during commissioning to confirm the radios have been installed correctly and that it will provide reliable service. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 56 | Preparation Site Requirements Power Supply Ensure a suitable power supply is available for powering the radio. The nominal input voltage for a radio is +13.8 VDC (negative earth) with an input voltage range of +10 to

+30 VDC. The maximum power input is 35 W. WARNING:

Before connecting power to the radio, ensure that the radio is grounded via the negative terminal of the DC power connection. Equipment Cooling If the Aprisa SR+ is operated in an environment where the ambient temperature exceeds 50C, the Aprisa SR+ convection air flow over the heat sinks must be considered. The environmental operating conditions are as follows:

Operating temperature

-40 to +70 C Storage temperature

-40 to +80 C Humidity Maximum 95% non-condensing WARNING:

If the Aprisa SR+ is operated in an environment where the ambient temperature exceeds 50C, the Aprisa SR+ must be installed within a restricted access location to prevent human contact with the enclosure heat sink. WARNING:

The Aprisa SR+ can be operated in an environment where the ambient temperature exceeds 50C. The heat sink will be a hot surface - do not touch. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Preparation | 57 Earthing and Lightning Protection WARNING:

Lightning can easily damage electronic equipment. To avoid this risk, install primary lightning protection devices on any interfaces that are reticulated in the local cable network. You should also install a coaxial surge suppressor on the radio antenna port. Feeder Earthing Earth the antenna tower, feeders and lightning protection devices in accordance with the appropriate local and national standards. The diagram below shows the minimum requirements. Use grounding kits as specified or supplied by the coaxial cable manufacturer to properly ground or bond the cable outer. Radio Earthing The Aprisa SR+ has an earth connection point on the top left and the top right of the enclosure. M4 8mm pan pozi machine screws and M4 lock washers are supplied fitted to the radio. These screws can be used to earth the enclosure to a protection earth. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 58 | Installing the Radio 6. Installing the Radio CAUTION:

You must comply with the safety precautions in this manual or on the product itself. 4RF does not assume any liability for failure to comply with these precautions. Mounting The Aprisa SR+ has four threaded holes (M4) in the enclosure base and two holes (5.2 mm) through the enclosure for mounting. Mounting options include:

DIN rail mounting with the Aprisa SR+ DIN Rail Mounting Bracket Rack shelf mounting Wall mounting Outdoor enclosure mounting WARNING:

If the Aprisa SR+ is operated in an environment where the ambient temperature exceeds 50C, the Aprisa SR+ must be installed within a restricted access location to prevent human contact with the enclosure heatsink. Required Tools No special tools are needed to install the radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Installing the Radio | 59 DIN Rail Mounting The Aprisa SR+ has an optional accessory part to enable the mounting on a standard DIN rail:

Part Number Part Description APSB-MBRK-DIN 4RF SR+ Acc, Mounting, Bracket, DIN Rail The Aprisa SR+ is mounted into the DIN rail mounting bracket using the four M4 threaded holes in the Aprisa SR+ enclosure base. Four 8 mm M4 pan pozi machine screws are supplied with the bracket. The Aprisa SR+ DIN rail mounting bracket can be mounted in four positions on a horizontal DIN rail:

Vertical Mount (vertical enclosure perpendicular to the mount) Horizontal Mount (horizontal enclosure perpendicular to the mount) Flat Vertical Mount (vertical enclosure parallel to the mount) Flat Horizontal Mount (horizontal enclosure parallel to the mount) Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 60 | Installing the Radio Rack Shelf Mounting The Aprisa SR+ can be mounted on a rack mount shelf using the four M4 threaded holes in the Aprisa SR+

enclosure base. The following picture shows Aprisa SR+ mounted on a 1 RU rack mounted shelf. Part Number Part Description APSB-MR19-X1U 4RF SR+ Acc, Mounting, 19" Rack Mount Shelf, 1U WARNING:

If the Aprisa SR+ is operated in an environment where the ambient temperature exceeds 50C, the Aprisa SR+ convection air flow over the heat sinks must be considered. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Wall Mounting The Aprisa SR+ can be mounted on a wall using the two holes through the enclosure (5.2 mm diameter). Typically, M5 screws longer than 35 mm would be used. Installing the Radio | 61 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 62 | Installing the Radio Installing the Antenna and Feeder Cable Carefully mount the antenna following the antenna manufacturers instructions. Run feeder cable from the antenna to the radio location. Lightning protection must be incorporated into the antenna system (see Earthing and Lightning Protection on page 57). WARNING:

When the link is operating, there is RF energy radiated from the antenna. Do not stand in front of the antenna while the radio is operating (see the RF Exposure Warning on page 3). Fit the appropriate male or female connector (usually N-type) to the antenna feeder at the antenna end. Carefully follow the connector manufacturers instructions. Securely attach the feeder cable to the mast and cable trays using cable ties or cable hangers. Follow the cable manufacturers recommendations about the use of feeder clips, and their recommended spacing. Connect the antenna and feeder cable. Weatherproof the connection with a boot, tape or other approved method. The Aprisa SR+ antenna connection is a TNC female connector so the feeder / jumper must be fitted with a TNC male connector. If a jumper is used between the feeder and the radio, connect a coaxial surge suppressor or similar lightning protector between the feeder and jumper cables (or at the point where the cable enters the equipment shelter). Connect the feeder cable to the antenna port on the radio. Earth the case of the lightning protector to the site Lightning Protection Earth. The Aprisa SR+ has an earth connection point on the top left and the top right of the enclosure. M4 8mm pan pozi machine screws and M4 lock washers are supplied fitted to the radio. These screws can be used to earth the enclosure to a protection earth. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Installing the Radio | 63 Connecting the Power Supply The nominal input voltage for a radio is +13.8 VDC (negative earth) with an input voltage range of +10 to

+30 VDC. The maximum power input is 35 W. The power connector required is a Molex 2 pin female screw fitting part. This connector is supplied fitted to the radio. The negative supply of the Aprisa SR+ power connection is internally connected to the Aprisa SR+

enclosure. Power must be supplied from a Negative Earthed power supply. Wire your power source to power connector and plug the connector into the radio. The connector screws can be fastened to secure the connector. Spare Molex 2 pin female power connectors can be ordered from 4RF:

Part Number Part Description APST-CML2-FEM-01 4RF SR+ Spare, Connector, Molex 2 pin, Female, 1 item Turn your power source on:

All the radio LEDs will flash orange for one second and then the OK, MODE and AUX LEDs will light green, the TX and RX LEDs will flash red. The Aprisa SR+ radio is ready to operate The TX and RX LEDs will be green (steady or flashing) when the radio is registered with the network. If the LEDs fail to light, carefully check the supply polarity. If the power supply connections have been accidentally reversed, internal fuses will have blown to protect the unit. Spare fuses are contained within the radio, see Spare Fuses on page 64 for instructions on how to locate and replace the fuses. External Power Supplies The following external power supplies are available from 4RF as accessories:

Part Number Part Description APSB-P230-030-24-TS 4RF SR+ Acc, PSU, 230 VAC, 30W, 24 VDC, -10 to +60C APSB-P230-048-24-TE 4RF SR+ Acc, PSU, 230 VAC, 48W, 24 VDC, -20 to +75C APSB-P230-060-24-TS 4RF SR+ Acc, PSU, 230 VAC, 60W, 24 VDC, -10 to +60C APSB-P48D-050-24-TA 4RF SR+ Acc, PSU, 48 VDC, 50W, 24 VDC, 0 to +50C Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 64 | Installing the Radio Spare Fuses The Aprisa SR+ PBA contains two fuses in the power input with designators F1 and F2. Both the positive and negative power connections are fused. The fuse type is a Littelfuse 0454007 with a rating of 7 A, 75 V, very fast acting. To replace the fuses:

1. Remove the input power and antenna cable. 2. Unscrew the enclosure securing screws (posi 2). 2. Separate the enclosure halves. CAUTION: Antistatic precautions must be taken as the internal components are static sensitive. 3. Access the enclosure spare fuses under the plastic cap. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 4. Replace the two fuses. Installing the Radio | 65 5. Close the enclosure and tighten the screws. Note: Is it critical that the screws are re-tightened to 1.2 Nm. The transmitter adjacent channel performance can be degraded if the screws are not tightened correctly. Additional Spare Fuses Additional spare fuses can be ordered from 4RF:

Part Number Part Description APST-FNAN-454-07-02 4RF SR+ Spare, Fuse, Nano SMF, 454 Series, 7A, 2 items Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 67 7. Managing the Radio SuperVisor The Aprisa SR+ contains an embedded web server application (SuperVisor) to enable element management with any major web browser (such as Mozilla Firefox or Microsoft Internet Explorer). SuperVisor enables operators to configure and manage the Aprisa SR+ base station radio and repeater /

remote station radios over the radio link. The key features of SuperVisor are:

Full element management, configuration and diagnostics Manage the entire network from the Base Station (remote management of elements) Managed network software distribution and upgrades Performance and alarm monitoring of the entire network, including RSSI, alarm states, time-

stamped events, etc. View and set standard radio configuration parameters including frequencies, transmit power, channel access, serial, Ethernet port settings Set and view security parameters User management Operates over a secure HTTPS session on the access connection to the base station Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 68 | Managing the Radio PC Requirements for SuperVisor SuperVisor requires the following minimum PC requirements:

Browser Operating System Processor RAM Internet Explorer 7

(oldest browser supported) MS-Windows XP Service Pack 2 1 GHz processor 1 GB Ram IE7 can operate with less but will be very slow. Internet Explorer 9 Does not support config file upload from PC MS-Windows Vista Service Pack 2 1 GHz processor 2 GB Ram Internet Explorer 10 MS-Windows 7 1 GHz processor 2 GB Ram

(recommended minimum browser) Service Pack 1 Internet Explorer 11 MS-Windows 8.1 1 GHz processor Mozilla Firefox (MS-Windows) MS-Windows XP Service Pack 2 Mozilla Firefox (Linux) Gnome desktop 2.18 and above Mozilla Firefox (Apple Mac) Mac OS X 10.6

(4RF does not support retina displays) 1 GHz processor, Pentium 4 and above 1 GHz processor, Pentium 4 and above 1 GHz processor, Pentium 4 and above 2 GB Ram 1 GB Ram 1 GB Ram 1 GB Ram Note: 4RF does not support Google Chrome, Opera browser or Apple Safari but when they have been used they have worked correctly. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 69 Connecting to SuperVisor The predominant management connection to the Aprisa SR+ radio is with an Ethernet interface using standard IP networking. There should be only one Ethernet connection from the base station to the management network. The Aprisa SR+ has a factory default IP address of 169.254.50.10 with a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0. This is an IPv4 Link Local (RFC3927) address which simplifies the connection to a PC. Each radio in the network must be set up with a unique IP address on the same subnet. The Aprisa SR+ Protected Station radio A (left radio) has a factory default IP address of 169.254.50.10 and radio B (right radio) has a factory default IP address of 169.254.50.20, both with a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0. To change the Aprisa SR+ IP address:

1. Set up your PC for a compatible IP address e.g. 169.254.50.1 with a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0. 2. Connect your PC network port to one of the Aprisa SR+ Ethernet ports. 3. Open a browser and enter https://169.254.50.10. 4. Login to the radio with the default Username admin and Password admin. 5. Change the IP address to conform to the network plan in use. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 70 | Managing the Radio Management PC Connection The active management PC must only have one connection to the network as shown by path . There should not be any alternate path that the active management PC can use via an alternate router or alternate LAN that would allow the management traffic to be looped as shown by path . When logging into a network, it is important to understand the relationship between the Local Radio and the Remote Radios. The Local Radio is the radio that your IP network is physically connected to. If the Local Radio is a base station, SuperVisor manages the base station and all the repeater stations and remote stations in the network. If the Local Radio is a remote station or repeater station, SuperVisor only manages the remote / repeater station radio logged into. If the user is at the remote station and connects SuperVisor directly to the remote radio via their computer, all relevant features are still available. This includes the ability to monitor the Last received packet RSSI. If ICMP is enabled on the base station, the user will also be able to ping the base station to confirm the connectivity. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 71 PC Settings for SuperVisor To change the PC IP address:

If your PC has previously been used for other applications, you may need to change the IP address and the subnet mask settings. You will require Administrator rights on your PC to change these. Windows XP example:

1. Open the Control Panel. 2. Open Network Connections and right click on the Local Area Connection and select Properties. 3. Click on the General tab. 4. Click on Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on properties. 5. Enter the IP address and the subnet mask (example as shown). 6. Click OK then close the Control Panel. If the radio is on a different subnet from the network the PC is on, set the PC default gateway address to the network gateway address which is the address of the router used to connect the subnets (for details, consult your network administrator). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 72 | Managing the Radio To change the PC connection type:

If your PC has previously been used with Dial-up connections, you may need to change your PC Internet Connection setting to Never dial a connection. Windows Internet Explorer 8 example:

1. Open Internet Explorer. 2. Open the menu item Tools > Internet Options and click on the Connections tab. 3. Click the Never dial a connection option. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 73 To change the PC pop-up status:

Some functions within SuperVisor require Pop-ups enabled e.g. saving a MIB Windows Internet Explorer 8 example:

1. Open Internet Explorer. 2. Open the menu item Tools > Internet Options and click on the Privacy tab. 3. Click on Pop-up Blocker Settings. 4. Set the Address of Web site to allow to the radio address or set the Blocking Level to Low: Allow Pop-ups from secure sites and close the window. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 74 | Managing the Radio To enable JavaScript in the web browser:

Some functions within SuperVisor require JavaScript in the web browser to be enabled. Windows Internet Explorer 8 example:

1. Open Internet Explorer. 2. Open the menu item Tools > Internet Options and click on the Security tab. 3. Click on Local Intranet. 4. Click on Custom Level. 5. Scroll down until you see section labeled Scripting. 6. Under Active Scripting, select Enable. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 75 Login to SuperVisor The maximum number of concurrent users that can be logged into a radio is 6. If SuperVisor is inactive for a period defined by the Inactivity Timeout option (see Maintenance > General on page 208), the radio will automatically logout the user. To login to SuperVisor:

1. Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the radio. If you havent assigned an IP address to the radio, use the factory default IP address of 169.254.50.10 with a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0. If you dont know the IP address of the radio, you can determine it using the Command Line Interface (see Command Line Interface on page 322). Note: The Aprisa SR+ has a randomly generated unique self-signed ECC256 security certificate which may cause the browser to prompt a certificate warning. It is safe to ignore the warning and continue. The valid certificate is Issued By: 4RF-APRISA which can be viewed in the browser. 2. Login with the Username and Password assigned to you. If unique usernames and passwords have not yet been configured, use the default username admin and password admin. Important: After you login for the very first time, it is recommended that you change the default admin password for security reasons (see Changing Passwords on page 192). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 76 | Managing the Radio If the login is successful, the opening page will be displayed. If there is more than one user logged into the same radio, the Multiple Management Sessions popup will show the usernames and IP addresses of the users. This popup message will display until 5 seconds after the cursor is moved. The event log will also record the users logged into the radio or logged out the radio. Logout of SuperVisor As the maximum number of concurrent users that can be logged into a radio is 6, not logging out correctly can restrict access to the radio until after the timeout period (30 minutes). Logging out from a radio will logout all users logged in with the same username. If the SuperVisor window is closed without logging out, the radio will automatically log the user out after a timeout period of 3 minutes. To logout of SuperVisor:

Click on the Logout button on the Summary Bar. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO SuperVisor Page Layout Standard Radio The following shows the components of the SuperVisor page layout for a standard radio:

Managing the Radio | 77 SuperVisor Branding Bar The branding bar at the top of the SuperVisor frame shows the branding of SuperVisor on the left and the product branding on the right. SuperVisor Alarm Bar The alarm bar shows the name of the radio terminal that SuperVisor is logged into (the local radio) on the left. If the local radio is a base station, the page shows the name of the current remote / repeater station (the remote radio) on the right. SuperVisor will manage all the repeater stations and remote stations in the network. If the local radio is a remote station or repeater station, the page shows the name of the remote /

repeater station on the left. The right side of the Alarm Bar will be blank. SuperVisor manages only the remote / repeater station logged into. The LED alarm indicators reflect the status of the front panel LEDs on the radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 78 | Managing the Radio SuperVisor Summary Bar The summary bar at the bottom of the page shows:

Position Left Middle Right Function Busy - SuperVisor is busy retrieving data from the radio that SuperVisor is logged into. Ready - SuperVisor is ready to manage the radio. Displays the name of the radio terminal that SuperVisor is currently managing. The access level logged into SuperVisor. This label also doubles as the SuperVisor logout button. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO SuperVisor Menu The following is a list of SuperVisor top level menu items:

Managing the Radio | 79 Local Terminal Network Terminal Radio Serial Ethernet IP QoS Security Maintenance Events Software Monitoring Network Table Summary Exceptions View SuperVisor Parameter Settings Changes to parameters settings have no effect until the Save button is clicked. Click the Save button to apply the changes or Cancel button to restore the current value. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 80 | Managing the Radio SuperVisor Menu Access The SuperVisor menu has varying access levels dependent on the login User Privileges. The following is a list of all possible SuperVisor menu items versus user privileges:

Terminal Settings Menu Items Menu Item View Technician Engineer Admin Terminal > Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Terminal > Details Terminal > Device Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Terminal > Date / Time Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Terminal > Operating Mode No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Terminal > Sleep Mode No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Radio > Radio Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Radio > Channel Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Radio > Radio Setup No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Radio > Channel Setup No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Radio > Advanced Setup No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Serial > Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Serial > Port Setup No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Ethernet > Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Ethernet > Port Setup No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Ethernet > L2 Filtering No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Ethernet > VLAN IP > IP Summary No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only IP > Terminal Server Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only IP > IP Setup No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write IP > Terminal Server Setup No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write IP > L3 Filtering IP > IP Routes QoS > Summary No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only QoS > Traffic Priority No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write QoS > Traffic Classification No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Security > Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Security > Setup Security > Users Security > RADIUS Security > SNMP No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write No Access No Access No Access Read-Write No Access No Access No Access Read-Write No Access No Access No Access Read-Write Security > Manager No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Security > Distribution No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Maintenance > Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Maintenance > General No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Maintenance > Test Mode No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 81 Menu Item View Technician Engineer Admin Maintenance > Defaults No Access No Access No Access Read-Write Maintenance > Protection No Access Read-Write Read-Write Read-Write Maintenance > Licence No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Maintenance > SCADA No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Maintenance > MMS No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Maintenance > Advanced No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Events > Alarm Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Events > Event History Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Events > Event Primary History Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Events > Event Secondary History Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Events > Events Setup No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Events > Traps Setup No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Events > Alarm I/O Setup Read-Only Read-Only Read-Write Read-Write Events > Event Action Setup No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Events > Defaults No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Software > Summary Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Software > Setup No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Software > File Transfer No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Software > File Primary Transfer No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Software > File Secondary Transfer No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Software > Manager No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Software > Remote Distribution No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Software > Remote Activation No Access No Access Read-Write Read-Write Monitoring > Terminal Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Monitoring > Serial Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Monitoring > Ethernet Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Monitoring > Radio Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Monitoring > User Selected Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Monitoring > TCP Connections Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Monitoring > Routing Table Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Monitoring > Address Tables Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Monitoring > SCADA Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Network Settings Menu Items Menu Item Network Table Summary Exceptions View View Technician Engineer Admin Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Read-Only Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 82 | Managing the Radio SuperVisor Menu Items As SuperVisor screens are dependent on the Aprisa SR+ configuration deployed, the following section is split into two sections:

Standard Radio Protected Station All SuperVisor menu item descriptions assume full access Admin user privileges:

Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Standard Radio Terminal Terminal > Summary Managing the Radio | 83 TERMINAL SUMMARY This page displays the current settings for the Terminal parameters. See Terminal > Details on page 86, Terminal > Device on page 88 and Terminal > Operating Mode on page 94 for setting details. OPERATING SUMMARY Operating Mode This parameter displays the current Operating Mode i.e. if the radio is operating as a base station, repeater station or remote station and the network operating mode of Bridge Mode or Router Mode. Interface Mode This parameter displays the Interfaces available for traffic on the radio such as Ethernet and Serial. For Ethernet availability on the radio see Maintenance > Licence on page 216. Modem Mode This parameter displays the modem mode selected e.g. ETSI / FCC etc. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 84 | Managing the Radio TX Frequency (MHz) This parameter displays the current Transmit Frequency in MHz. TX Power (dBm) This parameter displays the current Transmit Power in dBm. RX Frequency (MHz) This parameter displays the current Receive Frequency in MHz. Channel Size (kHz) This parameter displays the current Channel Size in kHz. Network ID This parameter is the network ID of this base station node and its remote / repeater stations in the network. The entry is four hex chars (not case sensitive). Base Station ID This parameter identifies the base station. All radios operating to the base station in the same network must use the same Base Station ID setting. It is especially important to set different values for each network when two or more networks using the same frequencies are operating with some overlapping coverage. The entry is an integer from 1 to 8. Node Address The Node Address of the base station is 0000. If the Node Address shown is FFFE, this radio is a remote station or repeater station but has not been registered with the base station. The base station will automatically allocate a Node Address to all its registered repeater station and remote station radios. This address can be between 000B to 01FE. Network Radius This parameter displays the maximum number of hops in this network. Network Repeaters Proximity This parameter displays the proximity of repeaters in the network. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 85 Repeater Network Segment ID This parameter identifies a repeater network segment and its associated remotes. In an overlapping coverage network where remote radios can see multiple repeaters, its especially important to set different values for each repeater network segment and its associated remotes, so the associated remotes will communicate only with the appropriate repeater. The same setting applies in remote overlapping coverage between a base and a repeater. Different values per base and repeater are required if the requirements are that the remote will be communicating via the repeater and not directly with the base station (or vice-versa), i.e. the repeater and remotes will have the same value but different from the base station value. In this case, if the repeater fails, the remote will re-

register to the base station even though they are on different values until the repeater recovers. The entry is an integer from 0 and 31, where 0 is reserved for broadcast i.e. all radios will see this radio traffic even if they are set to different values. Inband Management This parameter displays the status of the Inband Management option. Inband Management Timeout (sec) This parameter displays the number of seconds that the base station waits for a response from a Remote or repeater station before aborting the Inband Management request. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 86 | Managing the Radio Terminal > Details MANUFACTURING DETAILS Radio Serial Number This parameter displays the Serial Number of the radio (shown on the enclosure label). Sub-Assembly Serial Number This parameter displays the Serial Number of the printed circuit board assembly (shown on the PCB label). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 87 HW Frequency Band This parameter displays the hardware radio frequency operating range. HW Type This parameter displays the hardware board assembly type. Radio MAC Address This parameter displays the MAC address of the radio (the management Ethernet MAC address). Active Software Version This parameter displays the version of the software currently operating the radio. Previous Software Version This parameter displays the software version that was running on the radio prior to the current software being activated. A new radio from the factory will display None for the Previous SW Version. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 88 | Managing the Radio Terminal > Device TERMINAL DETAILS The data entry in the next four fields can be up to 40 characters but cannot contain invalid characters. A popup warns of the invalid characters:

1. Enter the Terminal Name. 2. Enter the Location of the radio. 3. Enter a Contact Name. The default value is 4RF Limited. 4. Enter the Contact Details. The default value is support@4RF.com. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 89 RF NETWORK DETAILS Network ID This parameter sets the network ID of this base station node and its remote / repeater stations in the network. The entry is four hexadecimal chars (not case sensitive). The default setting is CAFE. Base Station ID This parameter identifies the base station. All radios operating to the base station in the same network must use the same Base Station ID setting. It is especially important to set different values for each network when two or more networks using the same frequencies are operating with some overlapping coverage. The entry is an integer from 1 to 8. Network Radius This parameter sets the maximum number of hops in this network e.g. in a network with base station, repeater and remotes communicating via the repeater, the Network Radius should be set to 2. If the Network Radius is set to 2, a message from that node will only pass 2 hops before it is blocked. The default setting is 1. When base station is configured as a Base-Repeater (used for remote peer to peer operation via the base station), the use of Network Radius does not change and works the same as if it were a Base Station i.e. the Network Radius is always the number of hops from the base station to the most distant remote in the network. All stations in the network should be set to the same value. Network Repeaters Proximity This parameter is set in base stations, remote stations and repeater stations to indicate the proximity of repeaters in the network when the Network Radius is set to greater than 1. Option Function No Repeater Use when there is no repeater in the network. Single Repeater Only Use when there is only one repeater in the network. Overlapping Coverage Separated Coverage Use for multiple one hop repeaters where the remote station can see more than one repeater or repeaters can see each other. The communication protocol is slower because each repeater is addressed individually and in-turn. Use for multiple one hop repeaters where the remote station can only see one repeater and the repeaters cant see each other. This option provides better network downlink performance than the Overlapping Coverage option. However, if the repeaters can see each other, the resultant collisions will cause corruptions and dramatically reduce network downlink performance. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 90 | Managing the Radio This parameter is set in remote stations to indicate the proximity of repeaters in the network when the Network Radius is set to 1. Option Function No Repeater Use when there are no repeaters in the network. Base Repeater Use when there is a base-repeater in the network. The Network Repeaters Proximity options are dependent on the Terminal Operating Mode and the Terminal Network Radius settings:

Operating Mode Network Radius Network Repeaters Proximity Options Default Base Base Remote Remote Repeater Repeater Base Repeater Base Repeater 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 No Repeater Single Repeater Only, Overlapping Coverage, Separated Coverage No Repeater Single Repeater Only No Repeater, Base Repeater No Repeater Single Repeater Only, Overlapping Coverage, Separated Coverage Single Repeater Only No Repeater, Base Repeater No Repeater Single Repeater Only, Overlapping Coverage, Separated Coverage Single Repeater Only Base Repeater Single Repeater Only, Overlapping Coverage, Separated Coverage Base Repeater Single Repeater Only Repeater Network Segment ID This parameter identifies a repeater network segment and its associated remotes. In an overlapping coverage network where remote radios can see multiple repeaters, its especially important to set different values for each repeater network segment and its associated remotes, so the associated remotes will communicate only with the appropriate repeater. The same setting applies in remote overlapping coverage between a base and a repeater. Different values per base and repeater are required if the requirements are that the remote will be communicating via the repeater and not directly with the base station (or vice-versa), i.e. the repeater and remotes will have the same value but different from the base station value. In this case, if the repeater fails, the remote will re-

register to the base station even though they are on different values until the repeater recovers. The entry is an integer from 0 and 31, where 0 is reserved for broadcast i.e. all radios will see this radio traffic even if they are set to different values. Inband Management This parameter sets the Inband Management option. If the Inband Management option is enabled, SuperVisor operating on a base station can also manage all the remote / repeater stations in the network. Inband Management Timeout (sec) This parameter sets the Inband Management timeout period. This determines the time the base station waits for a response from a remote or repeater station before aborting the Inband Management request. The default setting is 10 seconds. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 91 REGION SETTINGS Time Format This parameter sets the time format for all time based results. The default setting is 24 Hours. Date Format This parameter sets the date format for date based results. The default setting is DD/MM/YYYY. Measurement System This parameter sets the unit type for parameters like temperature readings. The default setting is Metric. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 92 | Managing the Radio Terminal > Date / Time TERMINAL DATE AND TIME Sets the Time and Date. This information is controlled from a software clock. Date and Time Synchronization This Date and Time Synchronization feature allows a radio to synchronize its date and time from an SNTP server. It would predominantly be used on the base station but could be used on a remote station. Using the SNTP feature will ensure that all radios in the network has the same date and time required for accurate network diagnostics. For high availability time/date synchronization, SNTP can be synchronized from two SNTP servers for server backup. The default setting is Disabled. Option Disabled SNTP Function No SNTP Date and Time Synchronization Date and Time will be synchronized to a SNTP server The base station periodically sends a broadcast message to the remote stations to synchronize the radio date and time. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 93 Auto Synchronization Period (s) This parameter sets the number of seconds between the end of the last synchronization and the next synchronization attempt. The minimum period is 60 seconds. A period of 0 seconds will disable synchronization attempts. Time Server 1 Address This parameter sets the IP address of the first priority SNTP server. If the synchronization is successful to this server, Time Server 2 Address will not be used. Time Server 2 Address This parameter sets the IP address of the second priority SNTP server. If the synchronization fails using the SNTP server on Time Server 1 Address, synchronization will be attempted to the SNTP server on this address. Synchronization Status This field shows the status of the current synchronization or the result of the last synchronization. Synchronize Now This Synchronize Now button provides manual Synchronization. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 94 | Managing the Radio Terminal > Operating Mode OPERATING MODES Terminal Operating Mode The Terminal Operating Mode can be set to Base, Base Repeater, Repeater, Remote or Point-To-Point station. The default setting is Remote. Option Base Base Repeater Base MMS Repeater Remote Point To Point Function The base station manages all traffic activity between itself, repeaters and remotes. It is the center-point of network where in most cases will be connected to a SCADA master. The base-repeater has the same function as the base station (and repeater station), but used when peer to peer connections between remotes is required via the base station. The Base-MMS has the same function as the base station, but used when Migration Master Station operation is required (see Aprisa SR+

MMS User Manual). The repeater forwards packets coming from base station and other repeaters e.g. in daisy chain LBS mode and /or remote stations. The remote in most cases is used as the end-point of the SCADA network connected to an RTU or PLC device for SCADA network control and monitoring. Configures a full duplex radio for Point-To-Point (PTP) operation. Changing from PMP or PTP or vice versa requires the radio to be restored to factory default settings which will clear all previous radio setup and configuration. See Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PTP for all Point-To-Point setup and configuration. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO When the Terminal Operating Mode is changed from PMP to PTP or vice versa, the following popup will warn of the restore to factory default settings. Managing the Radio | 95 SR Compatible The SR Compatible option enables over-theair point-to-multipoint interoperation between an Aprisa SR+

network and New Aprisa SR radios. The default setting is unticked. When the Aprisa SR+ SR Compatible option is activated, the Aprisa SR+ locks its modulation to QPSK (as per the New Aprisa SR modulation) and disables functionality which is not available in New Aprisa SR for full compatibility / interoperability operation. This compatibility option allows the user a smooth migration to Aprisa SR+ when higher speeds of 120, 60 kbit/s (at 25, 12.5 kHz channel sizes), Adaptive Coding and Modulation, full duplex and more features are required. Note: Any mix between the New Aprisa SR and Aprisa SR+ in the network will force the whole network to work in SR Compatible mode. Ethernet Operating Mode The Ethernet Operating Mode defines how Ethernet / IP traffic is processed in the radio. The default setting is Bridge. Option Bridge Gateway Router Router RF Operating Mode Function Bridge mode inspects each incoming Ethernet frame source and destination MAC addresses to determine if the frame is forwarded over the radio link or discarded. Gateway Router mode inspects each incoming IP source and destination IP addresses to determine if the packet is forwarded over the radio link or discarded. In this mode, all Ethernet interfaces have the same IP address and subnet. Router mode inspects each incoming IP source and destination IP addresses to determine if the packet is forwarded over the radio link or discarded. In this mode, each Ethernet interface has a different IP address and subnet. The RF Operating Mode defines the operation of the RF over-the-air. The default setting is Standard. Option Standard Disabled Function The radio operates normally. Disables all RF over-the-air communications from the RF port and turns of the transmitter and receiver to save power. This enables a radio to be used as a Terminal Server without RF. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 96 | Managing the Radio TERMINAL PROTECTION Protection Type The Protection Type defines if a radio is a stand-alone radio or part of an Aprisa SR+ Protected Station. The default setting is None. Option None Redundant

(Protected Station) Monitored Hot Standby

(Protected Station) Function The SR+ radio is stand-alone radio (not part of an Aprisa SR+

Protected Station). Set to make this SR+ radio part of an Aprisa SR+ Protected Station. The RF ports and interface ports from two standard Aprisa SR+

radios are switched to the standby radio if there is a failure in the active radio Set to make this SR+ radio part of an Aprisa SR+ Protected Station. The RF ports and interface ports from two standard Aprisa SR+

radios are switched to the standby radio if there is a failure in the active radio. The standby radio is monitored to ensure its correct operation should a switch-over be required. See Monitored Alarms on page 333 for the list of monitored alarms. Serial Data Driven Switching Set to make this SR+ radio part of an Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station. Protection Unit The Protection Unit defines if this radio is the primary radio or secondary radio in a Protected Station. One radio in the Protected Station is set to Primary and the other radio to Secondary. It is recommended that radio A (the left radio) be configured as the Primary and that radio B (the right radio) be configured as the Secondary. The default setting is Primary. This menu item is only applicable if this radio is to become part of an Aprisa SR+ Protected Station. PROTECTION MANAGEMENT IP ADDRESS Local IP Address The Local IP Address shows the IP address of this radio. Partner IP Address The Partner IP Address parameter is used to set the partner IP address if this radio is to become part of a Protected Station. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Terminal > Sleep Mode Managing the Radio | 97 SLEEP MODE SETTINGS Sleep mode allows the radio to be put to sleep where it consumes very little power (< 0.5 watts with all Ethernet ports disabled) but allows rapid wake up. The sleep and wake up is controlled from the serial port DTR inputs or the Alarm Input 1. If sleep mode is enabled for serial port DTR trigger and the customer serial interface is not connected, the radio will sleep. When radio is in sleep mode, the OK LED pulses once per second at a colour depending on the current state of the OK LED before sleep mode was entered and the other LEDs will be OFF. Sleep mode will be disabled and sleeping radio will be woken up while a management user is logged into the radio or when a USB CLI cable is inserted in the management port. Sleep mode will be disabled and sleeping radio will be woken up when an Ethernet cable is inserted into an enabled Ethernet port configured for management and user data, however 60 seconds after insertion, the radio will be allowed to enter sleep unless the user has logged into SuperVisor. Pressing the radio test button will also wake up a sleeping radio for 5 minutes. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 98 | Managing the Radio Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode parameter sets how sleep mode is controlled. The default setting is Automatic. Option Automatic Function If this radio is a remote, it uses the setting from the base station. If this radio is the base station, the external triggers control the radio sleep mode state. Standard The external triggers control the radio sleep mode state. ABB Totalflow The external trigger wakes up the radio for up to the maximum duration set in the Awake Duration or indefinitely if data is sent to the RTU. Awake Duration for ABB Totalflow The Awake Duration sets the radio awake duration when there is no data being sent to the RTU. Triggers The triggers when enabled cause the radio to sleep or wake up. For the radio to sleep, all the enabled triggers must be OFF i.e. if only one enabled trigger goes ON, the radio will wake up. Serial Port 1 / 2 DTR Trigger The Serial Port 1 / 2 DTR Trigger controls the radio sleep and wake up. The default setting is Disabled. Option Disabled Function The Serial Port DTR has no effect on sleep mode. Active Low (sleep when input is low) The Serial Port DTR ON state causes the radio to wake up and the DTR OFF state allows the radio to sleep. Note: There must be valid RS-232 signals on either the RTS or RX lines for the radio to go to sleep (when DTR is ON). The RS-232 specification defines valid control states as:

ON state or 0-state (SPACE) condition = +3 to +12 volts OFF state or 1-state (MARK) condition = -3 to -12 volts Alarm Input 1 Trigger The Alarm Input 1 Trigger controls the radio sleep and wake up. The default setting is Disabled. Option Disabled Function The Alarm Input 1 has no effect on sleep mode. Active Low(sleep when input is low) The Alarm Input 1 high (ON) state causes the radio to wake up and the low (OFF) state allows the radio to sleep (see Alarm Inputs on page 396 for alarm input specification). Note: If the alarm input is disconnected (e.g. alarm cable unplugged), the radio will go to sleep. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 99 Wake Up Transmit Delay (ms) The Wake Up Transmit Delay (ms) sets the maximum time to check if the channel is clear before the radio attempts to transmit. The transmitter will wait for either;

a packet to be received from the base station or the expiry of the Wake Up Transmit Delay The default setting is Ticked (Automatic) which automatically calculates the best case for this delay for the current radio settings. This value will be between 0.4 second and 2 seconds depending on channel size and compliance mode. The following are the default Wake Up Transmit delays;

Channel Size Wake Up Transmit Delay

(seconds) 12.5 kHz 20 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 1.6 1.1 0.8 0.41 Maximum Power Savings If the Ethernet ports are not required for customer traffic, maximum power savings can be achieved by disabling them. This will however prevent SuperVisor management with Ethernet. The Ethernet ports can only be restored using SNMP or the CLI. To enable Ethernet ports from the CLI:

1. Plug the USB CLI cable from your PC into the management port (MGMT). This will wake a radio that is sleeping. 2. Login to the CLI. The default login is Login: admin Password: admin 3. At the CLI prompt >> type cd APRISASR-MIB-4RF enter 4. At the CLI prompt >> type set ethPort1Enabled 1 enter (for port 1) Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 100 | Managing the Radio RECEIVE IDLE SETTINGS Radio power consumption in idle mode is lowered by turning off the receiver when remote radios know that packet reception is not possible. This feature only works with the Access Request MAC as the Listen Before Send MAC cannot know that packet reception is not possible. The base station receiver never goes into idle mode and is always on. When a remote radios receiver is in idle mode, the base station must send a series of idle exit packets before it can send a data packet or allow a remote to send a data packet. This is to ensure that all remotes can receive the data packet. Power Optimization Level The Power Optimization Level sets the remote radio receiver on/off ratio. The longer the receiver is off for, the less the idle power consumption but the higher the initial packet latency. The shorter the receiver is off for, the more the idle power consumption but the lower the initial packet latency. All radios in an Aprisa SR+ network must use the same Power Optimization Level setting. The default setting is 5. Inactivity Period Before Idle (ms) The Inactivity Period Before Idle (ms) sets the delay remote radios configured for Access Request MAC will wait before entering a power saving idle state. All radios in an Aprisa SR+ network must use the same Inactivity Period Before Idle setting. The default setting is 4000 ms. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Radio Radio > Radio Summary This page displays the current settings for the Radio parameters. Managing the Radio | 101 See Radio > Radio Setup and Radio > Channel Setup for setting details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 102 | Managing the Radio Radio > Channel Summary This page displays the current settings for the Channel parameters. See Radio > Channel Setup for setting details. DATA COMPRESSION IP Header Compression Ratio See IP Header Compression Ratio on page 119. Payload Compression Ratio The payload is compressed using level 3 QuickLZ data compression. Payload Compression is automatic and cannot be turned off by SuperVisor. Compression is not attempted on data that is already compressed e.g. jpg files. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Radio > Radio Setup Transmit frequency, transmit power and channel size would normally be defined by a local regulatory body and licensed to a particular user. Refer to your site license details when setting these fields. Managing the Radio | 103 TRANSMITTER / RECEIVER Important:

1. Changing the remote / repeater station frequencies will disable all management communication to the remote / repeater stations but then by changing the base station to match the remote / repeater stations, the radio links will be restored as will the management communication. 2. Enter the TX frequency and the RX frequency and then click Save. This is to prevent remote management communication from being lost before both frequencies have been changed in the remote stations. TX and RX Frequencies. The TX and RX frequencies entered must be within the frequency tuning range of the product frequency band (see Frequency Bands on page 375). If the frequency entered is not resolvable to the synthesizer step size for the frequency band it is rejected. For example; a 400 MHz radio has a synthesizer step size of 6.250 kHz. The TX and RX frequencies can be single frequency half duplex or dual frequency half duplex. Dual frequency half duplex is often used for reasons of:

Channel Planning Network Efficiencies Regulatory rules Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 104 | Managing the Radio Single Frequency Operation The TX and RX frequencies of the base station, repeater station and all the remote stations are on the same frequency. To change the TX and RX frequencies:

1. Change the TX and RX frequencies of the remote stations operating from the repeater station to the new frequency. The radio links to these remote stations will fail. 2. Change the TX and RX frequencies of the repeater station operating from the base station to the new frequency. The radio links to the repeater station and its remote stations will fail. 3. Change the TX and RX frequencies of the remote stations operating from the base station to the new frequency. The radio links to these remote stations will fail. 4. Change the TX and RX frequencies of the base station to the new frequency. The radio links to all stations will restore. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Dual Frequency No Repeater The TX frequency of all the remote stations matches the RX frequency of the base station. The RX frequency of all the remote stations matches the TX frequency of the base station. Managing the Radio | 105 To change the TX and RX frequencies:

1. For all the remote stations, change the RX frequency to frequency A and the TX frequency to frequency B. The radio links to the remote stations will fail. 2. For the base station, change the TX frequency to frequency A and the RX frequency to frequency B. The radio links to the remote stations will restore. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 106 | Managing the Radio Dual Frequency with Repeater The TX frequency of the remote stations associated with the base station matches the RX frequency of the base station. The TX frequency of the repeater station associated with the base station matches the RX frequency of the base station. The TX frequency of the remote stations associated with the repeater station matches the RX frequency of the repeater station. The RX frequency of the remote stations associated with the base station matches the TX frequency of the base station. The RX frequency of the repeater station associated with the base station matches the TX frequency of the base station. The RX frequency of the remote stations associated with the repeater station matches the TX frequency of the repeater station. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 107 To change the TX and RX frequencies:

1. For all the remote stations operating from the repeater station, change the RX frequency to frequency A and the TX frequency to frequency B. The radio links to these remote stations will fail. 2. For the repeater station, change the TX frequency to frequency A and the RX frequency to frequency B. The remote stations operating from the repeater station, will now establish a connection to the repeater. 3. For all the remote stations operating from the base station, change the TX frequency to frequency A and the RX frequency to frequency B. The radio links to these remote stations will fail. 4. For the base station, change the RX frequency to frequency A and the TX frequency to frequency B. The radio links to the remote stations operating from the repeater station or the base station will restore. TX Power The transmitter power is the power measured at the antenna output port when transmitting. The transmitter power has a direct impact on the radio power consumption. The default setting is +37 dBm. If TX Power setting is higher than the high limit or lower than the low limit for the current modulation, an Informational Event (55 Terminal Unit Information) will be raised to notify the user that transmit power has been changed. This only applies to fixed modulation (not ACM). Note: The Aprisa SR+ transmitter contains power amplifier protection which allows the antenna to be disconnected from the antenna port without product damage. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 108 | Managing the Radio GENERAL Channel Size (kHz) This parameter sets the Channel Size for the radio (see Channel Sizes on page 376 for Radio Capacities). The default setting is 12.5 kHz. Antenna Port Configuration This parameter sets the Antenna Port Configuration for the radio. Option Function Single Antenna Single Port Select Single Antenna Single Port if using one or two frequency half duplex transmission. The antenna is connected to the ANT port. Single Antenna Dual Port (duplexer) Select Single Antenna Dual Port if using:

(1) One or two frequency in half duplex transmission with an external duplexer (for filtering) connected to the ANT/TX and RX antenna ports and single antenna connected to the duplexer.

(2) Two frequency in full duplex transmission with an external duplexer (for full duplex operation) connected to the ANT/TX and RX antenna ports and single antenna connected to the duplexer.

(3) Single frequency in half duplex transmission with external dual antennas, connected to the ANT/TX and RX antenna ports.

(4) Two frequency in half or full duplex transmission with external dual antennas, connected to the ANT/TX and RX antenna ports. The default setting is Single Antenna Single Port. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 109 MODEM The Radio > Radio Setup screen Modem section is different for a base / repeater / base-repeater station and a remote station. Modem Mode This parameter sets the Modem Mode in the radio. The Modem Mode option list is dependent on the radio Hardware Variant. HW Variant Option Channel Sizes 135 MHz Mode A (FCC / IC) 15 and 30 kHz 220 MHz 320 MHz 400 MHz Mode B (ETSI / ACMA) 12.5 and 25 kHz Mode A (FCC / IC) 12.5, 15, 25 and 50 kHz Mode A (ETSI / ACMA) 12.5, 20, 25 and 50 kHz Mode A (ETSI / ACMA) 12.5, 20, 25 and 50 kHz Mode B (FCC / IC) 12.5, 25 and 50 kHz 450 MHz Mode A (ETSI / ACMA) 12.5, 25 and 50 kHz 700 MHz 896 MHz Mode B (FCC) Mode A (FCC) 12.5 and 25 kHz 25, 50 and 75 kHz Mode A (FCC / IC) 12.5, 25 and 50 kHz Mode B (FCC Part 24) 12.5, 25 and 50 kHz Mode C (IC RSS-134) 12.5, 25 and 50 kHz 928 MHz Mode A (FCC) 12.5, 25 and 50 kHz Mode B (IC) 12.5, 25 and 50 kHz Mode C (FCC Part 24) 12.5, 25 and 50 kHz Mode D (IC RSS-134) 12.5, 25 and 50 kHz Enhanced Noise Rejection Mode This parameter enables / disables the Enhanced Noise Rejection Mode in the radio. This feature improves co-channel interference performance at strong receiver signal levels. All radios in an Aprisa SR+ network must use the same setting i.e. enabled or disabled. The default setting is Disabled. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 110 | Managing the Radio Modulation Type The base to remote / repeater or repeater to remote / base direction of transmission is always fixed i.e. not adaptive. This parameter sets the fixed TX Modulation Type for the base / base-repeater / repeater radio. Option Function QPSK (High Gain) Sets the modulation to QPSK with Max Coded FEC. QPSK (Low Gain) Sets the modulation to QPSK with Min Coded FEC. QPSK Sets the modulation to QPSK with no FEC. 16QAM (High Gain) Sets the modulation to 16 QAM with Max Coded FEC. 16QAM (Low Gain) Sets the modulation to 16 QAM with Min Coded FEC. 16QAM Sets the modulation to 16 QAM with no FEC. 64QAM (High Gain) Sets the modulation to 64 QAM with Max Coded FEC. 64QAM (Low Gain) Sets the modulation to 64 QAM with Min Coded FEC. The default setting is QPSK (Low Gain). The base / base-repeater radio TX modulation will be set based on the worse case (RSSI) path profile scenario of all the radios (remotes and repeaters) in one hop distance from the base / base-repeater radio. The repeater radio TX modulation will be set based on the worse case (RSSI) path profile scenario of all the radios (remotes and base) in one hop distance from the repeater radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 111 ACM Control (base station only) This parameter enables / disables Adaptive Code Modulation for the remote to base direction of transmission (upstream). When ACM is enabled (ACM Control set to Standard or Fast), the base station sends a modulation type recommendation to each remote radio based on the signal quality for each individual remote radio. Option Disabled Function Disables Adaptive Code Modulation for the upstream. The base station does not send a modulation type recommendation to any remote radio. Fast Enables Adaptive Code Modulation for the upstream. The ACM will switch down one ACM level if an errored packet is received. The ACM will switch up when the link quality exceeds the performance threshold. This option maintains the highest network speeds for as long as possible. Standard Enables Adaptive Code Modulation for the upstream. The ACM will switch down one ACM level if the link quality degrades in advance of the level where errored packets would be expected and will switch to the lowest ACM level if an errored packet is received. The ACM will switch up when the link quality exceeds the performance threshold. This option preserves packet integrity but reduces network speeds. The default setting is Fast. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 112 | Managing the Radio ADAPTIVE CODING AND MODULATION These settings are only used if the Modulation Type is set to Adaptive and only apply to the remote to base / base-repeater / repeater direction of transmission (upstream). MODEM - Remote Station Modulation Type The remote to base / base-repeater / repeater direction of transmission can be adaptive modulation or fixed modulation. This parameter sets the TX Modulation Type for the remote station radio. Option Adaptive Function Sets the modulation type to Adaptive Code Modulation. The remote radio receives the modulation type recommendation from the base / base-repeater / repeater station and adjusts the modulation and FEC code rate in the remote to base / base-

repeater / repeater direction of transmission (upstream). QPSK (High Gain) Sets the modulation to QPSK with Max Coded FEC. QPSK (Low Gain) Sets the modulation to QPSK with Min Coded FEC. QPSK Sets the modulation to QPSK with no FEC. 16QAM (High Gain) Sets the modulation to 16 QAM with Max Coded FEC. 16QAM (Low Gain) Sets the modulation to 16 QAM with Min Coded FEC. 16QAM Sets the modulation to 16 QAM with no FEC. 64QAM (High Gain) Sets the modulation to 64 QAM with Max Coded FEC. 64QAM (Low Gain) Sets the modulation to 64 QAM with Min Coded FEC. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 113 Default Modulation This parameter sets the default modulation and FEC code rate for the remote to base / base-repeater /

repeater direction of transmission when the ACM mechanism fails for whatever reason. It is also used when the radio starts up, and subsequently, if there are no recommendations received from the base /

base-repeater / repeater station, it will remain at that setting. Upstream recommendations are always expected to be received from the base / base-repeater / repeater station. For example, when the base / base-repeater / repeater station 'ACM control' is set to 'disabled'

and the 'modulation type' at the remote is set to 'adaptive', the default modulation will be used. In this case, the base / base-repeater / repeater station will not recommend any changes to the remote radios and so the remote radio will remain on the configured Default Modulation. This parameter sets the TX Modulation Type for the remote station radio. Option Function QPSK (High Gain) Sets the modulation to QPSK with Max Coded FEC. QPSK (Low Gain) Sets the modulation to QPSK with Min Coded FEC. QPSK Sets the modulation to QPSK with no FEC. 16QAM (High Gain) Sets the modulation to 16 QAM with Max Coded FEC. 16QAM (Low Gain) Sets the modulation to 16 QAM with Min Coded FEC. 16QAM Sets the modulation to 16 QAM with no FEC. 64QAM (High Gain) Sets the modulation to 64 QAM with Max Coded FEC. 64QAM (Low Gain) Sets the modulation to 64 QAM with Min Coded FEC. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 114 | Managing the Radio Radio > Channel Setup CHANNEL SETTINGS Access Scheme This parameter sets the Media Access Control (MAC) used by the radio for over the air communication. Option Function Access Request Channel access scheme where the base station controls the communication on the channel. Remotes ask for access to the channel, and the base station grants access if the channel is not occupied. This mode is a general purpose access method for high and low load networks. Access Request (full duplex) Used on a network with full duplex base station hardware and half duplex repeaters / remotes. A full duplex version of Access Request channel access scheme where the base station controls the communication on the channel. Remotes ask for access to the channel, and the base station grants access if the channel is not occupied. The base station can send traffic during remote transmit, exploiting the base station full duplex capabilities. Listen Before Send without Acknowledgement Channel access scheme where network elements listen to ensure the channel is clear, before trying to access the channel. This mode is optimized for low load networks and repeated networks. Acknowledgements are disabled. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 115 Listen Before Send with Acknowledgement Channel access scheme where network elements listen to ensure the channel is clear, before trying to access the channel. This mode is optimized for low load networks and repeated networks. With Acknowledgement, unicast requests from the remote station are acknowledged by the base station to ensure that the transmission has been successful. If the remote station does not receive an acknowledgement, then random back-offs are used to reschedule the next transmission. Enabling acknowledgments increases reliability of transport but reduces available channel capacity so if application has the capability to handle lost or duplicate messages, the Access Scheme should be set to Listen Before Send without Acknowledgement. Point To Point (Half Duplex) Channel access scheme used for Mirrored Bits . The default setting is Access Request. Repeater This parameter sets the Media Access Control (MAC) used by the radio for over the air communication. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 116 | Managing the Radio Maximum Packet Size (Bytes) This parameter sets the maximum over-the-air packet size in bytes. A smaller maximum Packet Size is beneficial when many remote stations or repeater stations are trying to access the channel. The default setting is 1550 bytes. As radios dispatched from the factory have a Packet Size set to the maximum value of 1550 bytes, if a new radio is installed in an existing network, the Packet Size must be changed to ensure it is the same value for all radios in the network. The new radio will not register an existing network if the Packet Size is not the same as the other radios in the network. This packet size includes the wireless protocol header and security payload (0 to 16 bytes). The length of the security header depends on the level of security selected. When the security setting is 0, the maximum user data transfer over-the-air is 1516 bytes. When encryption is enabled, the entire packet of user data (payload) is encrypted. If authentication is being used, the security frame will be added (up to 16 bytes). The wireless protocol header is then added which is proprietary to the Aprisa SR+. This is not encrypted. Packet Filtering Each Aprisa SR+ radio can filter packets not destined for itself. The Packet Filtering parameter controls this functionality. In an Aprisa SR+ network, all communication from remote stations is destined for the base station in the Aprisa SR+ network communication protocol. In a repeater or base-repeater network, a remote station will send a message to the base station. The repeater station will receive this and then repeat the message. The repeated message will then be received by the base station. Other remote stations connected to the repeater station will receive this message and depending on the Packet Filtering parameter, either forward this packet or discard it. This filtering capability can provide the ability for remote stations to communicate with each other (peer to peer communication) when connected to a repeater station or to a base-repeater station, particularly useful in the event of losing communication with a SCADA Master, assuming the Aprisa SR+ network is still operational. For example, to create peer to peer communication between two remotes in a network with a base-repeater, the base-repeater packet filtering setting is set to 'Automatic' and the two remotes packet filtering setting is set to 'Disabled'. IP Header Compression must be disabled for this feature to operate correctly (see IP Header Note:

Compression Ratio on page 119). Option Disabled Automatic Function Every packet received by the radio will be forwarded to the relevant interface. The radio will filter (discard) packets not destined for itself according to the Aprisa SR+ traffic protocols The default setting is Automatic. Note: The Aprisa SR+ network is transparent to the protocol being transmitted; therefore the Packet Filtering parameter is based on the Aprisa SR+ addressing and network protocols, not the user (SCADA, etc.) traffic protocols. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 117 Serial Data Stream Mode This parameter controls the traffic flow in the radio serial ports. Option Broadcast Segregate Function Serial port traffic from the network is broadcast on all serial ports on this radio. This will include the RS-232 port derived from the USB port. Serial port traffic from the network from a specific port number is directed to the respective serial port only (see Segregated Port Directions). The default setting is Broadcast. Segregated Port Directions If the base station and the remote radios were deployed with the same Data Port product option e.g. all radios were purchased as 2E2S (two Ethernet ports and two Serial ports), serial port traffic from the network from a specific port number is directed to the respective serial port on all radios. 2E2S Port Number 2E2S Port Number 1 2 USB 1 2 USB But if the base station and the remote radios were deployed with different Data Port product options, the following table shows how serial port traffic is directed:

2E2S Port Number 3E1S Port Number 1 2 USB 1 NA USB Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 118 | Managing the Radio TRAFFIC SETTINGS Background Bulk Data Transfer Rate This parameter sets the data transfer rate for large amounts of management data. Function Utilizes more of the available capacity for large amounts of management data. Highest impact on user traffic. Utilizes a moderate of the available capacity for large amounts of management data. Medium impact on user traffic. Utilizes a minimal of the available capacity for large amounts of management data. Lowest impact on user traffic. Option High Medium Low The default setting is high. Network Traffic Type This parameter optimizes the channel settings for the predominant traffic type. Option Function User Defined Allows the user to define the channel settings (see Radio >

Advanced Setup on page 120). Serial Only Optimizes the channel settings for the predominantly serial traffic. Ethernet Only Optimizes the channel settings for the predominantly Ethernet traffic. Mixed Optimizes the channel settings for a mix of Ethernet and serial traffic. The default setting is Mixed. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 119 DATA COMPRESSION IP Header Compression Ratio The IP Header Compression implements TCP/IP ROHC v2 (Robust Header Compression v2. RFC4995, RFC5225, RFC4996) to compress the IP header. IP header compression allows for faster point-to-point transactions, but only in a star network. IP Header Compression module comprises of two main components, compressor and decompressor. Both these components maintain some state information for an IP flow to achieve header compression. However, for reasons like packet drops or station reboots this state information can go out of sync between the compressor and decompressor resulting in compression and/or decompression failure resulting in loss of packets. The compression ratio controls the rate at which compressor and decompressor synchronize state information with each other. Frequent synchronization results in reduced ratio. Option Function Compression Disabled High Medium Low Disables IP header compression. State information is synchronized less frequently thus achieving the best compression ratio. State information is synchronization more frequently than High setting but less frequently than Low setting. State information is synchronized frequently thus reducing the compression ratio. The default setting is High. When IP Header Compression is enabled, it is important that the Network Radius is set correctly. If it was incorrectly set to 1, header compression could not be interpreted by radius 2 radios. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 120 | Managing the Radio Radio > Advanced Setup This page is only visible when the Channel Setup > Network Traffic Type is set to User Defined. ADVANCED CHANNEL SETTINGS Default Packet Time to Live (ms) This parameter sets the default time a packet is allowed to live in the system before being dropped if it cannot be transmitted over the air. It is used to prevent old, redundant packets being transmitted through the Aprisa SR+ network. The default setting is 1500 ms. In the case of serial poll SCADA networks such as MODBUS and IEC 60870.50.101, it is important to ensure the replies from the RTU are in the correct sequence and are not timed out replies from Master requests. If the TTL value is too long, the SCADA master will detect sequence errors. It is recommended to use a TTL which is half the serial SCADA timeout. This is commonly called the scan timeout or link layer time out or retry timeout. When using TCP protocols, a TTL of 1500 ms is recommended because a TCP re-transmission usually occurs after approximately 3 seconds. In SCADA networks which use both serial and Ethernet, it is recommended that the TTL is set to half the serial SCADA timeout for serial remotes, and 1500 ms for Ethernet (TCP) remotes. For example, if the serial SCADA timeout is 1000 ms, a remote radio which is connected to the serial RTU should be set to 500 ms, a remote radio which is connected to an Ethernet (TCP) RTU should have a 1500 ms timeout. In this case, the base station TTL should be set to 1500 ms as well; or whichever is the longer TTL of serial or Ethernet. The default packet Time To Live (1500 ms) can cause the first packet sent to be lost when exiting sleep mode. The same will occur when exiting Access Request MAC idle mode if the power save ratio is set to maximum. The packet Time To Live is extended if those packets originate during the power save wakeup or the sleep exit time. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 121 Serial Packet Time to Live (ms) This parameter sets the time a serial packet is allowed to live in the system before being dropped if it cannot be transmitted over the air. The default setting is 800 ms. Ethernet Packet Time to Live (ms) This parameter sets the time an Ethernet packet is allowed to live in the system before being dropped if it cannot be transmitted over the air. The default setting is 600 ms. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 122 | Managing the Radio Serial Serial > Summary RS-232 Hardware Ports This page displays the current settings for the serial port parameters. Note: This screen is dependent on the Data Port product option purchased (see Data Interface Ports on page 329). The Data Port product option shown is a 2E2S two Ethernet ports and two Serial ports See Serial > Port Setup on page 124 for configuration options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO USB Serial Ports This page displays the current settings for the USB serial port parameters. Managing the Radio | 123 Type This parameter displays the Serial Port interface type. If the Name is USB Serial Port:

Option RS-232 RS-485 Function Indicates that a USB to RS-232 serial converter is plugged into the radio. Indicates that a USB to RS-485 serial converter is plugged into the radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 124 | Managing the Radio Serial > Port Setup RS-232 Hardware Ports This page provides the setup for the serial port settings. SERIAL PORTS SETTINGS Note: This screen is dependent on the Data Port product option purchased (see Data Interface Ports on page 329). The Data Port product option shown is a 2E2S two Ethernet ports and two Serial ports Name This parameter sets the port name which can be up to 32 characters. Option Serial Port USB Serial Port Function This is the normal RS-232 serial ports provided with the RJ45 connector. This is the optional RS-232 / RS-485 serial port provided with the USB host port connector with a USB to RS-232 / RS-485 RJ45 converter cable (see USB RS-232 / RS-485 Serial Port on page 353). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Mode This parameter defines the mode of operation of the serial port. The default setting is Standard. Managing the Radio | 125 Option Disabled Standard Bit Oriented Mirrored Bits Function The serial port is not required. The serial port is communicating with serial ports on other stations. This mode allows support for legacy protocols that are not compatible with standard UARTs (see Bit Oriented on page 126). Mirrored Bits is a serial communications protocol used to exchange internal logic status messages directly between relays and devices used in line protection, remote control and monitoring, relay remote tripping, sectionalizing and other such applications. The protocol is often described as a relay-to-relay communications technology. Terminal Server A base station Ethernet port can communicate with both Ethernet ports and serial ports on remote stations. RS-232 traffic is encapsulated in IP packets (see Serial > Port Setup Terminal Server on page 131). SLIP IP packets are encapsulated over RS-232 interface port (see Serial

> Port Setup Serial Line Interface Protocol (SLIP) on page 134). MTU Size (bytes) This parameter sets the size of the packet in bytes received before it is transmitted if an inter-frame gap is not detected. The default setting is 512 bytes. Baud Rate (bit/s) This parameter sets the baud rate to 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bit/s. The default setting is 115200 bit/s. Character Length (bits) This parameter sets the character length to 7 or 8 bits. The default setting is 8 bits. Parity This parameter sets the parity to Even, Odd or None. The default setting is None. Stop Bits (bits) This parameter sets the number of stop bits to 1 or 2 bits. The default setting is 1 bit. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 126 | Managing the Radio Flow Control This parameter sets the flow control of the serial port. The default setting is Disabled. Option None CTS-RTS Function The Aprisa SR+ radio port (DCE) CTS is in a permanent ON (+ve) state. This does not go to OFF if the radio link fails. CTS / RTS hardware flow control between the DTE and the Aprisa SR+ radio port (DCE) is enabled. If the Aprisa SR+ buffer is full, the CTS goes OFF. In the case of radio link failure the signal goes to OFF (-ve) state. In terminal server mode, the serial packet is no different from an Ethernet packet and travels through various packet queues before being transmitted over the air. Thus, the serial flow control has no affect in terminal server mode. Inter-Frame Gap (chars) This parameter defines the gap between successive serial data frames. It is used to delimit the serial data to define the end of a packet. The Inter-Frame Gap limits are 0 to 20 chars in steps of 0.1 char. The default setting is 3.5 chars. Bit Oriented This menu item is only applicable if the serial port has an operating mode of Bit Oriented. This mode allows support for legacy protocols that are not compatible with standard UARTs. Examples are VAN COMM, REDAC and CONITEL, although others will work as well. The limitations of this new mode are:

The MTU must be configured larger than the inter-frame gap The maximum baud rate is 1200 bit/s The inter-frame gap must be configured to the length of a packet in the protocol being used. This is 14 for VAN COMM, and 4 for REDAC and CONITEL) Only supported on one serial port at a time Not supported on USB serial port. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 127 Mirrored Bits Introduction Mirrored Bits is a serial communications protocol used to exchange internal logic status messages directly between relays and devices used in line protection, remote control and monitoring, relay remote tripping, sectionalizing and other such applications. The protocol relies on near constant transmission of status bytes between the devices. It can only tolerate small delays between receipts of packets. The protocol provides alarms states to monitor and report on radio channel performance. If a receiving device does not receive a status packet within a predefined time then it asserts an instantaneous channel monitor error (ROK), this error clears as soon as the next status packet is received. There are two more significant errors RBAD (ROK dropout for settable time) and CBAD (long term channel unavailability exceeding a settable threshold) that will be asserted if more extensive delays occur or the communications channel is lost. The trigger or time period for asserting ROK varies between devices. Typically the ROK error state is asserted if a receiving device does not receive a packet for a period > than 3 x the period taken to transmit a packet. When optimizing for Mirrored Bits operation the target is to present a radio channel that does not result in ROK triggers occurring. Individual networks may be tolerant to occasional ROK alarms states if configured to make use of the more significant alarms Optimization Typically Full Duplex radio communications are required however Aprisa SR+ has been optimized to support Mirrored Bits in a narrow channel licensed Half Duplex radio channel. 4RF has introduced a channel access scheme optimized for Mirrored Bits support between two devices. Error free transport of the protocol can be achieved through specific serial traffic configuration settings, which are dependent on the radio RF configuration, Mirrored Bits devices and network characteristics. Under some scenarios limited Ethernet transport may be supported without impacting Mirrored Bits operation. If the network can tolerate occasional ROK errors Ethernet support may be increased. The level of impact on Mirrored Bits is related to radio settings and the specifics of the Ethernet traffic including size and frequency of the Ethernet packets. When attempting to configure the radios to support new devices or varying network requirements a standard configuration is used for the radios and the following two key serial data parameters are adjusted:

Inter Frame Gap (IFG) used to detect new packets on the serial input to the radio Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) used to define the over the air (OTA) packet size To date, 4RF has lab tested and confirmed operation with the follow SEL Mirrored Bits devices. Contact 4RF for preferred configuration:

2411 PAC (Programmable Automation Controller) 2505 series remote I/O modules 321 series relays 4RF is working with customers to confirm support for other devices as they are identified. The remainder of this document details the configuration settings and general process to optimize the radio to support additional devices, in addition to listing expected latencies under different configurations. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 128 | Managing the Radio General Configuration The configurations and process are aligned with a 2505 series remote I/O module device with serial baud rate of 9600. As a fast Mirrored Bits device it is considered a good start point for optimization. For other baud rates please refer to the table in Initial Setup for Mirrored Bits Support on page 129 for initial MTU and IFG settings. The following are the recommended RF configurations and serial data configuration settings and to optimize the performance over Aprisa SR+ radios. Recommended RF configurations are:

Radio->Channel Setup->Serial Data Stream Mode to Segregate Radio->Channel Setup->Access Scheme to Point To Point (Half Duplex) Radio->Channel Setup->Network Traffic Type to Serial Only Radio > Radio Setup > Channel size set to meet license requirements (the wider the better for performance) Radio > Radio Setup > Modulation 64 QAM low Serial data port variable parameters Two key serial port parameters will be adjusted during optimization. The following initial values have been determined as a suitable for the SEL 2505 device which is the fastest device 4RF has lab tested. It is a suitable start point to carry out optimization for other devices. Inter Frame Gap initially set to 0.2 IFG is dependent on serial line baud rate only The Mirrored Bits protocol is essentially timed to a base clock, the slower the baud rate the longer the period to transmit a packet resulting in less time between packets A low baud rate is ideal as it increase the time period before a ROK error will occur as this is dependent on serial packet transmission time The minimum baud rate currently proven to provide reliable communications is 9600 bit, with this rate an IFG of 0.2 is required to be used With the 2505 device the IFG increases with increases in serial baud rate, while easier to detect gaps the ROK error period is reduced MTU initially set to 32 bytes Dependent on serial line baud rate, channel size, modulation, security settings, intended traffic mix and all other settings that influence OTA speed and capacity available for external traffic MTU affects latency, if a large MTU then the radio will wait for the number of bytes before sending the packet OTA Ideally a low MTU will be used the minimum needs to support the various settings above and intended mix of traffic MTU can be changed in steps of +/- 8 when trying different configurations Refer table in section 5 for start point of MTU based on channel size, modulation and serial baud rate, this assumes the general radio settings as above Increase by 8 for new devices or in attempt to support some Ethernet or other services Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 129 Initial Setup for Mirrored Bits Support The MTU can be adjusted up or down in steps of 8 bytes Increase by 8 bytes if Mirrored Bits is not running without alarms or ROK assertions Decrease by 8 bytes if Mirrored Bits is running error free, the target is to find the smallest MTU for reliable transport If reliable Mirrored Bits communications cannot be achieved after increasing the MTU by 10 steps or 80 bytes, then the following CLI commands can be used to extract low level packet information from the radio. This information can be forwarded to 4RF to determine what is occurring and identify alternate configurations. Configure Radio / Mirrored Bits equipment for 9600 baud rate Connect Mirrored Bits equipment to one of the serial ports and start traffic Ensure no management traffic or other services are connected to the Ethernet or Serial ports Login to the radio CLI as admin and execute debug set 2 5 -> there will be continuous scrolling information Screen capture one page of the scrolling information to send to 4RF Remove serial cable and execute debug clear 2 5 via the CLI to clear the debug routine, alternatively reboot the radio Note if the serial baud rate intended to be used is not 9600 then repeat for each different rate and clearly identify the screen prints by baud rate before forwarding to 4RF Note there are additional low level configurations which can improve performance. 4RF will detail these if required based on the information received. Additional Setup for Improved Latency or Additional Services Once reliable Mirrored Bits communications has been achieved experimentation can be undertaken to reduce latencies or provide support for additional services such as Ethernet based SCADA polling. Increasing the MTU will impact latency for each packet (refer to table in section 4). A point may be reached where the gaps between individual packets are too high and the Mirrored Bits ROK or other alarms will assert. Increasing the MTU allows some space in each packet for additional data from the second serial port or the Ethernet ports. Support for Ethernet is highly dependent on the size and frequency of packets being sent. A level of trial and error is required. At the very narrow channel sizes and OTA data rates support may be limited however with wider channels and higher OTA data rates some services may be supported (such as polling). It should be noted that if the Mirrored Bits devices or network manager can accept occasional ROK assertions then there is more flexibility for other services. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 130 | Managing the Radio Baud rate and Latency Table The following table is arranged by serial baud rate followed by Aprisa SR+ channel size and modulation. It lists the optimized MTU and IFG and resulting latency for the SEL 2505 device, one of the faster devices available so serves as an ideal starting point when introducing new devices. It is recommended that initial testing is carried out with one step size higher (8) on MTU. Serial Baud Rate Modulation Channel Size Minimum MTU Size IFG One Way SEL 2505 Latency (ms) 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 38400 38400 38400 38400 38400 38400 38400 38400 38400 38400 38400 38400 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 64 QAM Low 16 QAM Low QPSK QPSK Low 64 QAM Low 16 QAM Low QPSK QPSK Low 64 QAM Low 16 QAM Low QPSK QPSK Low 64 QAM Low 16 QAM Low QPSK QPSK Low 64 QAM Low 16 QAM Low QPSK QPSK Low 64 QAM Low 16 QAM Low QPSK QPSK Low 64 QAM Low 16 QAM Low QPSK QPSK Low 64 QAM Low 16 QAM Low QPSK QPSK Low 64 QAM Low 16 QAM Low QPSK QPSK Low 50 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 50 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 50 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 8 16 16 24 16 24 24 32 24 40 40 64 16 24 24 24 32 48 56 56 56 88 not supported not supported 24 24 32 40 40 72 76 not supported 82 not supported not supported not supported Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 20.0

-

-

42.5 40.0

-

-

62.5 60.0

-

-

125.0 25.0

-

-

-

50.0

-

-

-

85.0

-

-

-

40.0

-

-

62.5 62.5

-

-

-

112.5

-

-

-

Managing the Radio | 131 Terminal Server This menu item is only applicable if the serial port has an operating mode of Terminal Server. The Terminal Server operating mode provides encapsulation of serial data into an IP packet (over TCP or UDP). A server connected to a base station Ethernet port can communicate with all remote station Ethernet ports and serial ports. Local Address This parameter sets the serial Terminal Server local IP address. Bridge Mode The local IP address can be the same as the radio's configured IP address or the Virtual IP address for protected stations. If it is not the above, then it must be an IP address from a network different from the radio's network. Note that the Terminal Server local IP address settings can be the same for other terminal servers in the radio. Router Mode The local IP address must be the same as port 1 (management IP address) of the radios configured port IP addresses or the Virtual IP address for protected stations. Gateway Router Mode The local IP address must be the same as the radio's configured IP address or the Virtual IP address for protected stations. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 132 | Managing the Radio Local Port This parameter sets the TCP or UDP port number of the local serial port. The valid port number range is less than or equal to 49151 but with exclusions of 0, 5445, 6445, 9930 or 9931. The default setting is 20000. The user is responsible for ensuring that there is no conflict on the network. Remote Address This parameter sets the IP address of the server connected to the base station Ethernet port. Remote Port This parameter sets the TCP or UDP port number of the server connected to the base station Ethernet port. The default setting is 0. Protocol This parameter sets the L4 TCP/IP or UDP/IP protocol used for terminal server operation. The default setting is TCP. Mode This parameter defines the mode of operation of the terminal server connection. The default setting is Client and Server. Option Client Server Client and Server Function The radio will attempt to establish a TCP connection with the specified remote unit. Generally, this setting is for the base station with an Ethernet connection to the SCADA master. The radio will listen for a TCP connection on the specified local port. Generally, this setting is for the remote station with a serial connection to the RTU. Data received from any client shall be forwarded to the associated serial port while data received from that serial port shall be forwarded to every client with an open TCP connection. If no existing TCP connections exist, all data received from the associated serial port shall be discarded. The radio will listen for a TCP connection on the specified local port and if necessary, establish a TCP connection with the specified remote unit. Generally, this setting is used for the remote station but it should be used carefully as two connections might be established with the base station. Data received from any client shall be forwarded to the associated serial port while data received from that serial port shall be forwarded to every client with an open TCP connection. Inactivity Timeout (seconds) This specifies the duration (in seconds) to automatically terminate the connection with the remote TCP server if no data has been received from either the remote TCP server or its associated serial port for the duration of the configured inactivity time. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 133 TCP Keep Alive A TCP keep alive is a message sent by one device to another to check that the link between the two is operating, or to prevent the link from being broken. If the TCP keep alive is enabled, the radio will be notified if the TCP connection fails. If the TCP keep alive is disabled, the radio relies on the Inactivity Timeout to detect a TCP connection failure. The default setting is disabled. Note: An active TCP keep alive will generate a small amount of extra network traffic. PVID This parameter sets the PVID (port VLAN ID) for each of the terminal servers on the radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 134 | Managing the Radio Serial Line Interface Protocol (SLIP) This menu item is only applicable if the serial port has an operating mode of SLIP. The SLIP operating mode provides IP packet encapsulation over RS-232 serial interface as per the SLIP protocol RFC 1055. A SLIP serial interface contains the IP address of the serially connected RTU as per the RTU/PLC SLIP protocol. The SLIP interfaces on the remote radios can be part of the bridge network and can coexist and operate with a mix of Ethernet interfaces, serial SLIP and terminal server interfaces. As the RTU/PLC serial SLIP interface doesn't support MAC addresses, a remote or repeater radio SLIP interface uses a proxy ARP function that returns its own MAC address for ARP requests based on the IP address of the RTU/PLC SLIP interface. Serial Device IP Address This parameter sets the IP address of the RTU connected on the configured serial port. Baud Rate (bit/s) This parameter sets the baud rate to 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bit/s. The default setting is 115200 bit/s. The minimum supported baud rate is 1200 bit/s as SLIP will not work on baud rates below 1200. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO USB Serial Ports This page provides the setup for the USB serial port settings. Managing the Radio | 135 SERIAL PORTS SETTINGS Mode This parameter defines the mode of operation of the serial port. The default setting is Disabled. Option Disabled Standard Function The serial port is not required. The serial port is communicating with serial ports on other stations. Terminal Server A base station Ethernet port can communicate with both Ethernet ports and serial ports on remote stations. RS-232 traffic is encapsulated in IP packets (see Serial > Port Setup Terminal Server on page 131). CLI Management The USB host port is used to access the radio Command Line Interface (CLI). A USB converter to RS-232 convertor will be required to connect to a PC. MTU Size (bytes) This parameter sets the size of the packet in bytes received before it is transmitted if an inter-frame gap is not detected. The default setting is 512 bytes. Baud Rate (bit/s) This parameter sets the baud rate to 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bit/s. The default setting is 115200 bit/s. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 136 | Managing the Radio Character Length (bits) This parameter sets the character length to 7 or 8 bits. The default setting is 8 bits. Parity This parameter sets the parity to Even, Odd or None. The default setting is None. Stop Bits (bits) This parameter sets the number of stop bits to 1 or 2 bits. The default setting is 1 bit. Flow Control This parameter sets the flow control of the serial port. The default setting is Disabled. Option None CTS-RTS Function The Aprisa SR+ radio port (DCE) CTS is in a permanent ON (+ve) state. This does not go to OFF if the radio link fails. CTS / RTS hardware flow control between the DTE and the Aprisa SR+ radio port (DCE) is enabled. If the Aprisa SR+ buffer is full, the CTS goes OFF. In the case of radio link failure the signal goes to OFF (-ve) state. In terminal server mode, the serial packet is no different from an Ethernet packet and travels through various packet queues before being transmitted over the air. Thus, the serial flow control has no affect in terminal server mode. Inter-Frame Gap (chars) This parameter defines the gap between successive serial data frames. It is used to delimit the serial data to define the end of a packet. The Inter-Frame Gap limits are 0 to 20 chars in steps of 0.1 char. The default setting is 3.5 chars. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Ethernet Ethernet > Summary This page displays the current settings for the Ethernet port parameters and the status of the ports. Managing the Radio | 137 See Ethernet > Port Setup for configuration options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 138 | Managing the Radio Ethernet > Port Setup This page provides the setup for the Ethernet ports settings. ETHERNET PORT SETTINGS Note: This screen is dependent on the Data Port product option purchased (see Data Interface Ports on page 329). The Data Port product option shown is a 2E2S two Ethernet ports and two Serial ports Mode This parameter controls the Ethernet traffic flow. The default setting is Standard. Option Standard Switch Function Enables Ethernet data communication over the radio link but Ethernet traffic is not switched locally between the two Ethernet ports. Ethernet traffic is switched locally between the two Ethernet ports and communicated over the radio link Disabled Disables all Ethernet data communications. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Speed (Mbit/s) This parameter controls the traffic rate of the Ethernet port. The default setting is Auto. Managing the Radio | 139 Option Auto 10 100 Duplex Function Provides auto selection of Ethernet Port Speed 10/100 Mbit/s The Ethernet Port Speed is manually set to 10 Mbit/s The Ethernet Port Speed is manually set to 100 Mbit/s This parameter controls the transmission mode of the Ethernet port. The default setting is Auto. Option Auto Half Duplex Full Duplex Function Function Provides auto selection of Ethernet Port duplex setting. The Ethernet Port is manually set to Half Duplex. The Ethernet Port is manually set to Full Duplex. This parameter controls the use for the Ethernet port. The default setting is Management and User. Option Function Management Only The Ethernet port is only used for management of the network. Management and User The Ethernet port is used for management of the network and User traffic over the radio link. User Only The Ethernet port is only used for User traffic over the radio link. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 140 | Managing the Radio Ethernet > L2 Filtering This page is only available if the Ethernet traffic option has been licensed (see Maintenance > Licence on page 216). FILTER DETAILS L2 Filtering provides the ability to filter (white list) radio link user traffic based on specified Layer 2 MAC addresses. User traffic originating from specified Source MAC Addresses destined for specified Destination MAC Addresses that meets the protocol type criteria will be transmitted over the radio link. User traffic that does not meet the filtering criteria will not be transmitted over the radio link. Management traffic to the radio will never be blocked. Source MAC Address This parameter sets the filter to the Source MAC address of the packet in the format hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh. If the Source MAC Address is set to FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, traffic will be accepted from any source MAC address. Destination MAC Address This parameter sets the filter to the Destination MAC address of the packet in the format hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh. If the Destination MAC Address is set to FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, traffic will be delivered to any destination MAC address. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 141 Protocol Type This parameter sets the EtherType accepted ARP, VLAN, IPv4, IPv6 or Any type. Example:

In the screen shot, the rules are configured in the base station which controls the Ethernet traffic to the radio link. Traffic from an external device with the Source MAC address 00:01:50:c2:01:00 is forwarded over the radio link if it meets the criteria. All other traffic will be blocked. Rule 1 If the Protocol Type is ARP going to any destination MAC address or Rule 2 If the Protocol Type is Any and the destination MAC address is 01:00:50:c2:01:02 or Rule 3 If the Protocol Type is VLAN tagged packets going to any unicast destination MAC address. Special L2 Filtering Rules:

Unicast Only Traffic This L2 filtering allows for Unicast only traffic and drop broadcast and multicast traffic. This filtering is achieved by adding the two rules:

Rule Source Destination Protocol Type MAC Address MAC Address Allow ARPS FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Allow Unicasts from Any source FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF FE:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF ARP Any To delete a L2 Filter:

1. Click on an existing rule Select. 2. Click on Delete. 3. Click on OK. ADD NEW FILTER To add a L2 Filter:

1. Enter the Rule ID number. This is a unique rule number between 1 and 25. 2. Enter the Source MAC address of the packet or FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF to accept traffic from any MAC address. 3. Enter the Destination MAC address of the packet or FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF to deliver traffic to any MAC address. 4. Select the Protocol Type to ARP, VLAN, IPv4, IPv6 or Any type. 5. Click on Add. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 142 | Managing the Radio Ethernet > VLAN This page is only available if the Ethernet traffic option has been licensed (see Maintenance > Licence on page 216). VLAN PORT SETTINGS All Ports This page specifies the parameters that relate to all Ethernet ports when working in Bridge Mode. Three parameters are global parameters for the Ethernet Bridge; enable / disable VLANs, Management VLAN ID and the Double VLAN ID(S-VLAN) and the priority bit. These parameters can't be defined per port and are globally defined for the Ethernet Bridge. VLAN Enabled This parameter sets if VLAN operation is required on the network. If it is enabled on the base station, it must also be enabled on the remote / repeater stations. The default is disabled. Management VLAN This parameter sets the VLAN ID for management traffic only. The value can be between 1 and 4094. The default is 1. Double Tag Egress S-VLAN ID This parameter sets the S-VLAN ID (outer tag) in the egress direction. The value can be between 1 and 4094. The default is 1. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Double Tag Egress S-VLAN Priority This parameter sets the S-VLAN egress traffic priority. The default is Priority 1 (Best Effort). Managing the Radio | 143 Option Egress Priority Classification High / Low Priority Priority 0 Background Priority 1 (Best Effort) Priority 2 (Excellent Effort) Priority 3 (Critical Applications) Priority 4 (Video) Priority 5 (Voice) Priority 6 (Internetwork Control) Priority 7 (Network Control) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Lowest Priority Highest Priority Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 144 | Managing the Radio VLAN PORT SETTINGS Port 1 This example is shown for the product option of 2E2S i.e. two Ethernet ports. PORT PARAMETERS Ingress Filtering Enabled This parameter enables ingress filtering. When enabled, if ingress VLAN ID is not included in its member set (inner tagged), the frame will be discarded. If the Ingress Filtering is disabled, the Aprisa SR+ supports Admit All Frames so that all frames tagged, untagged and priority-tagged-frames are allowed to pass through the Ethernet ports. The default is disabled. Double Tagging Enabled This parameter enables double tagging on this specific port. When enabled, if the ingress traffic is double tagged, the Aprisa SR+ will check and validate that the S-VLAN ID matches the S-VLAN defined in 'Double Tag Egress S-VLAN ID' in the 'all ports' tab. If there is a match, the packet will be forwarded into the Bridge and the S-VLAN outer tag will be removed, thus the radio network will only forward a single VLAN. If there isnt a matching S-VLAN, the packet will be discarded. On egress, the outer tag (S-VLAN) is appended with the 'Double Tag Egress S-VLAN ID' defined in the 'all ports' tab (see page 142). The default is disabled. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 145 If double tagging is enabled on the port, incoming frames should always be double tagged. If the incoming frame is untagged, then the PVID (port VLAN ID) is used and forwarded with the Port Ingress priority provided the PVID is configured in the Port VLAN Membership of any of the Ethernet ports. If not, the frames are dropped. If the incoming frame is single tagged, then PVID is used and forwarded with the Port Ingress priority provided the PVID is configured in the Port VLAN Membership of any of the Ethernet ports. If not the frames are dropped. If double tagging is disabled on the port, incoming frames should always be single tagged, untagged or prioritytagged frames. Double tagged frames are simply forwarded treating them as if they were single tagged frames. At the egress of the Ethernet port, such frames are forwarded only if the S-VLAN ID of that frame is a member of the Port VLAN Membership. PVID (Port VLAN ID) This parameter sets the frame VLAN ID when the ingress frame is untagged (e.g. when in 'port VLAN membership' the 'egress action' is set to 'untagged and forward') or priority-tagged (VLAN=0). The value can be between 1 and 4094. The default is 1. Note: The Port VLAN Membership must contain the PVID. If the Port VLAN Membership does not contain the PVID, untagged or priority-tagged frames will be discarded. COPY VLAN MEMBERSHIP To Port This parameter when set copies the port VLAN Membership settings to the other ports. PORT VLAN MEMBERSHIP VLAN ID This parameter sets the VLAN ID of the port for a maximum 64 active VLANs. The value can be between 1 and 4094. The default is 1. VLAN Description This parameter is a freeform field used to identify the VLAN. It can be up to a maximum of 32 characters. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 146 | Managing the Radio Egress Action This parameter sets the action taken on the frame on egress from the Ethernet port. The default is Untag and forward. Option Function Untag and forward Removes the tagged information and forwards the frame. On Ingress, the VLAN tag will be added to the PVID tag. Forward Forwards the tagged frame as it is on egress. On Ingress, traffic is expected to include the VLAN tag with a member VLAN ID, otherwise the packet will be dropped. Controls The Add button adds the selected entry. The Delete button deletes the selected entry. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO IP IP > IP Summary > Bridge / Gateway Router Modes This page displays the current settings for the Networking IP Settings for an Ethernet Operating Mode of Bridge or Gateway Router. Managing the Radio | 147 See IP > IP Setup > Bridge / Gateway Router Modes on page 150 for configuration options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 148 | Managing the Radio IP > IP Summary > Router Mode This page displays the current settings for the Networking IP Settings for an Ethernet Operating Mode of Router. See IP > IP Setup > Router Mode on page 151 for configuration options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO IP > IP Terminal Server Summary This page displays the current IP Terminal Server settings. Managing the Radio | 149 TERMINAL SERVER SUMMARY IP Terminal Server converts local incoming IP packets to a local physical serial port and to OTA serial packets. This function is typically used on a base / master station to convert traffic to serial OTA for transmission to all remote radios See IP > IP Terminal Server Setup for configuration options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 150 | Managing the Radio IP > IP Setup > Bridge / Gateway Router Modes This page provides the setup for the IP Settings for an Ethernet Operating Mode of Bridge or Gateway Router. NETWORKING IP SETTINGS IP Address Set the static IP Address of the radio (Management and Ethernet ports) assigned by your site network administrator using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. This IP address is used both in Bridge mode and in Router mode. The default IP address is in the range 169.254.50.10. Subnet Mask Set the Subnet Mask of the radio (Management and Ethernet ports) using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0 (/16). Gateway Set the Gateway address of the radio, if required, using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx. A default gateway is the node on the network that traffic is directed to when an IP address does not match any other routes in the routing table. It can be the IP address of the router or PC connected to the base station. The default gateway commonly connects the internal radio network and the outside network. The default Gateway is 0.0.0.0. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO IP > IP Setup > Router Mode This page provides the setup for the IP Settings for and Ethernet Operating Mode of Router. Managing the Radio | 151 PORT SETTINGS port (n) Note: This screen is dependent on the Data Port product option purchased (see Data Interface Ports on page 329). The Data Port product option shown is a 2E2S two Ethernet ports and two Serial ports IP Address Set the static IP Address of the radio Ethernet port (n) assigned by your site network administrator using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. This IP address is used for this Ethernet port Router mode. Subnet Mask Set the Subnet Mask of the of the radio Ethernet port (n) using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0 (/16). Gateway Set the Gateway address of the radio Ethernet port (n), if required, using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx. A default gateway is the node on the network that traffic is directed to when an IP address does not match any other routes in the routing table. It can be the IP address of the router or PC connected to the base station. The default gateway commonly connects the internal radio network and the outside network. The default Gateway is 0.0.0.0. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 152 | Managing the Radio RADIO INTERFACE IP SETTINGS The RF interface IP address is the address that traffic is routed to for transport over the radio link. This IP address is only used when Router Mode is selected i.e. not used in Bridge Mode. Radio Interface IP Address Set the IP Address of the RF interface using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default IP address is in the range 10.0.0.0. Radio Interface Subnet Mask Set the Subnet Mask of the RF interface using the standard format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0 (/16). Note 1: If the base station RF interface IP address is a network IP address, and if the remote radio is also using a network IP address within the same subnet or different subnet, then the base radio will assign an automatic RF interface IP address from its own subnet. When the base radio has a host specific RF interface IP address, then all the remotes must have a host specific RF interface IP address from the same subnet. Note 2: When a remote radio is configured for Router Mode and the base radio is changed from Bridge Mode to Router Mode and the RF interface IP address is set to AUTO IP configuration (at least the last octet of the RF interface IP address is zero), it is mandatory to configure the network topology by using the Decommission Node and Discover Nodes (see Maintenance > Advanced on page 217). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO IP > IP Terminal Server Setup This page provides the setup for the IP Terminal Server settings. Managing the Radio | 153 TERMINAL SERVER Enabled This parameter enables IP terminal server. IP Terminal Server converts local incoming IP packets to a local physical serial port and to OTA serial packets as well. This function is typically used on a base / master station to convert traffic to serial OTA for transmission to all remote radios. The serial terminal server traffic can be prioritized separately. For QoS, the priority of the serial terminal server traffic is that of the configured priority for its associated serial port (see QoS > Traffic Priority on page 161). Name This parameter displays the IP terminal server port name. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 154 | Managing the Radio Serial Port This parameter selects the serial port to use IP terminal server. Option Serial Port USB Serial Port Function This is the normal RS-232 serial ports provided with the RJ45 connector. This is the optional RS-232 / RS-485 serial port provided with the USB host port connector with a USB to RS-232 / RS-485 RJ45 converter cable (see USB RS-232 / RS-485 Serial Port on page 353). Local Address This parameter sets the Terminal Server local IP address. Bridge Mode The local IP address can be the same as the radio's configured IP address or the Virtual IP address for protected stations. If it is not the above, then it must be an IP address from a network different from the radio's network. Note that the Terminal Server local IP address settings can be the same for other terminal servers in the radio. Router Mode The local IP address must be the same as any one of the radio's configured port IP addresses or the Virtual IP address for protected stations. Gateway Router Mode The local IP address must be the same as the radio's configured IP address or the Virtual IP address for protected stations. Local Port This parameter sets the TCP or UDP port number of the local serial port. The valid port number range is less than or equal to 49151 but with exclusions of 0, 5445, 6445, 9930 or 9931. The default setting is 20000. The user is responsible for ensuring that there is no conflict on the network. Remote Address This parameter sets the IP address of the server connected to the radio Ethernet port. When the remote address / port is configured as 0.0.0.0/0, each outgoing UDP packet will be sent to the source address of the last received UDP packet. Remote Port This parameter sets the TCP or UDP port number of the server connected to the radio Ethernet port. The default setting is 0. Protocol This parameter sets the L4 TCP / IP or UDP / IP protocol used for terminal server operation. The default setting is TCP. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Mode This parameter defines the mode of operation of the terminal server connection. The default setting is Client and Server. Managing the Radio | 155 Option Client Server Client and Server Function The radio will attempt to establish a TCP connection with the specified remote unit. Generally, this setting is for the base station with an Ethernet connection to the SCADA master. The radio will listen for a TCP connection on the specified local port. Generally, this setting is for the remote station with a serial connection to the RTU. Data received from any client shall be forwarded to the associated serial port while data received from that serial port shall be forwarded to every client with an open TCP connection. If no existing TCP connections exist, all data received from the associated serial port shall be discarded. The radio will listen for a TCP connection on the specified local port and if necessary, establish a TCP connection with the specified remote unit. Generally, this setting is used for the remote station but it should be used carefully as two connections might be established with the base station. Data received from any client shall be forwarded to the associated serial port while data received from that serial port shall be forwarded to every client with an open TCP connection. Inactivity Timeout (seconds) This specifies the duration (in seconds) to automatically terminate the connection with the remote TCP server if no data has been received from either the remote TCP server or its associated serial port for the duration of the configured inactivity time. TCP Keep Alive A TCP keep alive is a message sent by one device to another to check that the link between the two is operating, or to prevent the link from being broken. If the TCP keep alive is enabled, the radio will be notified if the TCP connection fails. If the TCP keep alive is disabled, the radio relies on the Inactivity Timeout to detect a TCP connection failure. The default setting is disabled. Note: An active TCP keep alive will generate a small amount of extra network traffic. PVID This parameter sets the PVID (port VLAN ID) for each of the terminal servers on the radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 156 | Managing the Radio IP > L3 Filtering This page is only available if the Ethernet traffic option has been licensed (see Maintenance > Licence on page 216). The filter operates in either Bridge Mode or Router Mode (see 'Terminal > Operating Mode on page 94). NETWORKING L3 FILTER SETTINGS L3 Filtering provides the ability to evaluate traffic and take specific action based on the filter criteria. This filtering can also be used for L4 TCP / UDP port filtering which in most cases relates to specific applications as per IANA official and unofficial well-known ports. Entering a * into any to field will automatically enter the wildcard values when the data is saved. Priority This parameter shows the priority order in which the filters are processed. Action This parameter defines the action taken on the packet when it meets the filter criteria. Option Process Discard Source IP Address Function Processes the packet if it meets the filter criteria Discards the packet if it meets the filter criteria If the source IP address is set to 0.0.0.0, any source IP address will meet the filter criteria. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 157 Source Wildcard Mask This parameter defines the mask applied to the source IP address. 0 means that it must be a match. If the source wildcard mask is set to 0.0.0.0, the complete source IP address will be evaluated for the filter criteria. If the source wildcard mask is set to 0.0.255.255, the first 2 octets of the source IP address will be evaluated for the filter criteria. If the source wildcard mask is set to 255.255.255.255, none of the source IP address will be evaluated for the filter criteria. Note: The source wildcard mask operation is the inverse of subnet mask operation Source Port Range This parameter defines the port or port range for the source. To specify a range, insert a dash between the ports e.g. 1000-2000. If the source port range is set to 1-65535, traffic from any source port will meet the filter criteria. Destination IP Address This parameter defines the destination IP address of the filter. If the destination IP address is set to 0.0.0.0, any destination IP address will meet the filter criteria. Destination Wildcard Mask This parameter defines the mask applied to the destination IP address. 0 means that it must be a match. If the destination wildcard mask is set to 0.0.0.0, the complete destination IP address will be evaluated for the filter criteria. If the destination wildcard mask is set to 0.0.255.255, the first 2 octets of the destination IP address will be evaluated for the filter criteria. If the destination wildcard mask is set to 255.255.255.255, none of the destination IP address will be evaluated for the filter criteria. Note: The destination wildcard mask operation is the inverse of subnet mask operation Destination Port Range This parameter defines the port or port range for the destination. To specify a range, insert a dash between the ports e.g. 1000-2000. If the destination port range is set to 1-65535, traffic to any destination port will meet the filter criteria. Protocol This parameter defines the Ethernet packet type that will meet the filter criteria. Controls The Delete button deletes the selected entry. The Move Up button moves the selected entry above the entry above it increasing its process priority. The Move Down button moves the selected entry below the entry above it reducing its process priority. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 158 | Managing the Radio IP > IP Routes This page is only available if the Ethernet traffic option has been licensed (see Maintenance > Licence on page 216) and Router Mode selected. It is not valid for Bridge Mode (see 'Terminal > Operating Mode on page 94). NETWORKING IP STATIC ROUTE SETTINGS Static routing provides the ability to evaluate traffic to determine if packets are forwarded over the radio link or discarded based on the route criteria. Route Index This parameter shows the route index. Destination Address This parameter defines the destination IP address of the route criteria. Destination Mask This parameter defines the subnet mask applied to the Destination IP Address. 255 means that it must be a match. If the destination subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.255, all octets of the Destination IP Address will be evaluated for the route criteria. If the destination subnet mask is set to 255.255. 0.0, the first 2 octets of the Destination IP Address will be evaluated for the route criteria. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 159 Gateway Address This parameter sets the gateway address where packets will be forwarded to. If the gateway interface is set to Ethernet Ports, the gateway address is the IP address of the device connected to the Ethernet port. If the gateway interface is set to Radio Path, the gateway address is the IP address of the remote radio. Gateway Interface This parameter sets the destination interface. Option Function Ethernet Ports Packets are forwarded to the Ethernet interface port. Radio Path Packets are forwarded to the RF Interface radio path. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO

Protected Station: Maintenance > Licence This page provides the management and control of the Protected Station Maintenance Licence settings. Managing the Radio | 299 PRIMARY / SECONDARY LICENCE See Maintenance > Licence on page 216 for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 300 | Managing the Radio Protected Station: Maintenance > Advanced This page provides the management and control of the Protected Station Maintenance Advanced settings. NETWORK See Maintenance > Advanced on page 217 for parameter details. RF Interface MAC address This parameter is only applicable when the radio is part of a Protected Station. This RF Interface MAC address is used to define the MAC address of the Protection Switch. This address is entered in the factory. Both Protected Station radios read and use this MAC address. This MAC address entry will only be used by the software if it detects that the factory MAC address set in the internal EPROM of the protected switch is corrupted for some reason, otherwise the software will ignore the MAC address entered by the user. The RF interface MAC address is used for registration process only. For example, in a remote Protected Station, both radios share the same RF MAC address and a single entry of the remote Protected Station will be presented in network table (Network Status > Network Table). The Protection Switch RF Interface MAC address is shown on the Protection Switch label:

Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO PRIMARY / SECONDARY CONFIGURATION See Maintenance > Advanced on page 217 for parameter details. PRIMARY / SECONDARY MAINTENANCE FILES See Maintenance > Advanced on page 217 for parameter details. Managing the Radio | 301 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 302 | Managing the Radio Events The Events menu contains the setup and management of the alarms, alarm events and traps. Protected Station: Events > Alarm Summary There are two types of events that can be generated on the Aprisa SR+ radio. These are:

1. Alarm Events Alarm Events are generated to indicate a problem on the radio. 2. Informational Events Informational Events are generated to provide information on key activities that are occurring on the radio. These events do not indicate an alarm on the radio and are used to provide information only. See Alarm Types and Sources on page 368 for a complete list of events. PRIMARY / SECONDARY ALARM SUMMARY See Events > Alarm Summary on page 222 for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Protected Station: Events > Primary History Managing the Radio | 303 PRIMARY EVENT HISTORY See Events > Event History on page 223 for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 304 | Managing the Radio Protected Station: Events > Secondary History SECONDARY EVENT HISTORY See Events > Event History on page 223 for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 305 Software The Software menu contains the setup and management of the system software including network software distribution and activation on a protected station. Single Radio Software Upgrade The radio software can be upgraded on a single radio single Aprisa SR+ radio (see Single Radio Software Upgrade on page 362). This process would only be used if the radio was a replacement or a new station in an existing network. Network Software Upgrade The radio software can be upgraded on an entire Aprisa SR+ radio network remotely over the radio link

(see Network Software Upgrade on page 358). This process involves the following steps:

1. Transfer the new software to base station primary radio with Protected Station: Software > Primary File Transfer. 2. File Transfer the new software to base station secondary radio with Protected Station: Software >

Secondary File Transfer. 3. Using the Software Manual Lock, manually lock all protected remotes to the currently active radio

(this is necessary to prevent automatic switching during the distribution and activation process). 4. Distribute the new software to all remote stations with Protected Station: Software > Remote Distribution. Note: The software pack in the base station active radio is used for distribution. 5. Activate of the new software on remote stations with Protected Station: Software > Remote Activation. 6. Finally, activate the new software on the base station primary and secondary radios. Note: activating the software will reboot the radio which will reset the Software Manual Lock to Automatic. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 306 | Managing the Radio Protected Station: Software > Summary This page provides a summary of the software versions installed on the radio, the setup options and the status of the File Transfers. PRIMARY / SECONDARY SOFTWARE VERSIONS See Protected Station: Software > Primary File Transfer and Protected Station: Software > Secondary File Transfer for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Protected Station: Software > Primary File Transfer This page provides the mechanism to transfer new software from a file source into the primary radio. Managing the Radio | 307 SETUP FILE TRANSFER FOR PRIMARY UNIT Direction This parameter sets the direction of file transfer. In this software version, the only choice is To Primary Radio. Method This parameter sets the method of file transfer. Option Function Primary USB Transfer Transfers the software from the USB flash drive to the primary radio. FTP HTTP Transfers the software from an FTP server to the primary radio. Transfers the software from a PC to the primary radio. Transfer from Secondary Unit Transfers the software from the secondary radio to the primary radio. PRIMARY FILE TRANSFER STATUS See Software > File Transfer on page 238 for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 308 | Managing the Radio To transfer software into the Aprisa SR+ primary radio:

Primary USB Transfer Method 1. Unzip the software release files in to the root directory of a USB flash drive. 2. Insert the USB flash drive into the primary radio host port

. 3. Click on Start Transfer. 4. When the transfer is completed, remove the USB flash drive from the primary radio host port. If the SuperVisor USB Boot Upgrade setting is set to Disabled (see USB Boot Upgrade on page 237), the USB flash drive doesnt need to be removed as the radio wont try to load from it. 5. Go to Protected Station: Software > Manager on page 313 to activate the Software Pack. The radio will reboot automatically. FTP Method 1. Unzip the software release files in to a temporary directory. 2. Open the FTP server and point it to the temporary directory. 3. Enter the FTP server IP address, Username and password into SuperVisor. 4. Click on Start Transfer. 5. Go to Protected Station: Software > Manager on page 313 to activate the Software Pack. The radio will reboot automatically. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Transfer from Secondary Unit 1. Select Transfer from Secondary Unit. 2. Click on Start Transfer. Managing the Radio | 309 3. Go to Protected Station: Software > Manager on page 313 to activate the Software Pack. The radio will reboot automatically. If the file transfer fails, check the Event History page (see Protected Station: Events > Secondary History on page 304) for more details of the transfer. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 310 | Managing the Radio Protected Station: Software > Secondary File Transfer This page provides the mechanism to transfer new software from a file source into the secondary radio. SETUP FILE TRANSFER FOR SECONDARY UNIT Direction This parameter sets the direction of file transfer. In this software version, the only choice is To Secondary Radio. Method This parameter sets the method of file transfer. Option Function Secondary USB Transfer Transfers the software from the USB flash drive to the secondary radio. FTP HTTP Transfers the software from an FTP server to the secondary radio. Transfers the software from a PC to the secondary radio. Transfer from Primary Unit Transfers the software from the primary radio to the secondary radio. SECONDARY FILE TRANSFER STATUS See Software > File Transfer on page 238 for parameter details. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 311 To transfer software into the Aprisa SR+ secondary radio:

Secondary USB Transfer Method 1. Unzip the software release files in to the root directory of a USB flash drive. 2. Insert the USB flash drive into the secondary radio host port

. 3. Click on Start Transfer. 4. When the transfer is completed, remove the USB flash drive from the secondary radio host port. If the SuperVisor USB Boot Upgrade setting is set to Disabled (see USB Boot Upgrade on page 237), the USB flash drive doesnt need to be removed as the radio wont try to load from it. 5. Go to Protected Station: Software > Manager on page 313 to activate the Software Pack. The radio will reboot automatically. FTP Method 1. Unzip the software release files in to a temporary directory. 2. Open the FTP server and point it to the temporary directory. 3. Enter the FTP server IP address, Username and password into SuperVisor. 3. Click on Start Transfer. 4. Go to Protected Station: Software > Manager on page 313 to activate the Software Pack. The radio will reboot automatically. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 312 | Managing the Radio Transfer from Primary Unit 1. Select Transfer from Primary Unit. 2. Click on Start Transfer. 3. Go to Protected Station: Software > Manager on page 313 to activate the Software Pack. The radio will reboot automatically. If the file transfer fails, check the Event History page (see Protected Station: Events > Primary History on page 303) for more details of the transfer. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 313 Protected Station: Software > Manager This page summaries and manages the software versions available in the primary and secondary radios. The manager is predominantly used to activate new software on single radios. Network activation is performed with Protected Station: Software > Remote Activation. Both the previous software (if available) and Software Pack versions can be activated on each radio from this page. PRIMARY / SECONDARY CURRENT SOFTWARE Version This parameter displays the software version running on the radio. PRIMARY / SECONDARY PREVIOUS SOFTWARE Version This parameter displays the software version that was running on the radio prior to the current software being activated. Status This parameter displays the status of the software version running on the radio. Option Active Inactive Function The software is operating the radio. The software is not operating the radio but could be re-activated if required. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 314 | Managing the Radio PRIMARY / SECONDARY SOFTWARE PACK Version This parameter displays the software pack version available for distribution on base station and activate on all stations. Status This parameter displays the status of the software pack version. Option Available Activating Unavailable Activate Function On the base station, the software pack is available for distribution. On all stations, the software pack is available for activation. The software pack is activating in the radio. There is no software pack loaded into the radio. See Software > Manager on page 242 for the activation options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 315 Protected Station: Software > Remote Distribution This page provides the mechanism to distribute software to all remote protected stations into the Aprisa SR+ network (network) and then activate it. The Software Pack loaded into the base station with the file transfer process (see Protected Station:

Software > Primary File Transfer on page 307) is distributed via the radio link to all remote stations from the active radio. The distribution process is monitored from this page. When all remote stations receive the Software Pack version, the software can be remotely activated on all remote stations. This page is only available when the radio is configured as a Base Station. REMOTE SOFTWARE DISTRIBUTION Software Pack Version This parameter displays the software pack version available for distribution on base station and activate on all stations. Status This parameter displays the status of the software pack version. If a Software Pack is not available, the status will display Unavailable and the software distribution mechanism will not work. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 316 | Managing the Radio Start Transfer This parameter when activated distributes (broadcasts) the new Software Pack to all remote stations in the network. Note: The distribution of software to remote stations does not stop customer traffic from being transferred. However, due to the volume of traffic, the software distribution process may affect customer traffic. Software distribution traffic is classified as management traffic but does not use the Ethernet management priority setting. Software distribution traffic priority has a fixed priority setting of very low. To distribute software to remote stations:

This process assumes that a Software Pack has been loaded into the base station with the file transfer process (see Protected Station: Software > Primary File Transfer on page 307). 1. To ensure that the Network Table is up to date, it is recommended running the node discover function

(see Discover Nodes on page 218). 2. Click on Start Transfer. Note: This process could take anywhere between 40 minutes and several hours depending on channel size, Ethernet Management Priority setting and the amount of customer traffic on the network. Result Function Over the Air Transfer Progress The percentage of the software pack that has been broadcast to the remote radios. Poll Remote Locations X is the number of radios polled to determine the number of standby radios. Y is the number of remote radios registered with the base station. Transfer software to remote standby radios X is the number of standby radios with the new software version. Y is the number of standby radios requiring the new software version. 3. When the distribution is completed, activate the software with the Remote Software Activation. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 317 Pause Transfer This parameter when activated, pauses the Over the Air Transfer Process and shows the distribution status. The distribution process will continue from where it was paused with Resume Transfer. Cancel Transfer This parameter when activated, cancels the Over the Air Transfer Process immediately. During the distribution process, it is possible to navigate away from this page and come back to it to check progress. The SuperVisor session will not timeout. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 318 | Managing the Radio Protected Station: Software > Remote Activation This page provides the mechanism to activate software on all remote protected stations. The Software Pack has been loaded into the base station with the file transfer process (see Protected Station: Software > Primary File Transfer on page 307) and distributed via the radio link to all remote stations from the active radio. When all remote stations receive the Software Pack version, the software can be remotely activated on all remote stations. The activation process is monitored by this page. This page is only available when the radio is configured as a Base Station. REMOTE SOFTWARE ACTIVATION When the software pack version has been distributed to all the remote stations, the software is then activated in all the remote stations with this command. If successful, then activate the software pack in the base station to complete the network upgrade. Version This parameter displays the software version for activation. The default version is the software pack version but any valid software version can be entered in the format n.n.n. Activation Type This parameter sets when the software pack activation will occur. Option Now Date & Time Function Activates the software pack now. Activates the software pack at the Date & Time set in the following parameter. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 319 Activation Date & Time This parameter sets the Date & Time when the software pack activation will occur. This setting can be any future date and 24 hour time. Skip Confirmation Step This parameter when enabled skips the confirmation step during the activation process. Normally, the confirmation step will require use intervention to accept the confirmation which will halt the activation process. Skipping the confirmation will enable the activation process to continue without use intervention. To activate software in remote stations:

This process assumes that a Software Pack has been loaded into the base station with the file transfer process (see Software > File Transfer on page 238) and that distributed to all remote radios in the network. Note: Do not navigate SuperVisor away from this page during the activation process (SuperVisor can lose PC focus). 1. Enter the Software Pack version (if different from displayed version). 2. See Software > Manager on page 242 for the activation options. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 320 | Managing the Radio The remote stations will be polled to determine which radios require activation:

Result Function (X of Y) Remote Radios Polled for Partners X is the number of radios polled to determine the number of protected stations in the network. Y is the number of remote radios registered with the base station. Remote Radios Polled for New Version X is the number of radios polled to determine the number of radios that contain the new software version. Y is the number of remote radios registered with the base station. Remote Radios Activated X is the number of radios that contain the new software version and have been activated. Y is the number of radios that contain the new software version and can be activated. Remote Radios On New Version X is the number of radios that has been successfully activated and now running the new version of software. Y is the number of radios that the activation command was executed on. When the activation is ready to start:

3. Click on OK to start the activation process or Cancel to quit. The page will display the progress of the activation. The example shows that during the activation process there were exceptions that may need to be investigated. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO When all the remote radios have been activated, the base station radio must now be activated with (see Software > Manager on page 242). Managing the Radio | 321 4. Click on OK to start the activation on the base station. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 322 | Managing the Radio Command Line Interface The Aprisa SR+ has a Command Line Interface (CLI) which provides basic product setup and configuration. This can be useful if you need to confirm the radios IP address, for example. You can password-protect the Command Line Interface to prevent unauthorized users from modifying radio settings. This interface can be accessed via an Ethernet Port (RJ45), the Management Port (USB micro type B) or the USB host port with a USB converter to RS-232 convertor. Connecting to the Management Port A USB Cable USB A to USB micro B, 1m is provided with each radio. 1. Connect the USB A to your computer USB port and the USB micro B to the management port of the Aprisa SR+ (MGMT). 2. Unzip the file USB Serial Driver CP210x_VCP_Windows.zip to a temporary location and install the appropriate driver on your computer. This file is on the Information and setup CD supplied with the radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 3. Go to your computer device manager (Win 7: Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Device Manager) 4. Click on Ports (COM & LPT) 5. Make a note of the COM port which has been allocated to the Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge (COM3 in the example below) Managing the Radio | 323 6. Open HyperTerminal or an alternative type of terminal Emulator program e.g. TeraTerm or Putty. HyperTerminal Example 7. Enter a name for the connection (Aprisa SR+ CLI for example) and click OK. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 324 | Managing the Radio 8. Select the COM port from the Connect Using drop-down box that was allocated to the UART USB. 9. Set the COM port settings as follows:

10. Click OK. The HyperTerminal window will open. 11. Press the Enter key to initiate the session. 12. Login to the Aprisa SR+ CLI with a default Username admin and Password admin. The Aprisa SR+ CLI menu is shown:

Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Managing the Radio | 325 CLI Commands To enter a CLI command:

1. Type the first few characters of the command and hit Tab. This auto completes the command. 2. Enter the command string and enter. Note: All CLI commands are case sensitive. The top level CLI command list is displayed by typing a ? at the command prompt. The following is a list of the top level CLI commands and their usage:

CLI Command Usage adduser browser cd clear config debug adduser [-g <password aging>] [-a <account aging>] [-i <role>] <userName> <userPassword>

browser <state(STR)>

cd <changeMode(STR)>

Clears the screen config userdefault save restore factorydefault restore set subsystem param(INT) level param(INT) get clear subsystem param(INT) level param(INT) help log dump clear deleteuser deleteuser <userName>

editpasswd editpasswd <oldpassword> <newpassword>

edituser edituser [-p <password>] [-g <password aging>] [-a <account aging>] [-i]

get list get [-m <mib name>] [-n <module name>] <attribute name> [indexes]

list <tablename>

logout Logs out from the CLI ls pwd Displays the next level menu items Displays the current working directory reboot Reboots the radio rohc set who stats show clear set [-m <mib name> ] [-n <module name>] <attribute name> <attribute set value> [indexes]

Shows the users currently logged into the radio Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 326 | Managing the Radio Viewing the CLI Terminal Summary At the command prompt, type:

cd APRISASR-MIB-4RF MPA APRISASR-MIB-4RF >>ls Terminal Changing the Radio IP Address with the CLI At the command prompt, type set termEthController1IpAddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO In-Service Commissioning | 327 8. In-Service Commissioning Before You Start When you have finished installing the hardware, RF and the traffic interface cabling, the system is ready to be commissioned. Commissioning the radio is a simple process and consists of:

1. Powering up the radios. 2. Configuring all radios in the network using SuperVisor. 3. Aligning the antennas. 4. Testing that the links are operating correctly. 5. Connecting up the client or user interfaces. What You Will Need Appropriately qualified commissioning staff at both ends of each link. Safety equipment appropriate for the antenna location at both ends of each link. Communication equipment, that is, mobile phones or two-way radios. SuperVisor software running on an appropriate laptop, computer, or workstation at the base station radio. Tools to facilitate loosening and re-tightening the antenna pan and tilt adjusters. Predicted receiver input levels and fade margin figures from the radio link budget. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 328 | In-Service Commissioning Antenna Alignment A base station omni-directional collinear antenna has a vertical polarization. The remote station yagi antennas must also have vertical polarization. Aligning the Antennas Align the remote station yagi antennas by making small adjustments while monitoring the RSSI. The Aprisa SR+ has a Test Mode which presents a real time visual display of the RSSI on the front panel LEDs. This can be used to adjust the antenna for optimum signal strength (see Test Mode on page 44). Note: Low gain antennas need less adjustment in elevation as they are simply aimed at the horizon. They should always be panned horizontally to find the peak signal. 1. Press and hold the TEST button on the radio LED panel until all the LEDs flash green (about 3 - 5 seconds). Note: The time for the LEDs to display the RSSI result is variable, depending on the network traffic, and can be up to 5 seconds. Small antenna adjustments should be made and then wait for the display to refresh. The RSSI poll refresh rate can be set with the SuperVisor command Transmit Period (see Maintenance > Test Mode on page 210). 2. Move the antenna through a complete sweep horizontally (pan). Note down the RSSI reading for all the peaks in RSSI that you discover in the pan. 3. Move the antenna to the position corresponding to the maximum RSSI value obtained during the pan. Move the antenna horizontally slightly to each side of this maximum to find the two points where the RSSI drops slightly. 4. Move the antenna halfway between these two points and tighten the clamp. 5. If the antenna has an elevation adjustment, move the antenna through a complete sweep (tilt) vertically. Note down the RSSI reading for all the peaks in RSSI that you discover in the tilt. 6. Move the antenna to the position corresponding to the maximum RSSI value obtained during the tilt. Move the antenna slightly up and then down from the maximum to find the two points where the RSSI drops slightly. 7. Move the antenna halfway between these two points and tighten the clamp. 8. Recheck the pan (steps 2-4) and tighten all the clamps firmly. 9. To exit Test Mode, press and hold the TEST button until all the LEDs flash red (about 3 5 seconds). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Product Options | 329 9. Product Options Data Interface Ports The standard Aprisa SR+ provides multiple interface port options for combinations of Ethernet and RS-232 serial for a total of four interface ports i.e. port options of 2E2S, 3E1S or 4E0S, where E=Ethernet, S=Serial port. The product shown below is the two Ethernet ports plus two RS-232 serial ports. Interface Port Option Part Number 4 Ethernet ports and no RS-232 serial ports APSQ-N400-SSC-HD-40-ENAA 3 Ethernet ports and 1 RS-232 serial port APSQ-N400-SSC-HD-31-ENAA 2 Ethernet ports and 2 RS-232 serial ports APSQ-N400-SSC-HD-22-ENAA Note: The optional serial interface is always available via the USB to serial converter. Full Duplex Base Station The Aprisa SR+ supports Full Duplex base / master station hardware. This option works with half duplex repeater / remote radios. The base / master station can transmit while simultaneously receiving from the repeater /remote radios. Example of a 400 MHz full duplex Aprisa SR+. Part Number Part Description APSQ-N400-SSC-FD-22-ENAA 4RF SR+, BR, 400-470 MHz, SSC, Full Duplex, 2E2S, EN, STD Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 330 | Product Options Protected Station The Aprisa SR+ Protected Station is fully monitored hot-standby and fully hot-swappable product providing radio and user interface protection for Aprisa SR+ radios. The RF ports and interface ports from the active radio are switched to the standby radio if there is a failure in the active radio. Option Example Part Number Part Description APSQ-R400-SSC-HD-22-ENAA 4RF SR+, PS, 400-470 MHz, SSC, Half Duplex, 2E2S, EN, STD The Aprisa SR+ Protected Station is comprised of an Aprisa SR+ Protection Switch and two standard Aprisa SR+ radios mounted in a 2U rack mounting chassis. All interfaces (RF, data, etc.) are continually monitored on both the active and standby radio to ensure correct operation. The standby radio can be replaced without impacting traffic flow on the active radio. The Aprisa SR+ radios can be any of the currently available Aprisa SR+ radio frequency bands, channel sizes or interface port options. The Aprisa SR+ Protected Station can operate as a base station, repeater station or remote station. The protection behaviour and switching criteria between the active and standby radios is identical for the three configurations. By default, the Aprisa SR+ Protected Station is configured with the left hand radio (A) designated as the primary radio and the right hand radio (B) designated as the secondary radio. Each radio is configured with its own unique IP and MAC address and the address of the partner radio. On power-up, the primary radio will assume the active role and the secondary radio will assume the standby role. If, for some reason, only one radio is powered on it will automatically assume the active role. Both the Aprisa SR+ Protected Station primary radio and secondary radio must be operating on the same software version. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Product Options | 331 Protected Ports The protected ports are located on the protected station front panel. Switching occurs between the active radio ports and the standby radio ports based on the switching criteria described below. The protected ports include:

Antenna ports ANT/TX and RX (if dual antenna ports used) Ethernet ports (depending on interface port option purchased) Serial ports (depending on interface port option purchased) Operation In hot-standby normal operation, the active radio carries all RS-232 serial and Ethernet traffic over the radio link and the standby radio transmit is on with its transmitter connected to an internal load. Both radios are continually monitored for correct operation including the transmitter and receiver and alarms are raised if an event occurs. The active radio sends regular keep alive messages to the standby radio to indicate it is operating correctly. In the event of a failure on the active radio, the RF link and user interface traffic is automatically switched to the standby radio. The failed radio can then be replaced in the field without interrupting user traffic. Switch Over The switch-over to the standby radio can be initiated automatically, on fault detection, or manually via the Hardware Manual Lock switch on the Protection Switch or the Software Manual Lock from SuperVisor. Additionally, it is possible to switch-over the radios remotely without visiting the station site, via the remote control connector on the front of the Protection Switch. On detection of an alarm fault the switch-over time is less than 0.5 seconds. Some alarms may take up to 30 seconds to be detected depending on the configuration options selected. The Protection Switch has a switch guard mechanism to prevent protection switch oscillation. If a switch-

over has occurred, subsequent switch-over triggers will be blocked if the guard time has not elapsed. The guard time starts at 20 seconds and doubles each switch-over to a maximum of 320 seconds and halves after a period of two times the last guard time with no protection switch-overs. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 332 | Product Options Switching Criteria The Protected Station will switch-over operation from the active to the standby radio if any of the configurable alarm events occur, or if there is a loss of the keep alive signal from the active radio. It is possible to configure the alarm events which will trigger the switch-over. It is also possible to prevent an alarm event triggering a switch-over through the configuration of blocking criteria. Any of the following alarm events can be set to trigger or prevent switching from the active radio to the standby radio (see Events > Events Setup on page 224). PA current Tx reverse power Tx AGC Temperature threshold Thermal shutdown RSSI Threshold Rx CRC errors RX Synthesizer Not Locked RF no receive data Port 1 Eth no receive data Port 2 Eth no receive data Port 1 Eth data receive errors Port 2 Eth data receive errors Port 1 Eth data transmit errors Port 2 Eth data transmit errors Port 3 Eth no receive data Port 4 Eth no receive data Port 3 Eth data receive errors Port 4 Eth data receive errors Port 3 Eth data transmit errors Port 4 Eth data transmit errors Port 1 Serial Data No RX Data Port 2 Serial Data RX Data Port 1 Serial Data RX Errors Port 2 Serial Data RX Errors USB Port Serial Data No RX Data USB Port Serial Data RX Errors Component failure Calibration failure Configuration not supported Protection Hardware Failure Alarm Input 1 Alarm Input 2 It will not attempt to switch-over to a standby radio which has power failure. It will also not switch over to a standby radio with an active alarm event which has been configured as a blocking criteria. Switch-over will be initiated once either of these conditions is rectified, i.e. power is restored or the alarm is cleared. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Monitored Alarms The following alarms are monitored by default on the active / standby radio. The monitored alarms are dependent on the Protection Type selected. Product Options | 333 Protection Type Alarm Type All Protection Types Redundant Monitored Hot Standby Monitored on Active Radio Monitored on Standby Radio Monitored on Monitored on Standby Radio TX Standby Radio RX PA Current PA Driver Current PA Stability TX AGC TX Forward Power TX Reverse Power Temperature Threshold TX Synthesizer Not Locked Thermal Shutdown RSSI Threshold RX Synthesizer Not Locked RX CRC Errors RF No Receive Data Port1 ETH No Receive Data Port1 ETH Data Receive Errors Port1 ETH Data Transmit Errors Port2 ETH No Receive Data Port2 ETH Data Receive Errors Port2 ETH Data Transmit Errors Port3 ETH No Receive Data Port3 ETH Data Receive Errors Port3 ETH Data Transmit Errors Port4 ETH No Receive Data Port4 ETH Data Receive Errors Port4 ETH Data Transmit Errors Port1 Serial Data No RX Data Port1 Serial Data RX Errors Port2 Serial Data No RX Data Port2 Serial Data RX Errors USB Port Serial Data No RX Data USB Port Serial Data No RX Errors Component Failure Protection SW Manual Lock Protection HW Manual Lock Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 334 | Product Options Protection Type Alarm Type All Protection Types Redundant Monitored Hot Standby Monitored on Active Radio Monitored on Standby Radio Monitored on Monitored on Standby Radio TX Standby Radio RX Modem FEC Disable Modem ACM Lock Alarm Input 1 Alarm Input 2 Protection Peer Comms Lost Protection Hardware Failure VDC Power Supply 3.3 Volts Power Supply 5.0 Volts Power Supply 7.2 Volts Power Supply 15.0 Volts Power Supply Configuration Management The Primary and Secondary radios are managed with the embedded web-based management tool, SuperVisor, by using either the Primary or Secondary IP address. Configuration changes in one of the radios will automatically be reflected in the partner radio. To ensure all remote stations are registered to the correct (active) base station, changes to the Network Table are automatically synchronized from the active radio to the standby radio. The Network Table is only visible on the active radio. This synchronization does not occur if the Hardware Manual Lock is active. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Product Options | 335 Hardware Manual Lock The Hardware Manual Lock switch on the Protection Switch provides a manual override of the active /

standby radio. When this lock is activated, the selected radio (A or B) becomes the active radio regardless of the Software Manual Lock and the current switching or block criteria. When the lock is deactivated (set to the Auto position), the protection will become automatic and switching will be governed by normal switching and blocking criteria. The state of the switch is indicated by the three LEDs on the Protection Switch:

A LED Green Off B LED Locked LED State Off Green Off Off Auto - Radio A is active Auto - Radio B is active Green Off Orange Manual Lock to radio A Off Green Orange Manual Lock to radio B The Protection Switch also has a Software Manual Lock. The Hardware Manual Lock takes precedence over Software Manual Lock if both diagnostic functions are activated i.e. if the Software Manual Lock is set to Primary and the Hardware Manual Lock set to Secondary, the system will set the Secondary radio to Active. When a Hardware Manual Lock is deactivated (set to the Auto position), the Software Manual Lock is re-

evaluated and locks set appropriately. Remote Control The switch-over to the standby radio can be initiated via the Remote Control connector on the front of the Protection Switch. This control will only operate if the Hardware Manual Lock switch is set to the Auto position. The inputs are logic inputs with 4700 pullup to +3.3 VDC. They require a pull down to ground to activate the control. The ground potential is available on the connector (see Protection Switch Remote Control Connections on page 367). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 336 | Product Options L2 / L3 Protection Operation The Aprisa SR+ Protected Station has selectable L2 Bridge or L3 Router modes, with VLAN, QoS and L2/3/4 address filtering attributes. Each Radio is configured with its own unique IP and MAC address and partner radio address. On switch-over failure, the new active radio sends out a gratuitous ARP to update the MAC learning tables / ARP tables of upstream bridge/router for appropriate traffic flow. Hot-Swappable The two Aprisa SR+ radios are mounted on a pull-out tray to making it possible to replace a failed radio without interrupting user traffic. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Product Options | 337 Antenna and Duplexer Options Option 1 - single antenna without a duplexer In this configuration, a single antenna is used and connected directly to the Aprisa SR+ Protected Station TX/ANT (A/B side) TNC port on the front panel. In this option Protected Station can operate in:

Half duplex RF operation only If single frequency used, standby radio TX is OFF/Mute (as RX/TX on same connector). If dual frequency used, standby radio TX is ON, transmit to internal load for fault monitoring. Only the active radio receives the signal (single RX path) from the antenna. Option 2 - single antenna with a single duplexer In this configuration, a single antenna is used with a duplexer which is connected to the Aprisa SR+

Protected Station TX/ANT and RX (A/B side) TNC ports on the front panel. In this option, the Protected Station can operate in:

Half or full duplex RF operation Only dual frequency supported, where standby radio TX is ON, transmits to internal load for fault monitoring When the Protection Type is set to monitored hot standby (Terminal > Operating Mode), the standby radio RX/TX can be fault monitored. This mode has a 4 dB loss in RX sensitivity. When the Protection Type is set to redundant, the standby radio RX/TX will not be fault monitored. This mode has 1 dB loss in RX sensitivity. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 338 | Product Options Option 3 - dual antenna without a duplexer In this configuration, antenna redundancy is supported with dual antennas connected to the Aprisa SR+

Protected Station TX/ANT (A/B side) and TX/ANT (B side) TNC ports on the front panel. In this option, the Protected Station can operate in:

Half duplex RF operation only If single frequency used, standby radio RX (TX is off) cant be monitored as it will receive the active TX. If dual frequency used, and the Protection Type is set to monitored hot standby (Terminal > Operating Mode), the standby radio RX/TX can be fault monitored. This mode has a 1 dB loss in RX sensitivity. If dual frequency used, and the Protection Type is set to redundant, the standby radio RX/TX will not be fault monitored. Option 4 - dual antenna with dual duplexers In this configuration, antenna redundancy is supported with dual antennas connected via dual duplexers to the Aprisa SR+ Protected Station TX/ANT and RX (A/B side) TNC ports and TX/ANT and RX (B side) TNC ports on the front panel. In this option, the Protected Station can operate in:

Half or full duplex RF operation Only dual frequency When the Protection Type is set to monitored hot standby (Terminal > Operating Mode), the standby radio RX/TX can be fault monitored. This mode has a 1 dB loss in RX sensitivity. When the Protection Type is set to redundant, the standby radio RX/TX will not be fault monitored. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Installation Mounting The Aprisa SR+ Protected Station is designed to mount in a standard 19 inch rack. Product Options | 339 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 340 | Product Options Cabling The Aprisa SR+ Protected Station is delivered pre-cabled with power, interface, management and RF cables. There are two options for the pre-cabled Protected Station (see Antenna and Duplexer Options):

1. Standard Protected Station- suitable for options #1 and #2 (single antenna operation) Part Number Part Description APSQ-R400-SSC-HD-22-ENAA 4RF SR+, PS, 400-470 MHz, SSC, Half Duplex, 2E2S, EN, STD 2. Dual Antenna Protected Station- suitable for options #3 and #4 (dual antenna operation) Part Number Part Description APSQ-R400-SSC-HD-22-ENDA 4RF SR+, PS, 400-470 MHz, SSC, Half Duplex, 2E2S, EN, Dual Ant Each option (per ordered part number) is pre-cable configured as the following:

Protected Station Wiring Internal pre-cabled Protected Station wiring setting Radio / TNC Port RF Switch Port Standard Protected Station Radio A TX/ANT

(single antenna operation) Radio A RX Radio B TX/ANT Radio B RX Dual Antenna Protected Station Radio A TX/ANT

(dual antenna operation) Radio A RX Radio B TX/ANT Radio B RX TX/ANTA RXA TX/ANTB RXB TX/ANTA RXA TXB2 RXB2 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Users can change an existing Protected Station from one option to the other option by following the procedure:

To change a pre-cabled Protected Station from one option to the other option:

1. Disconnect the power supply, antenna/s, interface cables and any other connections Product Options | 341 2. Remove the Protected Station shelf from the rack 3. Turn the Protected Station shelf upside down 4. Remove the securing screws and remove the bottom panel 5. Unscrew the four coaxial cable clamp screws 6. Swap the two cables and position them in the appropriate connector ports 7. Refit the coaxial cable clamp and tighten the four clamp screws 8. Refit the bottom panel and tighten the two screws 9. Replace the shelf in the rack Single Antenna Operation Dual Antenna Operation Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 342 | Product Options Power The external power source must be connected to both the A and B Molex 2 pin male power connectors located on the protected station front panel. The A power input powers the A radio and the B power input powers the B radio. The protection switch is powered from the A power input or the B power input (whichever is available). The maximum combined power consumption is 42 Watts for 10 W transmit peak power. The Aprisa SR+ Protected station has two DC power options, 13.8 VDC and 48 VDC. 13.8 VDC The 13.8 VDC nominal external power source can operate over the voltage range of +10.5 to +30 V DC

(negative earth). An example of the 13.8 VDC option part number is:

Part Number Part Description APSQ-R400-SSC-HD-22-ENAA 4RF SR+, PS, 400-470 MHz, SSC, Half Duplex, 2E2S, EN, STD 48 VDC The 48 VDC nominal external power source can operate over the voltage range of 18 to 60 V DC (floating). An example of the 48 VDC option part number is:

Part Number Part Description APSQ-R400-SSC-HD-22-ENAB 4RF SR+, PS, 400-470 MHz, SSC, Half Duplex, 2E2S, EN, 48VDC Alarms The protection switch provides access to both the A radio and B radio Alarm Interfaces (see Alarm Interface Connections on page 366 for the connector pinout). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Maintenance Product Options | 343 Changing the Protected Station IP Addresses To change the IP address of a Protected Station radio:

1. Change the IP address of either or both the Primary Radio and Secondary radio (see Protected Station: IP > IP Setup on page 289). Changes in these parameters are automatically changed in the partner radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 344 | Product Options Creating a Protected Station When a Protected Station is ordered from 4RF, it will be delivered complete with radios installed, pre-

cabled and pre-configured for Redundant operation. The following process will not be required. This process is to create a protected station from two individual SR+ radios and a new spare Aprisa SR+

Protection Switch. It assumes that the SR+ radios are currently setup for non-protected operation. 1. Set the protection type and partner IP address of the SR+ radio A with SuperVisor 'Terminal >

Operating Mode'. Set this radio Protection Unit to primary. 2. Set the protection type and partner IP address of the secondary SR+ radio B with SuperVisor Terminal

> Operating Mode'. Set this radio Protection Unit to secondary. 3. Switch off the radios and place the two radios in the new spare Aprisa SR+ Protection Switch. 4. Ensuring that the cables are not crossed over, plug in the interface port cables, the Alarm and Protect port cables and the power connector to both the radios. Secure the power connectors with the two screws. 5. Power on the Protected Station. 6. Connect to either one of the radios via SuperVisor. This will start up SuperVisor in Single Session Management mode. 7. The user can now configure the Protected Station as required. Replacing a Protected Station Faulty Radio Replacing a faulty radio in a Protected Station can be achieved without disruption to traffic. Assuming that the primary radio is active and the secondary radio is faulty and needs replacement:

1. Ensure the replacement radio has the same version of software installed as the primary radio. If necessary, upgrade the software in the replacement radio. 2. Set the RF Interface MAC Address (see Protected Station: Maintenance > Advanced on page 300). This MAC address is present on chassis label. 3. Using SuperVisor > Maintenance > Advanced Save Configuration to USB and Restore Configuration from USB operation, clone the primary radios configuration to the replacement radio. 4. Configure the replacement radio as the secondary radio and setup the IP address and other protection parameters (see Terminal > Operating Mode on page 94). 5. Set the Hardware Manual Lock switch to make the primary radio active. 6. Unplug the interface port cables, the Alarm and Protect port cables and the power connector from the faulty radio being replaced. The two screws securing the power connector will need to be undone. 7. Carefully remove the faulty radio from the protection switch. 8. Install the replacement radio into the protection switch. 9. Ensuring that the cables are not crossed over, plug in the interface port cables, the Alarm and Protect port cables and the power connector to the replacement radio. Secure the power connector with the two screws. 10. Power on the replacement radio and wait for it to become standby. 11. Set the Hardware Manual Lock switch to the Auto position. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Product Options | 345 Replacing a Faulty Power Supply Replacing one of the power supplies can be achieved without disruption to traffic. If a power supply has failed, the associated radio will have failed which will have caused the protection switch to switch-over to the other radio. It will not have switched back unless the power was restored and another problem occurred which caused a switch-over. 1. If the A power supply is faulty, ensure that the B radio is active (whether it be the primary or secondary radio). If the B power supply is faulty, ensure that the A radio is active (whether it be the primary or secondary radio). 2. Replace the faulty power supply. Replacing a Faulty Protection Switch Note: Replacing a faulty Protection Switch will disrupt traffic. Move the radios, the interface cables and the power cables to the replacement Protection Switch. On both Protected Station radios:

1. Power on the radio and wait for it to become ready. 2. Using SuperVisor > Maintenance > Advanced, enter the RF Interface MAC address shown on the Protection Switch label (see Protected Station: Maintenance > Advanced on page 300). 3. Using SuperVisor > Maintenance > Advanced, Decommission the node (see Decommission Node on page 218) and then Discover the Nodes (see Discover Nodes on page 218). Ensure that the Hardware Manual Lock switch is set to the Auto position. The Aprisa SR+ Protected Station is now ready to operate. Spares The Aprisa SR+ Protection Switch is available as spare parts for the three radio interface port options:

Part Number APST-XPSW-X22 APST-XPSW-X31 APST-XPSW-X40 Part Description 4RF SR+ Spare, Protection Switch, 2E2S 4RF SR+ Spare, Protection Switch, 3E1S 4RF SR+ Spare, Protection Switch, 4E0S Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 346 | Product Options Data Driven Protected Station The Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station provides radio and RS-232 serial port user interface protection for Aprisa SR+ radios. Example Part:

Part Number Part Description APSQ-D400-SSC-HD-22-ENAA 4RF SR+, PD, 400-470 MHz, SSC, Half Dup, 2E2S, EN, STD The Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station shown is comprised of two standard Aprisa SR+ setup as dual antenna port, half duplex radios and two external duplexers mounted on 19" rack mounting shelves. The Aprisa SR+ radios can be any of the currently available Aprisa SR+ radio frequency band options. By default, the Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station is configured with the left hand radio (A) designated as the primary radio and the right hand radio (B) designated as the secondary radio. Each radio is configured with its own unique IP and MAC address and the address of the partner radio. On power-up, the primary radio will assume the active role and the secondary radio will assume the standby role. If, for some reason, only one radio is powered on it will automatically assume the active role. Operation The active radio is determined explicitly by which radio receives data on its RS-232 serial port input from the interface. The active radio carries all RS-232 serial traffic over its radio link and the standby radio is unused with its transmitter turned off. If data is received on the RS-232 serial port interface input of the standby radio, it will immediately become the active radio and the radio which was active will become the standby radio. Over The Air Compatibility If the Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station is to be used in a network of New Aprisa SR radios, the SR Compatible option must be enabled (see SR Compatible on page 95). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Product Options | 347 Switch Over The active radio is determined explicitly by which radio receives data on its RS-232 serial port. The switching and blocking criteria used for the standard Protected Station do not apply. This means that events and alarms on the unit are not used as switching criteria. Configuration Management The Primary and Secondary radios are managed with the embedded web-based management tool, SuperVisor (see Managing the Radio on page 67) by using either the Primary or Secondary IP address. Configuration changes in one of the radios will automatically be reflected in the partner radio. Changes to the Network Table are automatically synchronized from the active radio to the standby radio but the Network Table is only visible on the active radio. Power A +10.5 to +30 V DC external power source must be connected to both the A and B Phoenix Contact 2 pin male power connectors. The maximum combined power consumption is 42 Watts for 10 W transmit peak power. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 348 | Product Options Installation Mounting The Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station is designed to mount in a standard 19 rack on two 1U rack mounting shelves (total of 3RU). Cabling The Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station is delivered with the radios, duplexers, rack mounting shelves and interconnect cables. The set of interconnect cables is available as a spare part. Part Number APST-XPSC-ST6 Part Description 4RF SR+ Spare, Protection Switch Cables, Set Of 6 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Product Options | 349 Duplexer Kits The Aprisa SR+ product range contains Duplexer Kit accessories for use with Aprisa SR+ radios configured for Single Antenna Dual Port operation. Radio Duplexer Kits Example of part number: APSB-KDUP-400-B1-BR Part Number Description APSB-KDUP-135-N0-BR APSB-KDUP-320-A1-BR APSB-KDUP-400-B1-BR APSB-KDUP-450-M0-BR APSB-KDUP-450-P0-BR Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1x SR+ radio and 1x duplexer 1x N0 Duplexer 135 MHz, s4.6 MHz, p0.5 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a Aprisa SR+ radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1x SR+ radio and 1x duplexer 1x A1 Duplexer 300 MHz, s 5 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1x SR+ radio and 1x duplexer 1x B1 Duplexer 400 MHz, s 5 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1x SR+ radio and 1x duplexer 1x M0 Duplexer 450 MHz, s 5 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1 or 2 Aprisa SR+ radios and 1 duplexer 1x P0 Duplexer 450 MHz, s 3 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cab Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 350 | Product Options Part Number Description APSB-KDUP-928-G0-BR APSB-KDUP-928-G2-BR-MM APSB-KDUP-928-G2-BR APSB-KDUP-928-G3-BR APSB-KDUP-928-G3-BR-MM Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1x SR+ radio and 1x duplexer 1x G0 Duplexer 900 MHz, s 40 MHz, p 7 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack mid mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1x SR+ radio and 1x duplexer 1x G2 Duplexer 900 MHz, s 9 MHz, p 1 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1x SR+ radio and 1x duplexer 1x G2 Duplexer 900 MHz, s 9 MHz, p 1 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1x SR+ radio and 1x duplexer 1x G3 Duplexer 900 MHz, s5.5 MHz, p0.5 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ radio containing:

1x 1U 19" rack mid mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws to mount 1x SR+ radio and 1x duplexer 1x G3 Duplexer 900 MHz, s5.5 MHz, p0.5 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Protected Station Duplexer Kits Product Options | 351 Example of part number: APSB-KDUP-928-G2-PS Part Number Description APSB-KDUP-135-N0-PS Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x N0 Duplexer 135 MHz, s4.6 MHz, p0.5 MHz 2x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Rack front mounted APSB-KDUP-135-N0-PS-DA APSB-KDUP-320-A1-PS APSB-KDUP-320-A1-PS-DA APSB-KDUP-400-B1-PS-DA APSB-KDUP-400-B1-PS Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a dual antenna SR+ Protected Station containing:

2x N0 Duplexer 135 MHz, s4.6 MHz, p0.5 MHz 4x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Rack front mounted Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a Aprisa SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 1x A1 Duplexer 300 MHz, s 5 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 2x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a dual antenna Aprisa SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 2x A1 Duplexer 300 MHz, s 5 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 4x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a dual antenna SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 2x B1 Duplexers 400 MHz, s 5 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 4x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 1x B1 Duplexer 400 MHz, s 5 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 2x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 352 | Product Options Part Number Description APSB-KDUP-450-M0-PS APSB-KDUP-450-M0-PS-DA APSB-KDUP-450-P0-PS APSB-KDUP-450-P0-PS-DA APSB-KDUP-928-G0-PS APSB-KDUP-928-G2-PS APSB-KDUP-928-G2-PS-MM APSB-KDUP-928-G3-PS-MM APSB-KDUP-928-G3-PS Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 1x M0 Duplexer 450 MHz, s 5 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 2x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a dual antenna SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 2x M0 Duplexer 450 MHz, s 5 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 4x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 1x P0 Duplexer 450 MHz, s 3 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 2x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a dual antenna SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 2x P0 Duplexer 450 MHz, s 3 MHz, p 0.5 MHz 4x right angle TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 1x G0 Duplexer 900 MHz, s 40 MHz, p 7 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 590mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 1x G2 Duplexer 900 MHz, s 9 MHz, p 1 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 590mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 1U 19" rack mid mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 1x G2 Duplexer 900 MHz, s 9 MHz, p 1 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 590mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 2U 19" rack mid mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 1x G3 Duplexer 900 MHz, s5.5 MHz, p0.5 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ Duplexer Kit for a SR+ Protected Station containing:

1x 2U 19" rack front mount shelf with duplexer mounting brackets and screws 1x G3 Duplexer 900 MHz, s5.5 MHz, p0.5 MHz 2x TNC to SMA right angle 640mm cables Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Product Options | 353 USB RS-232 / RS-485 Serial Port The Aprisa SR+ USB host port is predominantly used for software upgrade and diagnostic reporting. However, it can also be used to provide an additional RS-232 DCE or RS-485 serial port for customer traffic. This is accomplished with a USB to RS-232 / RS-485 serial converter cable. This plugs into the USB host port connector and can be terminated with the required customer connector. This additional RS-232 / RS-485serial port is enabled with the SuperVisor mode setting in Serial Port Settings (see Serial > Port Setup on page 124). The Aprisa SR+ USB port has driver support for these USB serial converters. Other USB serial converters may not operate correctly. USB RS-232 / RS-485 operation The USB serial converter buffers the received data frames into 64 byte blocks separated by a small inter-

frame gap. For the majority of applications, this fragmentation of egress frames is not an issue. However, there are some applications that may be sensitive to the inter-frame gap, therefore, these applications need consideration. A 5 ms inter-frame is recommended for the applications that are sensitive to inter-frame gap timings. On a USB RS-232 port, Modbus RTU can operate up to 9600 bit/s with all packet sizes and up to 115200 bit/s if the packet size is less than 64 bytes. The standard RS-232 port is fully compatible with Modbus RTU at all baud rates. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 354 | Product Options USB RS-232 Cabling Options The following converter cables are available as Aprisa SR+ accessories to provide the customer interface. The kit contains a USB connector retention clip (see USB Retention Clip on page 355). 1. USB Converter to 1.8 metre multi-strand cable 6 wire for termination of customer connector Part Number Part Description APSB-KFCA-USB-23-MS-18 4RF SR+ Acc, Kit, Interface, USB Conv, RS-232, Multi-strand, 1.8m 2. USB converter to RJ45 female kit for USB to RS-232 DCE conversion. Part Number Part Description APSB-KFCA-USB-23-45-MF18 4RF SR+ Acc, Kit, Interface, USB Conv, RS-232, RJ45, Female, 1.8m 3. USB converter to DB9 female kit for USB to RS-232 DCE conversion. Part Number Part Description APSB-KFCA-USB-23-D9-MF18 4RF SR+ Acc, Kit, Interface, USB Conv, RS-232, DB9, Female, 1.8m USB RS-485 Cabling Options The following converter cable is available as an Aprisa SR+ accessory to provide the customer interface RS-

485 2 wire. The kit contains a USB connector retention clip (see USB Retention Clip on page 355). 1. USB Converter to 1.8 metre multi-strand cable 6 wire for termination of customer interface Part Number Part Description APSB-KFCA-USB-48-MS-18 4RF SR+ Acc, Kit, Interface, USB Conv, RS-485, Multi-strand, 1.8m Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO USB Retention Clip The USB Retention Clip attaches to the underside of the Aprisa SR+ enclosure adjacent to the USB connector. Product Options | 355 To attach the USB Retention Clip:

1. Clean the enclosure surface where the retention clip will attach with an alcohol based cleaner e.g. Isopropanol. 2. Peel off the retention clip protective backing. 3. Stick the clip onto the Aprisa SR+ enclosure ensuring that it aligns to the middle of the radio USB connector. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 10. Maintenance Maintenance | 357 No User-Serviceable Components There are no user-serviceable components within the radio. All hardware maintenance must be completed by 4RF or an authorized service centre. Do not attempt to carry out repairs to any boards or parts. Return all faulty radios to 4RF or an authorized service centre. For more information on maintenance and training, please contact 4RF Customer Services at support@4rf.com. CAUTION: Electro Static Discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy the sensitive electrical components in the radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 358 | Maintenance Software Upgrade A software upgrade can be performed on a single Aprisa SR+ radio or an entire Aprisa SR+ network. Network Software Upgrade This process allows customers to upgrade their Aprisa SR+ network from the central base station location without need for visiting remote sites. The Software Pack is loaded into the base station with the file transfer process (see Software > File Transfer on page 238) and distributed via the radio link to all remote stations. When all remote stations receive the Software Pack version, the software can be remotely activated on all remote stations. Non-Protected Network Upgrade Process This upgrade process is for upgrading the software on an entire Aprisa SR+ network from a non-protected base station. If there are protected remotes in the network, they must be locked to the current active radio. To upgrade the entire Aprisa SR+ network software:

1. Using File Transfer, load the software pack into the base station (see Software > File Transfer on page 238). The software can be transferred to the radio via an FTP transfer or from a USB flash drive. The Aprisa SR+ network file transfer operation is indicated in base station and remote stations by a flashing orange AUX LED. 2. Distribute the software to the entire network of remote radios (see Software > Remote Distribution on page 246). Note that the distribution process over the air will take some time, depending on RF and Transfer rate settings. The Aprisa SR+ network software distribution operation is indicated in base station and remote stations by a flashing orange MODE LED. Note: The distribution of software to remote stations does not stop customer traffic from being transferred. However, due to the volume of traffic, the software distribution process may affect customer traffic. Software distribution traffic is classified as management traffic but does not use the Ethernet management priority setting. Software distribution traffic priority has a fixed priority setting of very low. 3. Activate the software on the entire network of remote radios (see Software > Remote Activation on page 248). Note: When the new software activates on the remote radios, all link communication from the base station to the remote will be lost. The base station will attempt to re-establish connectivity to the remote radios for the new version verification but this will fail. However, when the new software activates on the remote radios, the remote radio will reboot automatically and link communication will restore when the base station software is activated. When the Remote Activation process gets to the Remote Radios On New Version step, dont wait for this to complete but proceed to step 4. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Maintenance | 359 4. Activate the software on the base station radio (see Software > Manager on page 242). 5. When the new software has been activated, remote stations will re-register with the base station. The remote stations software version can verified with Network Status > Network Table on page 271. 6. When the base station restarts with the new software, rediscover the nodes (see Discover Nodes on page 218). 7. Check that all remote radios are now running on the new software (see Network Status > Network Table on page 271). Note: The following steps will only be necessary if for some reason steps 1-7 did not operate correctly or if software activation is attempted before the distribution process ends or the remote radio was off during steps 1-7 and turns on later. Thus, the following steps will most likely not be required. 8. If step 7 shows that not all remote radios are running the latest software version, restore the base /

master station to the previous software version (see Software > Manager on page 242). 9. Attempt to re-establish connectivity to the remote radios that have failed to upgrade by navigating to and remotely managing the remote radios individually. 10. Navigate to the remote radio history log and review the logs to determine the reason for the failure to activate the new software version. 11. Take appropriate actions to address the reported issue. If connectivity restores with the failed remotes, repeat steps 2-7 if required. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 360 | Maintenance Protected Network Upgrade Process This upgrade process is for upgrading the software on an entire Aprisa SR+ network from a protected base station. This software upgrade can be achieved without disruption to traffic. Transferring the new software to the radios The software can be transferred to the radio via an FTP transfer or from a USB flash drive. 1. Using the Hardware Manual Lock switch (see Hardware Manual Lock on page 335), or the Software Manual Lock (see Lock Active To on page 295), force the secondary radio to active 2. Using File Transfer, load the software pack into the secondary radio (see Protected Station: Software

> Secondary File Transfer on page 310). 3. Confirm that the transfer is successful (see Protected Station: Software > Manager on page 313). 4. Using the Hardware Manual Lock switch (see Hardware Manual Lock on page 335), or the Software Manual Lock (see Lock Active To on page 295), force the primary radio to active. 5. Using File Transfer, load the software pack into the primary radio (see Protected Station: Software >

Primary File Transfer on page 307). 6. Confirm that the transfer is successful (see Protected Station: Software > Manager on page 313). 7. Distribute the software to the entire network of remote radios (see Protected Station: Software >

Remote Distribution on page 315). If there are protected remotes in the network, they must be locked to the current active radio. Note that the distribution process over the air will take some time, depending on RF and Transfer rate settings. Activating the new software on the radios 1. Activate the software on the entire network of remote radios (see Protected Station: Software >

Remote Activation on page 318). 2. Monitor the progress of the activation process until the stage where activation of all remote radios has been confirmed. When the new software has been activated, remote stations will re-register with the base station. The remote stations software version can verified with Network Status > Network Table on page 271. 3. If the new software version is not over the air compatible with the version currently operating on the radio, there is no need to wait as all link communication from the base station to the remote will be lost so the verification of the new version on the remote radio will fail. 4. Activate the new version software pack of the secondary radio (see Protected Station: Software >

Manager on page 313). 5. Immediately after that, activate the new version software pack of the primary radio (see Protected Station: Software > Manager on page 313). Note that the activation process will take a few minutes. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Maintenance | 361 Confirm that the new software version is now running on the radios 1. Re-login into the Protection Station and navigate to SuperVisor > Software>Summary. 2. Confirm that the Primary and Secondary radio current software version is now up to date 3. Confirm that the list of remote radios are now running the latest software version with Network Status > Network Table on page 271. 4. When the upgrade process is complete, if the Hardware Manual Lock switch has been used, set it to the Auto position. The software manual lock will release automatically. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 362 | Maintenance Single Radio Software Upgrade This upgrade process is for upgrading the software on a single Aprisa SR+ radio. Note: If a radio has been configured for a Protection Type of Redundant, and that radio is no longer part of a Protected Station, the Protection Type must be changed to None before the radio software upgrade can be achieved. File Transfer Method The Software Pack is loaded into the radio with the file transfer process (see Software > File Transfer on page 238) and activated (see Software > Manager on page 242). The Aprisa SR+ upgrade operation is indicated by a flashing orange AUX LED. To upgrade the Aprisa SR+ radio software:

1. Unzip the software release files in to the root directory of a USB flash drive. 2. Insert the USB flash drive into the host port

. 3. Using File Transfer, load the software pack into the radio (see Software > File Transfer on page 238). 4. Remove the USB flash drive from the host port

. 5. Activate the software on the radio (see Software > Manager on page 242). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Maintenance | 363 USB Boot Upgrade Method A single Aprisa SR+ radio can also be upgraded simply by plugging a USB flash drive containing the new software into the USB A host port on the Aprisa SR+ front panel and power cycling the radio. To upgrade the Aprisa SR+ radio software:

1. Unzip the software release files in to the root directory of a USB flash drive. 2. Check that the SuperVisor USB Boot Upgrade setting is set to Load and Activate (see Software >

Setup on page 237). 3. Power off the Aprisa SR+ and insert the USB flash drive into the host port

. 4. Power on the Aprisa SR+. 5. The software upgrade process is complete when the OK LED flashes green. This can take about 2 minutes. The software will have loaded in to the radio current software version. 6. Remove the USB flash drive from the host port

. 7. Power cycle the Aprisa SR. Login to the radio being upgraded and go to SuperVisor Software > Manager on page 242. The version of the uploaded software will be displayed in the Software Pack Version field and the current software version. If the upgrade process did not start, the Aprisa SR+ could already be operating on the version of software on the USB flash drive. This will be indicated by flashing OK LED and then the OK, MODE and AUX will light steady green. If the radio is not operating on the new software (after the power cycle), it could be caused by the SuperVisor USB Boot Upgrade setting set to Load Only (see Software > Setup on page 237). In this case, go to SuperVisor see Software > Manager on page 242 and tick the Software Pack Activate checkbox and click Apply. If any Display Panel LED flashes red or is steady red during the upgrade process, it indicates that the upgrade has failed. This could be caused by incorrect files on the USB flash drive or a radio hardware failure. Software Downgrade Radio software can also be downgraded if required. This may be required if a new radio is purchased for an existing network which is operating on an earlier software release. The downgrade process is the same as the upgrade process. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 364 | Maintenance Protected Station Software Upgrade This upgrade process is for upgrading the software on a single Aprisa SR+ Protected Station. USB Boot Upgrade Method Assuming the Primary radio is active and the Secondary radio is standby 1. Using the Hardware Manual Lock switch, force the primary radio to active. 2. Insert the USB flash drive with the new software release into the secondary radio host port

. 3. Power cycle the secondary radio. The radio will be upgraded with the new software. 4. When the secondary radio upgrade is completed, remove the USB flash drive, power cycle the secondary radio and wait for it to become standby. 5. Using the Hardware Manual Lock switch, force the secondary radio to active. 6. Insert the USB flash drive with the new software release into the primary radio host port

. 7. Power cycle the primary radio. The radio will be upgraded with the new software. 8. When the primary radio upgrade is completed, remove the USB flash drive, power cycle the primary radio and wait for it to become standby. 9. When the upgrade process is complete, set the Hardware Manual Lock switch to the Auto position. The secondary radio will remain active and the primary radio will remain standby. To set the primary radio to active, use the hardware lock switch to select the primary radio and wait for it to become active, then set the hardware manual lock switch to the Auto position. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 11. Interface Connections RJ45 Connector Pin Assignments Interface Connections | 365 RJ45 pin numbering Ethernet Interface Connections Pin Number Pin Function Direction TIA-568A Wire TIA-568B Wire 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmit Transmit Receive Not used Not used Receive Not used Not used Output Output Input Colour Colour Green/white Orange/white Green Orange Orange/white Green/white Blue Blue Blue/white Blue/white Input Orange Green Brown/white Brown/white Brown Brown Note: The TIA-568B wiring is the most commonly used and matches the cables we supply. RJ45 connector LED indicators LED Green Orange Status On Flashing Explanation Ethernet signal received Data traffic present on the interface Note: Do not connect Power over Ethernet (PoE) connections to the Aprisa SR+ Ethernet ports as this will damage the port. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 366 | Interface Connections RS-232 Serial Interface Connections RS-232 Pinout The Aprisa RS-232 Serial Interface is always configured as a DCE:

RJ45 Pin Function Direction TIA-568A Wire TIA-568B Wire Pin Number Colour Colour 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RTS DTR / Sleep Mode TXD Ground DCD RXD DSR CTS Input Input Green / white Orange/white Green Orange Input Orange / white Green/white Output Output Output Output Blue Blue Blue / white Blue/white Orange Green Brown / white Brown/white Brown Brown Note: The TIA-568B wiring is the most commonly used and matches the cables we supply. RS-232 Customer Cable Wiring Aprisa RS-232 Interface - DCE DTE Customer Interface DCE Customer Interface RJ45 Pin Direction Pin Pin Number Function RTS DTR TXD Ground DCD RXD DSR Input Input Input Output Output Output Function RTS DTR / Sleep Mode TXD Ground DCD RXD DSR CTS Output CTS DB9 Male Pinout Pin DB9 Female Function Pinout 7 4 3 5 1 2 6 8 CTS DSR RXD Ground TXD DTR / Sleep Mode RTS 8 6 2 5 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RS-232 RJ45 LED Indicators LED Green Orange Status On Flashing Explanation RS-232 device connected Data present on the interface Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Alarm Interface Connections Interface Connections | 367 RJ45 Pin Function Direction TIA-568A Wire TIA-568B Wire Pin Number Colour Colour 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Alarm 1 Input /

sleep control Input Green / white Orange/white Ground Green Orange Alarm 2 Input Input Orange / white Green/white Ground Blue Blue Alarm 1 Output Output Blue / white Blue/white Ground Orange Green Alarm 2 Output Output Brown / white Brown/white Ground Brown Brown Note: The TIA-568B wiring is the most commonly used and matches the cables we supply. Protection Switch Remote Control Connections 1 2 3 4 Pin Number 1 2 3 4 Function A radio active Ground B radio active Ground Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 368 | Alarm Types and Sources 12. Alarm Types and Sources Alarm Types There are three types of alarm event configuration types:

1. Threshold Type These alarm events have lower and upper limits. An alarm is raised if current reading is outside the limits. Note: the limits for PA Current, TX AGC, TX Reverse Power and Thermal shutdown are not user configurable. 2. Error Ratio Type This is the ratio of bad packets vs total packets in the defined sample duration. For Serial, it is the ratio of bad characters vs total characters in the duration seconds. An alarm is raised if current error ratio is greater than the configured ratio. The error ratio is configured in Upper Limit field and accepts value between 0 and 1. Monitoring of these events can be disabled by setting the duration parameter to 0. 3. Sample Duration Type Used for No Receive data events type. An alarm is raised if no data is received in the defined sample duration. Monitoring of these events can be disabled by setting the duration parameter to 0. See Events > Events Setup on page 224 for setup of alarm thresholds / sample durations etc. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Alarm Events Transmitter Alarm Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type 1 PA Current critical(1) Threshold Type 61 PA Driver Current critical(1) Threshold Type 62 PA Stability warning(4) Threshold Type 2 TX AGC critical(1) Threshold Type 3 TX Reverse Power warning(4) Threshold Type 60 TX Forward Power warning(4) Threshold Type Alarm Types and Sources | 369 Function Recommended Actions Alarm to indicate that the current drawn by the transmitter power amplifier is outside defined limits. Check antenna is not open or shorted, check duplexer correctly connected and tuned, if OK replace radio. Alarm to indicate that the current drawn by the transmitter power amplifier driver is outside defined limits. Check antenna is not open or shorted, check duplexer correctly connected and tuned, if OK replace radio. Alarm to indicate that the power amplifier is oscillating which may cause corruption of the TX signal Check antenna is not open or shorted, check duplexer correctly connected and tuned, if OK replace radio. Alarm to indicate that the variable gain control of the transmitter is outside defined limits. Check antenna is not open or shorted, check duplexer correctly connected and tuned, if OK replace radio. Alarm to indicate that the antenna is not connected to the radio Alarm to indicate that the transmitter power is outside the selected TX power setting. Check antenna is not open or shorted, check duplexer correctly connected and tuned, and confirm VSWR at TX port is less than 2:1. If OK replace radio. Check antenna is not open or shorted, check duplexer correctly connected and tuned, and confirm VSWR at TX port is less than 2:1. If OK replace radio. Check ambient temperature and for airflow obstructions. 4 5 Temperature Threshold TX Synthesizer Not Locked warning(4) Threshold Type Alarm to indicate that the transmitter temperature is outside defined limits. critical(1) Threshold Type Alarm to indicate that the transmitter synthesizer is not locked. Power off radio and restart. If condition persists replace radio. 31 Thermal Shutdown critical(1) Threshold Type Alarm to indicate that the transmitter has shutdown due to excessively high temperature. Check ambient temperature and for airflow obstructions. Receiver Alarm Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type 7 RSSI Threshold warning(4) Threshold Type 8 RX Synthesizer Not Locked critical(1) Not Configurable 9 RX CRC Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type Function Recommended Actions Alarm to indicate that the receiver RSSI reading taken on the last packet received is outside defined limits. Check antenna is not open or shorted. If the antenna is directional check for off-

pointing. Alarm to indicate that the receiver Synthesizer is not locked on the RF received signal. Alarm to indicate that the data received on the RF path contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Power off radio and restart. If condition persists replace radio. Check antenna is not open or shorted. Check duplexer is correctly tuned. If the antenna is directional check for off-pointing. Power off radio and restart. If condition persists replace radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 370 | Alarm Types and Sources Radio Interface Path Alarm Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type 34 RF No Receive Data warning(4) Sample Duration Type Function Recommended Actions Alarm to indicate that there is no data received on the RF path in the defined duration period. Check master is operational. If new deployment check set-

up, frequencies, and duplexer (if used). Check antenna is not open or shorted. If the antenna is directional check for off-

pointing. Power off radio and restart. If condition persists replace radio. Modem Alarm Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type Function Recommended Actions Modem FEC disable Modem ACM locked 68 70 warning(4) Not Configurable warning(4) Not Configurable Alarm to indicate that FEC has been disabled. This could be a permanent event or a timed event. Alarm to indicate that FEC has been disabled. This could be a permanent event or a timed event. Alarm to indicate that the ACM has been locked to a fixed coding and modulation. This could be a permanent event or a timed event. Alarm to indicate that the ACM has been locked to a fixed coding and modulation. This could be a permanent event or a timed event. Customer Equipment Interface Path Alarm Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type 10 Port 1 Eth No Receive Data warning(4) Sample Duration Type 11 Port 1 Eth Data Receive Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type 12 Port 1 Eth Data Transmit Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type 35 Port 2 Eth No Receive Data warning(4) Sample Duration Type 36 Port 2 Eth Data Receive Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type 37 Port 2 Eth Data Transmit Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type 44 Port 3 Eth No Receive Data warning(4) Sample Duration Type Function Recommended Actions Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 1 has no received input signal in the defined duration period. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 1 received input signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 1 transmitted output signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 2 has no received input signal in the defined duration period. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 2 received input signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 2 transmitted output signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 3 has no received input signal in the defined duration period. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Alarm Types and Sources | 371 Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type Function Recommended Actions 45 46 48 49 Port 3 Eth Data Receive Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type Port 3 Eth Data Transmit Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type Port 4 Eth No Receive Data warning(4) Sample Duration Type Port 4 Eth Data Receive Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type 50 Port 4 Eth Data Transmit Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type 13 Port 1 Serial Data No Receive Data warning(4) Sample Duration Type 14 Port 1 Serial Data Receive Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type Port 2 Serial Data No Receive Data warning(4) Sample Duration Type Port 2 Serial Data Receive Errors warning(4) Error Ratio Type Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 3 received input signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 3 transmitted output signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 4 has no received input signal in the defined duration period. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 4 received input signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Alarm to indicate that Ethernet port 4 transmitted output signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Alarm to indicate that the RS-232 port 1 has no received input signal in the defined duration period. Alarm to indicate that the RS-232 port 1 received input signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Alarm to indicate that the RS-232 port 2 has no received input signal in the defined duration period. Alarm to indicate that the RS-232 port 2 received input signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Check Ethernet cable and connector. Check switch port or RTU is active. Check IP and VLAN configuration. Check serial ports settings, check serial cable and connector. Check serial ports settings, check serial cable and connector. Check serial ports settings, check serial cable and connector. Check serial ports settings, check serial cable and connector. USB Port Serial Data No Receive Data USB Port Serial Data Receive Errors warning(4) Sample Duration Type warning(4) Error Ratio Type Alarm to indicate that the USB port has no received input signal in the defined duration period. Check serial ports settings, check USB serial cable and adapter, check serial connector. Alarm to indicate that the USB port received input signal contains errors at a higher rate than the defined error rate threshold. Check serial ports settings, check USB serial cable and adapter, check serial connector. 52 53 63 64 Component Failure Alarm Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type 16 Component Failure major(2) Not Configurable Function Recommended Actions Alarm to indicate that a hardware component has failed. Power off and restart radio. If fault persists replace radio. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 372 | Alarm Types and Sources Hardware Alarm Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type 56 VDC Power Supply warning(4) Not Configurable 3.3 Volts Power Supply 5.0 Volts Power Supply 7.2 Volts Power Supply 15 Volts Power Supply warning(4) Not Configurable warning(4) Not Configurable warning(4) Not Configurable warning(4) Not Configurable 57 58 59 71 Software Alarm Events Function Recommended Actions Alarm to indicate that the input power source is outside the operating limits of 10 to 30 VDC Check DC connection to radio. Replace power supply. Alarm to indicate that the 3.3 volt power rail is outside defined limits. Power off and restart radio. If fault persists replace radio. Alarm to indicate that the 5.0 volt power rail is outside defined limits. Power off and restart radio. If fault persists replace radio. Alarm to indicate that the 7.2 volt power rail is outside defined limits. Power off and restart radio. If fault persists replace radio. Alarm to indicate that the 15 volt power rail is outside defined limits. Power off and restart radio. If fault persists replace radio. Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type Function Recommended Actions Calibration Failure major(2) Not Configurable Alarm to indicate that the RF calibration has failed. 20 21 32 Configuration Not Supported major(2) Not Configurable Network Configuration Warning warning(4) Not Configurable 73 Radio Network warning(4) Not Configurable 39 Software Restart Required warning(4) Not Configurable Hardware Alarm Input Alarm Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type 24 Alarm Input 1 warning(4) Not Configurable 25 Alarm Input 2 warning(4) Not Configurable Power off and restart radio. If fault persists replace radio. Restore previous configuration, remove out of range or invalid parameters, updated software. Check for invalid parameters. Audit network settings. Check for duplicate or invalid parameters. Audit network settings. Reboot radio. Alarm to indicate that a configuration has entered that is invalid. Alarm to indicate a network configuration problem e.g. remote not registered. Alarm to indicate that there is an alarm in the radio network e.g. a remote radio has not registered or duplicate IP address. Alarm to indicate that a configuration has changed that requires a software reboot. Function Recommended Actions Alarm to indicate that there is an active alarm on hardware alarm input 1 Alarm to indicate that there is an active alarm on hardware alarm input 2 Action depends on nature of third-party alarm. Action depends on nature of third-party alarm. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Protected Station Alarm Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Configuration Type 17 Protection Sw Manual Lock warning(4) Not Configurable 18 Protection Hw Manual Lock warning(4) Not Configurable 23 Protection Peer Comms Lost major(2) Not Configurable Alarm Types and Sources | 373 Function Recommended Actions Alarm to indicate that the Protection Switch Software Manual Lock has been activated. Alarm to indicate that the Protection Switch Hardware Manual Lock has been activated. Alarm to indicate that the standby radio has lost communication with the active radio. Information only. Remember to unlock the Hardware Manual Lock for normal operation Check that the partner radio is powered on and the Protect cable is plugged from the switch to both radios. Check that the radios have been setup for protected operation. 54 Protection Hardware Failure major(2) Not Configurable Alarm to indicate that there is a failure in the protection switch hardware. Check that the cables are connecting the switch to both radios. Check that the switch and both radios are the same Data interface port options e.g. 2E2S Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 374 | Alarm Types and Sources Informational Events Event ID Event Display Text Default Severity Function 26 User authentication succeeded information

(5) 27 User authentication failed information

(5) 28 Protection switch failed information

(5) 29 Software System Check information

(5) 30 Software Start Up information

(5) 33 Protection Switch Occurred information

(5) Event to indicate that a user is successfully authenticated on the radio during login. The information on the user that was successfully authenticated is provided in the eventHistoryInfo object of the Event History Log. Event to indicate that a user has failed to be authenticated on the radio during login. The information on the user that was unsuccessfully authenticated is provided in the eventHistoryInfo object of the Event History Log. Event to indicate that a protection switch-over cannot occur for some reason. The reason for the failure to switch is described in the eventHistoryInfo object of the Event History Log. Event to indicate that the software has done a system check on the radio. Any information relevant to the cause of the event is provided in the eventHistoryInfo object of the Event History Log. Event to indicate that the radio software has started. Any information relevant to the software start up is provided in the eventHistoryInfo object of the Event History Log. Event to indicate that a protection switch-over occurs for some reason. The reason for the switch-over is described in the eventHistoryInfo object of the Event History Log. Recommended Actions Information No action required unless unexpected Check for possible intrusion attempt. If unexpected follow cyber incident report procedure. Investigate reason for switch over and take remedial action. Information No action required unless unexpected Information No action required unless unexpected Investigate reason for switch over and take remedial action. 41 42 43 55 65 72 File Transfer Activity information

(5) Event to indicate that a data file is being transferred to or from the radio. Information No action required unless unexpected Software Management Activity information

(5) Event to indicate that software is being distributed to remote radios. Information No action required unless unexpected Terminal Server TCP Activity information

(5) Event to indicate TCP packets are being transferred from the terminal server. Information No action required unless unexpected Terminal Unit Information information

(5) Event to indicate a miscellaneous activity occurring on the radio Information no action required unless unexpected. Event Action Activity information

(5) Event to indicate an event action occurring on the radio Information No action required unless unexpected User SuperVisor Session Logout information

(5) Event to indicate that a user has logged out or the user session has timed out Information No action required unless unexpected Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 375 13. Specifications RF Specifications Blocking (desensitization), intermodulation, spurious response rejection, and adjacent channel selectivity values determined according to the methods introduced in V1.7.1 of ETSI standards EN 300 113-1. Frequency Bands ETSI Compliant Broadcast Band Frequency Band Frequency Tuning Synthesizer Step VHF UHF UHF UHF UHF 135 MHz 220 MHz 320 MHz 400 MHz 450 MHz Range 135-175 MHz 215-240 MHz 320-400 MHz 400-470 MHz 450-520 MHz Size 0.625 kHz 0.625 kHz 6.250 kHz 6.250 kHz 6.250 kHz FCC Compliant Broadcast Band Frequency Band Frequency Tuning Synthesizer Step VHF UHF UHF UHF UHF UHF UHF 135 MHz 220 MHz 400 MHz 450 MHz 700 MHz 896 MHz 928 MHz Range 135-175 MHz 215-240 MHz 400-470 MHz 450-520 MHz Size 0.625 kHz 0.625 kHz 6.250 kHz 6.250 kHz 757-758 MHz and 6.250 kHz 787-788 MHz 896-902 MHz (Note 1) 928-960 MHz (Note 1) 6.250 kHz 6.250 kHz IC Compliant Broadcast Band Frequency Band Frequency Tuning Synthesizer Step VHF UHF UHF UHF UHF UHF 135 MHz 220 MHz 220 MHz 400 MHz 896 MHz 928 MHz Range 135-175 MHz 215-240 MHz 215-240 MHz 400-470 MHz 896-902 MHz (Note 1) 928-960 MHz (Note 1) Size 0.625 kHz 0.625 kHz 3.125 kHz 6.250 kHz 6.250 kHz 6.250 kHz The Frequency Tuning Range is not an indication of the exact frequencies approved by FCC / IC. Note 1: The receive tuning range is specified. The transmit tuning range is 896 - 960 MHz. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 376 | Specifications Channel Sizes ETSI Compliant ETSI: 135 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 60.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 20.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 25 kHz 120.0 kbit/s 80.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 52.0 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 11.6 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 25 kHz 103.9 kbit/s 46.2 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 45.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.7 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 25 kHz 91.2 kbit/s 34.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 377 ETSI: 220 / 320 / 400 MHz Bands No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 60.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 20.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 20 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 84.0 kbit/s 56.0 kbit/s 28.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 120.0 kbit/s 80.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 216.0 kbit/s 144.0 kbit/s 72.0 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 52.0 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 11.6 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 20 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 72.7 kbit/s 32.4 kbit/s 16.2 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 103.9 kbit/s 46.2 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s 187.1 kbit/s 83.2 kbit/s 41.6 kbit/s 33.4 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 45.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.7 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 20 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 63.8 kbit/s 24.2 kbit/s 12.1 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 91.2 kbit/s 34.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s 164.2 kbit/s 62.4 kbit/s 31.2 kbit/s 16.5 kbit/s Note 1: It is the responsibility of the user to check for country regulatory of 50 kHz availability in this frequency band. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 378 | Specifications ETSI: 450 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 60.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 20.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 25 kHz 120.0 kbit/s 80.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 50 kHz (1) 216.0 kbit/s 144.0 kbit/s 72.0 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 52.0 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 11.6 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 25 kHz 103.9 kbit/s 46.2 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s 50 kHz (1) 187.1 kbit/s 83.2 kbit/s 41.6 kbit/s 33.4 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 45.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.7 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 91.2 kbit/s 34.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s 164.2 kbit/s 62.4 kbit/s 31.2 kbit/s 16.5 kbit/s Note 1: It is the responsibility of the user to check for country regulatory of 50 kHz availability in this frequency band. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 379 FCC Compliant FCC: 135 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 15 kHz 30 kHz 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 54.0 kbit/s 36.0 kbit/s 18.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 96.0 kbit/s 64.0 kbit/s 32.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 15 kHz 30 kHz 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 46.8 kbit/s 20.8 kbit/s 10.4 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 83.1 kbit/s 37.0 kbit/s 18.5 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 15 kHz 30 kHz 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 41.0 kbit/s 15.6 kbit/s 7.8 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 73.0 kbit/s 27.7 kbit/s 13.9 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 380 | Specifications FCC: 220 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 54.0 kbit/s 36.0 kbit/s 18.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 15 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 60.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 20.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 96.0 kbit/s 64.0 kbit/s 32.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 216.0 kbit/s 144.0 kbit/s 72.0 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 46.8 kbit/s 20.8 kbit/s 10.4 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 15 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 52.0 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 11.6 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 83.1 kbit/s 37.0 kbit/s 18.5 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s 187.1 kbit/s 83.2 kbit/s 41.6 kbit/s 33.4 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 41.0 kbit/s 15.6 kbit/s 7.8 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 15 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 45.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.7 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 73.0 kbit/s 27.7 kbit/s 13.9 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s 164.2 kbit/s 62.4 kbit/s 31.2 kbit/s 16.5 kbit/s Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 381 FCC: 400 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 54.0 kbit/s 36.0 kbit/s 18.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 96.0 kbit/s 64.0 kbit/s 32.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 216.0 kbit/s 144.0 kbit/s 72.0 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 46.8 kbit/s 20.8 kbit/s 10.4 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 83.1 kbit/s 37.0 kbit/s 18.5 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s 187.1 kbit/s 83.2 kbit/s 41.6 kbit/s 33.4 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 41.0 kbit/s 15.6 kbit/s 7.8 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 73.0 kbit/s 27.7 kbit/s 13.9 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s 164.2 kbit/s 62.4 kbit/s 31.2 kbit/s 16.5 kbit/s Note 1: It is the responsibility of the user to check for country regulatory of 50 kHz availability in this frequency band. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 382 | Specifications FCC: 450 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 54.0 kbit/s 36.0 kbit/s 18.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 25 kHz 96.0 kbit/s 64.0 kbit/s 32.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 46.8 kbit/s 20.8 kbit/s 10.4 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 25 kHz 83.1 kbit/s 37.0 kbit/s 18.5 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 41.0 kbit/s 15.6 kbit/s 7.8 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 25 kHz 73.0 kbit/s 27.7 kbit/s 13.9 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 383 FCC: 700 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz (1) 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK (2) 120.0 kbit/s 80.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 240.0 kbit/s 160.0 kbit/s 80.0 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s 360.0 kbit/s 240.0 kbit/s 120.0 kbit/s 57.6 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz (1) 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK (2) 103.9 kbit/s 46.2 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s 207.8 kbit/s 92.5 kbit/s 46.2 kbit/s 33.4 kbit/s 311.8 kbit/s 138.7 kbit/s 69.4 kbit/s 50.1 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz (1) 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK (2) 91.2 kbit/s 34.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s 182.4 kbit/s 69.3 kbit/s 34.6 kbit/s 16.5 kbit/s 273.6 kbit/s 103.9 kbit/s 52.0 kbit/s 24.8 kbit/s Note 1: Available in future software release. Note 2: Please consult 4RF for availability. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 384 | Specifications FCC: 896 / 928 MHz Bands No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 60.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 20.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz 96.0 kbit/s 64.0 kbit/s 32.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 216.0 kbit/s 144.0 kbit/s 72.0 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 52.0 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 11.6 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz 83.1 kbit/s 37.0 kbit/s 18.5 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s 187.1 kbit/s 83.2 kbit/s 41.6 kbit/s 33.4 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 45.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.7 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz 73.0 kbit/s 27.7 kbit/s 13.9 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s 164.2 kbit/s 62.4 kbit/s 31.2 kbit/s 16.5 kbit/s Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 385 IC Compliant IC: 135 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 15 kHz 30 kHz 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 54.0 kbit/s 36.0 kbit/s 18.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 96.0 kbit/s 64.0 kbit/s 32.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 15 kHz 30 kHz 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 46.8 kbit/s 20.8 kbit/s 10.4 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 83.1 kbit/s 37.0 kbit/s 18.5 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 15 kHz 30 kHz 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 41.0 kbit/s 15.6 kbit/s 7.8 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 73.0 kbit/s 27.7 kbit/s 13.9 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 386 | Specifications IC: 220 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 54.0 kbit/s 36.0 kbit/s 18.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 15 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 60.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 20.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 96.0 kbit/s 64.0 kbit/s 32.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 216.0 kbit/s 144.0 kbit/s 72.0 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 46.8 kbit/s 20.8 kbit/s 10.4 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 15 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 52.0 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 11.6 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 83.1 kbit/s 37.0 kbit/s 18.5 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s 187.1 kbit/s 83.2 kbit/s 41.6 kbit/s 33.4 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 41.0 kbit/s 15.6 kbit/s 7.8 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 15 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 45.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.7 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 73.0 kbit/s 27.7 kbit/s 13.9 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s 164.2 kbit/s 62.4 kbit/s 31.2 kbit/s 16.5 kbit/s Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 387 IC: 400 MHz Band No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 54.0 kbit/s 36.0 kbit/s 18.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 96.0 kbit/s 64.0 kbit/s 32.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 216.0 kbit/s 144.0 kbit/s 72.0 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 46.8 kbit/s 20.8 kbit/s 10.4 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 83.1 kbit/s 37.0 kbit/s 18.5 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s 187.1 kbit/s 83.2 kbit/s 41.6 kbit/s 33.4 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 41.0 kbit/s 15.6 kbit/s 7.8 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz (1) 73.0 kbit/s 27.7 kbit/s 13.9 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s 164.2 kbit/s 62.4 kbit/s 31.2 kbit/s 16.5 kbit/s Note 1: It is the responsibility of the user to check for country regulatory of 50 kHz availability in this frequency band. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 388 | Specifications IC: 896 / 928 MHz Bands No Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 60.0 kbit/s 40.0 kbit/s 20.0 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz 96.0 kbit/s 64.0 kbit/s 32.0 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 216.0 kbit/s 144.0 kbit/s 72.0 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s Minimum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 52.0 kbit/s 23.1 kbit/s 11.6 kbit/s 8.4 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz 83.1 kbit/s 37.0 kbit/s 18.5 kbit/s 16.7 kbit/s 187.1 kbit/s 83.2 kbit/s 41.6 kbit/s 33.4 kbit/s Maximum Coded Forward Error Correction Channel Size Gross Radio Capacity less FEC 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 12.5 kHz 45.6 kbit/s 17.3 kbit/s 8.7 kbit/s 4.1 kbit/s 25 kHz 50 kHz 73.0 kbit/s 27.7 kbit/s 13.9 kbit/s 8.3 kbit/s 164.2 kbit/s 62.4 kbit/s 31.2 kbit/s 16.5 kbit/s Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Receiver Receiver Sensitivity Specifications | 389 12.5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz Max coded FEC

-106 dBm

-102 dBm

-99 dBm

-96 dBm Min coded FEC

-105 dBm

-101 dBm

-98 dBm

-95 dBm No FEC

-103 dBm

-99 dBm

-96 dBm

-93 dBm Max coded FEC

-113 dBm

-110 dBm

-107 dBm

-104 dBm Min coded FEC

-112 dBm

-109 dBm

-106 dBm

-103 dBm No FEC

-109 dBm

-106 dBm

-103 dBm

-100 dBm Max coded FEC

-118 dBm

-115 dBm

-112 dBm

-109 dBm Min coded FEC

-117 dBm

-114 dBm

-111 dBm

-108 dBm No FEC

-115 dBm

-112 dBm

-109 dBm

-106 dBm 64 QAM 64 QAM 64 QAM 16 QAM 16 QAM 16 QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK 4-CPFSK Max coded FEC NA NA NA NA 4-CPFSK Min coded FEC

-117 dBm

-114 dBm

-111 dBm

-108 dBm 4-CPFSK No FEC

-115 dBm

-112 dBm

-109 dBm

-106 dBm 64 QAM 64 QAM 64 QAM 16 QAM 16 QAM 16 QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK Max coded FEC

-103 dBm

-99 dBm

-96 dBm

-93 dBm Min coded FEC

-101 dBm

-97 dBm

-94 dBm

-91 dBm No FEC

-96 dBm

-92 dBm

-89 dBm

-86 dBm Max coded FEC

-110 dBm

-107 dBm

-104 dBm

-101 dBm Min coded FEC

-108 dBm

-105 dBm

-102 dBm

-99 dBm No FEC

-102 dBm

-99 dBm

-96 dBm

-93 dBm Max coded FEC

-115 dBm

-112 dBm

-109 dBm

-106 dBm Min coded FEC

-113 dBm

-110 dBm

-107 dBm

-104 dBm No FEC

-108 dBm

-105 dBm

-102 dBm

-99 dBm 4-CPFSK Max coded FEC NA NA NA NA 4-CPFSK Min coded FEC

-113 dBm

-110 dBm

-107 dBm

-104 dBm 4-CPFSK No FEC

-108 dBm

-105 dBm

-102 dBm

-99 dBm Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 BER < 10-6 390 | Specifications Adjacent Channel Selectivity 12.5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz Adjacent channel selectivity

> -47 dBm

> -37 dBm

> -37 dBm

> -37 dBm BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 Co-Channel Rejection BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK

> 43 dB

> 53 dB

> 53 dB

> 53 dB

> 43 dB

> 53 dB

> 53 dB

> 53 dB

> 48 dB

> 58 dB

> 58 dB

> 58 dB

> 55 dB

> 65 dB

> 65 dB

> 65 dB 12.5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz

> 23 dB

> 23 dB

> 23 dB

> 23 dB

> 19 dB

> 19 dB

> 19 dB

> 19 dB

> 12 dB

> 12 dB

> 12 dB

> 12 dB

> 17 dB

> 17 dB

> 17 dB

> 17 dB Intermodulation Response Rejection 12.5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz Intermodulation response rejection

> -35 dBm

> -35 dBm

> -35 dBm

> -35 dBm BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK

> 55 dB

> 55 dB

> 55 dB

> 55 dB

> 55 dB

> 55 dB

> 55 dB

> 55 dB

> 60 dB

> 60 dB

> 60 dB

> 60 dB

> 65 dB

> 65 dB

> 65 dB

> 65 dB Blocking or Desensitization 12.5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz Blocking or desensitization

> -17 dBm

> -17 dBm

> -17 dBm

> -17 dBm BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK

> 73 dB

> 73 dB

> 73 dB

> 73 dB

> 73 dB

> 73 dB

> 73 dB

> 73 dB

> 78 dB

> 78 dB

> 78 dB

> 78 dB

> 85 dB

> 85 dB

> 85 dB

> 85 dB Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 391 Spurious Response Rejection 12.5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz Spurious response rejection

> -32 dBm

> -32 dBm

> -32 dBm

> -32 dBm BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 BER < 10-2 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 4-CPFSK

> 58 dB

> 58 dB

> 58 dB

> 58 dB

> 58 dB

> 58 dB

> 58 dB

> 58 dB

> 63 dB

> 63 dB

> 63 dB

> 63 dB

> 70 dB

> 70 dB

> 70 dB

> 70 dB Receiver Spurious Radiation 12.5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 75 kHz Receiver spurious radiation

> -57 dBm

> -57 dBm

> -57 dBm

> -57 dBm Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 392 | Specifications Transmitter Max peak envelope power

(PEP) 12.5 W (+41 dBm) Average Power output 64 QAM 16 QAM QPSK 0.01 to 2.5 W (+10 to +34 dBm, in 1 dB steps) 0.01 to 3.2 W (+10 to +35 dBm, in 1 dB steps) 0.01 to 5.0 W (+10 to +37 dBm, in 1 dB steps) 4-CPFSK (Note 1) 0.01 to 10.0 W (+10 to +40 dBm, in 1 dB steps) Note 1: Please consult 4RF for availability Note: The Aprisa SR+ transmitter contains power amplifier protection which allows the antenna to be disconnected from the antenna port without product damage. Adjacent channel power

< - 60 dBc Transient adjacent channel power

< - 60 dBc Spurious emissions Attack time Release time Data turnaround time Frequency stability Frequency aging

< - 37 dBm

< 1.5 ms

< 0.5 ms

< 2 ms 1.0 ppm

< 1 ppm / annum Emission Designator Suffix QPSK G1D, QAM D1D Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 393 Modem Forward Error Correction Variable length concatenated Reed Solomon plus convolutional code Adaptive Burst Support Adaptive FEC Adaptive Coding and Modulation Data Payload Security Data payload security CCM* Counter with CBC-MAC Data encryption Data authentication Counter Mode Encryption (CTR) using Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128, 192 or 256 Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code (CBC-MAC) using Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128, 192 or 256 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 394 | Specifications Interface Specifications Ethernet Interface The Aprisa SR+ radio features an integrated 10Base-T/100Base-TX layer-2 Ethernet switch. To simplify network setup, each port supports auto-negotiation and auto-sensing MDI/MDIX. Operators can select from the following preset modes:

Auto negotiate 10Base-T half or full duplex 100Base-TX half or full duplex The Ethernet ports are IEEE 802.3-compatible. The L2 Bridge (Switch) is IEEE 802.1d/q/p compatible, and supports VLANs and VLAN manipulation of add/remove VLANs. General Interface RJ45 x 2 (Integrated 2-port switch) Cabling CAT-5/6 UTP, supports auto MDIX (Standard Ethernet) Maximum line length 100 metres on cat-5 or better Bandwidth allocation The Ethernet capacity maximum is determined by the available radio link capacity. Maximum transmission unit Option setting of 1522 or 1536 octets Address table size 1024 MAC addresses Ethernet mode Diagnostics Left Green LED Right Orange LED 10Base-T or 100Base-TX Full duplex or half duplex

(Auto-negotiating and auto-sensing) Off: no Ethernet signal received On: Ethernet signal received Off: no data present on the interface Flashing: data present on the interface Note: Do not connect Power over Ethernet (PoE) connections to the Aprisa SR+ Ethernet ports as this will damage the port. Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 395 RS-232 Asynchronous Interface The Aprisa SR+ radios ITU-T V.24 compliant RS-232 interface is configured as a Cisco pinout DCE. The interface terminates to a DTE using a straight-through cable or to a DCE with a crossover cable (null modem). The interface uses two handshaking control lines between the DTE and the DCE. General Interface ITU-T V.24 / EIA/TIA RS-232E Async parameters Interface direction DCE only Maximum line length 10 metres (dependent on baud rate) Standard mode data bits 7 or 8 bits Standard mode parity Configurable for None, Even or Odd Standard mode stop bits 1 or 2 bits Interface baud rates 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bit/s Control signals DCE to DTE CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR Diagnostics Left Green LED Right Orange LED Off: no RS-232 device connected On: RS-232 device connected Off: no data present on the interface Flashing: data present on the interface Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 396 | Specifications Hardware Alarms Interface The hardware alarms interface supports two alarm inputs and two alarms outputs. Alarm Inputs The alarm connector provides two hardware alarm inputs for alarm transmission to the other radios in the network. Interface Detector type RJ45 connector Non-isolated ground referenced voltage detector Detection voltage - on Detection voltage - off Maximum applied input voltage Maximum input current limit

> +10 VDC

< +4 VDC 30 VDC 10 mA Alarm Outputs The alarm connector provides two hardware alarm outputs for alarm reception from other radios in the network. Interface Output type RJ45 connector Non-isolated ground referenced open collector output Maximum applied voltage Maximum drive current 30 VDC 100 mA Overload protection Thermally resettable fuse Protect Interface The Protect interface is used to connect the radios to the protection switch within a Protected Station. It is not a customer interface. Protection Switch Specifications RF Insertion Loss

< 0.5 dB (switch and connecting cables) Remote Control inputs Logic 4700 ohms pullup to +3.3 VDC Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 397 Power Specifications Power Supply Aprisa SR+ Radio Nominal voltage

+13.8 VDC (negative earth) Absolute input voltage range

+10 to +30 VDC Maximum power input 35 W Connector Molex 2 pin male screw fitting 39526-4002 Aprisa SR+ Protected Station Power Input 13.8 VDC 48 VDC Nominal voltage

+13.8 VDC (negative 48 VDC (floating) earth) Absolute input voltage range

+10 to +30 VDC 18 to 60 VDC Maximum power input 42 W Connector 2x Molex 2 pin male screw fitting 39526-4002 Aprisa SR+ Migration Master Station Power Input 13.8 VDC 48 VDC Nominal voltage

+13.8 VDC (negative 48 VDC (floating) earth) Absolute input voltage range

+10 to +30 VDC 18 to 60 VDC Maximum power input 48 W Connector 4x Molex 2 pin male screw fitting 39526-4002 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 398 | Specifications Power Consumption Note: The radio power consumption is very dependent on transmitter power, the type of traffic and network activity. Aprisa SR+ Radio Mode Power Consumption Transmit / Receive

< 35 W for 10 W transmit peak power

< 25.0 W for 1 W transmit power Receive only Standard

< 7 W Power Optimized

< 3 W in active receive state

< 2 W in idle receive state

< 0.5 W in sleep mode Aprisa SR+ Protected Station and Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station Mode Power Consumption Transmit / Receive

< 42 W for 10 W transmit peak power

< 32.0 W for 1 W transmit power Receive only

< 15 W Aprisa SR+ Migration Master Station Mode Power Consumption Transmit / Receive

< 48 W for 10 W transmit peak power

< 38.0 W for 1 W transmit power Receive only

< 21 W Power Dissipation Aprisa SR+ Radio Transmit Power Power Dissipation 10 W transmit power 1 W transmit power

< 25 W

< 24 W Aprisa SR+ Protected Station and Aprisa SR+ Data Driven Protected Station Transmit Power Power Dissipation 10 W transmit power 1 W transmit power

< 32 W

< 31 W Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO Specifications | 399 General Specifications Environmental Operating temperature range

-40 to +70 C (-40 to +158 F) Storage temperature range

-40 to +80 C (-40 to +176 F) Operating humidity Maximum 95% non-condensing Acoustic noise emission No audible noise emission Mechanical Aprisa SR+ Radio Dimensions Width 210 mm (8.27) Depth 130 mm (5.12) and 146 mm (5.748) with TNC connectors Weight Colour Mounting Height 41.5 mm (1.63) 1.25 kg (2.81 lbs) Matt black Wall (2 x M5 screws) Rack shelf (4 x M4 screws) DIN rail bracket Aprisa SR+ Protected Station Dimensions Width 432.6 mm (17) Weight Colour Mounting Depth 372 mm (14.6) and 388 mm (15.276) with TNC connectors Height 2U plus external duplexer (if used) 9.4 kg (22 lbs) (includes the 2 radios) Matt black Rack mount (4 x M6 screws) Aprisa SR+ Migration Master Station Dimensions Width 432.6 mm (17) Weight Colour Mounting Depth 372 mm (14.6) and 388 mm (15.276) with TNC connectors Height 3U plus external duplexer (if used) 13.8 kg (31 lbs) (includes the 2 radios) Matt black Rack mount (8 x M6 screws) Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 400 | Specifications Compliance ETSI FCC IC Radio EMI / EMC Safety Environmental Radio EMC Safety EN 300 113-2 EN 301 489-1 and 5 EN 60950-1:2006 Class 1 division 2 for hazardous locations ETS 300 019 Class 3.4 Ingress Protection IP51 47CFR part 24, part 27, part 90 and part 101 Private Land Mobile Radio Services 47CFR part 15 Radio Frequency Devices, EN 301 489-1 and 5 EN 60950-1:2006 Class 1 division 2 for hazardous locations Environmental ETS 300 019 Class 3.4 Ingress Protection IP51 Radio EMC RSS-119 / RSS-134 This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian standard ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Safety EN 60950-1:2006 Class 1 division 2 for hazardous locations Environmental ETS 300 019 Class 3.4 Ingress Protection IP51 Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 14. Product End Of Life Product End Of Life | 401 End-of-Life Recycling Programme (WEEE) The WEEE Directive concerns the recovery, reuse, and recycling of electronic and electrical equipment. Under the Directive, used equipment must be marked, collected separately, and disposed of properly. 4RF has implemented an end-of-life recycling programme to manage the reuse, recycling, and recovery of waste in an environmentally safe manner using processes that comply with the WEEE Directive (EU Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment 2002/96/EC). The WEEE Symbol Explained This symbol appears on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) as part of the WEEE (Waste EEE) directive. It means that the EEE may contain hazardous substances and must not be thrown away with municipal or other waste. WEEE Must Be Collected Separately You must not dispose of electrical and electronic waste with municipal and other waste. You must separate it from other waste and recycling so that it can be easily collected by the proper regional WEEE collection system in your area. YOUR ROLE in the Recovery of WEEE By separately collecting and properly disposing of WEEE, you are helping to reduce the amount of WEEE that enters the waste stream. One of the aims of the WEEE directive is to divert EEE away from landfill and encourage recycling. Recycling EEE means that valuable resources such as metals and other materials (which require energy to source and manufacture) are not wasted. Also, the pollution associated with accessing new materials and manufacturing new products is reduced. EEE Waste Impacts the Environment and Health Electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) contains hazardous substances which have potential effects on the environment and human health. If you want environmental information on the Aprisa SR+ radio, contact us (on page 15). Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 402 | Copyrights 15. Copyrights Mirrored Bits is a registered trademark of Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO 16. Abbreviations Abbreviations | 403 AES AGC BER CBC CCM DCE DTE EMC EMI ESD ETSI FW HW IF IP I/O ISP Advanced Encryption Standard TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Automatic Gain Control Bit Error Rate Cipher Block Chaining Counter with CBC-MAC integrity Data Communications Equipment Data Radio Equipment Electro-Magnetic Compatibility Electro-Magnetic Interference Electro-Static Discharge Protocol TCXO Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol TMR TX UTP VAC VCO VDC Trunk Mobile Radio Transmitter Unshielded Twisted Pair Volts AC Voltage Controlled Oscillator Volts DC European Telecommunications Standards WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Institute Firmware Hardware Intermediate Frequency Internet Protocol Input/Output Internet Service Provider kbit/s Kilobits per second kHz LAN LED mA MAC MAC Kilohertz Local Area Network Light Emitting Diode Milliamps Media Access Control Message Authentication Code Mbit/s Megabits per second MHz MIB Megahertz Management Information Base MTBF Mean Time Between Failures MTTR Mean Time To Repair ms NMS PC PCA PLL ppm PMR RF milliseconds Network Management System Personal Computer Printed Circuit Assembly Phase Locked Loop Parts Per Million Public Mobile Radio Radio Frequency RoHS Restriction of Hazardous Substances RSSI RX Received Signal Strength Indication Receiver SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNR SWR Signal to Noise Ratio Standing Wave Ratio Aprisa SR+ User Manual 1.6.0 PO

APPENDIX N - Label Location Test Report S/N: 45461350-R1.0 Test Report Issue Date: 22 July 2016 2016 Celltech Labs Inc. This document is not to be reproduced in whole or in part without the expressed written permission of Celltech Labs Inc. Page 95 of 96

APPENDIX O - Label Sample Test Report S/N: 45461350-R1.0 Test Report Issue Date: 22 July 2016 2016 Celltech Labs Inc. This document is not to be reproduced in whole or in part without the expressed written permission of Celltech Labs Inc. Page 96 of 96

re 4RE 14 July 2016 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 United States of America To Whom lt May Concern:

RE: Certification application for FCC ID: UIPSQ757M160. The following information is to be held confidential indefinitely pursuant to FCC 47 CFR 0.457(d) and 0.459, because the information provided contains trade secrets and is proprietary. If made public, the information might be used to the disadvantage of the applicant in the market place and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. Schematics e Technical Product Description e Block Diagrams e =Parts List For and on behalf of ARF Limited Sincerely,

() Pau ng Covhpliance Manager ARF Limited, 26 Glover Street, Ngauranga, Wellington 6035, New Zealand Tel + 64 4 499 6000 Fax + 64 4 473 4447 Email 4rf@4rf.com

4R e@

14 July 2016 Federal Communications Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 To whom it may concern:

We, 4RF Limited, hereby authorize Ben Hewson of Celltech Labs Inc. to act on our behalf in all matters relating to applications for equipment authorization, including the signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Ben Hewson of Celltech Labs Inc. on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. We also hereby certify that no party to this application is subject to a denial of benefits, including FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S. C. 853(a). This authorization expires two years from the date of this letter. For and on behalf of 4RF Limited Sincerely, I Paul Young Compliance Manager ARF Limited, 26 Glover Street, Ngauranga, Wellington 6035, New Zealand Tel + 64 4 499 6000 Fax + 64 4 473 4447 Email 4rf@4rf.com

4RF Aprisa SR+ digital radio, FCC ID UIPSQ757M160 There is no tune up procedure for this radio since it is a digital radio. All settings and calibration are done in the factory and stored in memory.